p63x en M bm6 610-611-620-621 Vol 1

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN M/Bm6

Version P631 P632 P633 P634
-305/6/7/8 -305/6/7/8 -305/6/7/8 -305/6/7/8
-403/4/5/6/7/8 -403/4/5/6/7/8 -404/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12 -403/4/5/6/7/8
-610/11/20/21 -610/11/20/21 -610/11/20/21 -610/11/20/21
Technical Manual
Content P63x/EN M/Ca4 P63x/EN AD/Ak6 P63x/EN AD/Am6 (-610) (-611/620) (-621)
Volume 1 of 2
MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN M/Ca4 (AFSV.12/09701 D)
Version P631 P632 P633 P634 -305 -305 -305 -305 -403/404 -403/404 -404/405/406 -403/404 -610 -610 -610 -610
Technical Manual
Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used, wire end ferrules must be employed. Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance, and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device. Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification is made without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being connected; are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards; are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note:
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information. Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric, including settlement of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.
Modifications After Going to Press
P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
11
12
Contents
1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.10 2.11 2.12
Application and Scope Technical Data Conformity General Data Tests Type tests Routine Tests Environmental Conditions Inputs and Outputs Interfaces Information Output Settings Deviations Deviations of the Operate Values Deviations of the Timer Stages Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition Recording Functions Power Supply Current Transformer Specifications
1-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17
13
Contents
(continued)
3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.5.1 3.4.5.2 5.4.5.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.8 3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 3.10 3.11 3.11.1 3.11.2 3.11.3 3.11.4 3.11.5 3.11.6 3.11.7 3.11.8 3.11.9 3.11.10 3.11.11 3.11.12 3.11.13 14
Operation Modular Structure Operator-Machine Communication Configuration of the Measured (Function Group LOC) Value Panels Serial Interfaces PC interface (Function Group PC) Communication Interface (Function Group COMM1) Communication Interface 2 UCA2 Communication Interface IEC 61850 Communication Interface IEC 61850 Communication Interface Generic Object Oriented Substation Event Generic Substation State Event IRIG-B Clock Synchronization Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs Measured data input Direct Current Input Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays Measured data output BCD Measured Data Output Analog Measured Data Output Output of External Measured Data Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators Main Functions of the P63x Conditioning of the Measured values Phase Reversal Function Selection of the Residual Current to be Monitored Forming a Virtual Transformer End Operating Data Measurement Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions Activation of Dynamic Parameters Multiple Blocking Multiple Signaling of the Measuring Circuit Monitoring Function Blocked / Faulty Starting Signals and Tripping Logic Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization Resetting Mechanisms (Function Group COMM2) (Function Group UCA2) (Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE) (Function Group IEC) (Function Group GOOSE) (Function Group GSSE) (Function Group IRIGB) (Function Group INP) (Function Group MEASI)
3-1 3-1 3-3 3-4 3-7 3-7 3-9 3-18 3-21 3-22 3-22 3.25 3-27 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-36 3-37 3-40 3-43 3-45 3-51 3-52 3-56 3-56 3-60 3-62 3-64 3-66 3-79 3-81 3-82 3-84 3-85 3-86 3-90 3-92
(Function Group OUTP) (Function Group MEASO)
(Function Group LED) (Function Group MAIN)
Contents
(continued)
3.11.14 3.11.15 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3-24 3.25 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.31 3.32
Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels Test mode Parameter Subset Selection Self-Monitoring Operating Data Recording Monitoring Signal Recording Overload Data Acquisition Overload Recording Fault Data Acquisition Fault Recording Differential Protection Ground Differential Protection (Br: Restricted earth fault protection) Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection Thermal Overload Protection Time-Voltage Protection Over-/Underfrequency Protection Overfluxing Protection Current Transformer Supervision Measuring-Circuit Monitoring Limit Value Monitoring Limit Value Monitoring of Phase Currents Programmable Logic
3-93 3-94 3-95 3-97 3-100 3-101 3-102 3-105 3-108 3-116 3-122 3-145 3-157 3-167 3-183 3-193 3-196 3-202 3-210 3-218 3-221 3-224 3-227
(Function Group PSS) (Function Group SFMON) (Function Group OP_RC) (Function Group MT_RC) (Function Group OL_DA) (Function Group OL_RC) (Function Group FT_DA) (Function Group FT_RC) (Function Group DIFF) (Function Groups REF_1 to REF_3) (Function Groups DTOC1 to DTOC3) (Function Groups IDMT1 to IDMT3) (Function Groups THRM1 and THRM2) (Function Group V<>) (Function Group f<>) (Function Group V/f) (Function Group CTS) (Function Groups MCM_1 to MCM_4) (Function Group LIMIT) (Function Groups LIM_1 to LIM_3) (Function Group LOGIC)
15
Contents
(continued)
4 4.1 4.2 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7 6.5.8 6.5.9 7 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.3.1 7.1.3.2 7.1.3.3
Design Designs Modules Installation and Connection Unpacking and Packing Checking Nominal Data and Design Type Location Requirements Installation Protective and Operational Grounding Connection Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits Connecting the IRIG-B Interface Connecting the Serial Interfaces Local Control Panel Display and Keypad Changing between Display Levels Display Illumination Control at the Panel Level Control at the Menu Tree Level Navigation in the Menu Tree Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode Change-Enabling Function Changing Parameters Setting a List Parameter Memory Readout Resetting Password-Protected Control Actions Changing the Password Settings Parameters Device Identification Configuration Parameters Function Parameters Global General Functions Parameter Subsets
4-1 4-1 4-9 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-18 5-18 6-1 6-2 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-19 6-20 6-21 7-1 7-1 7-2 7-6 7-50 7-50 7-55 7-67
16
Contents
(continued)
8 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.1.1 8.1.1.2 8.1.1.3 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 9 9.1 9.2 10 11 12 13 14 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4
Information and Control Functions Operation Cyclic Values Measured Operating Data Physical State Signals Logic State Signals Control and Testing Operating Data Recording Events Event Counters Measured Event Data Event Recording Commissioning Safety Instructions Commissioning Tests Troubleshooting Maintenance Storage Accessories and Spare Parts Order Information Order Information for P631 in 40TE case Order Information for P632 in 40TE case Order Information for P633 in 40TE or 84TE case Order Information for P634 in 84TE case Appendix A Glossary B Signal List C Terminal connection diagrams D Overview of Changes Address list: See chapters 7, 8 and 10, as well as the MiCOM S1 / S&R-103 support software.
8-1 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-8 8-15 8-33 8-37 8-38 8-38 8-39 8-42 9-1 9-1 9-3 10-1 11-1 12-1 13-1 14-1 14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4
17
18
1 Application and Scope
Application and Scope
The P63x differential protection devices are designed for the fast and selective shortcircuit protection of transformers, motors and generators and of other two-, three- or four-winding end arrangements. The MiCOM P63x range features fast three-stage differential protection by applying a tripping characteristic with two knee points and two high value settable differential current thresholds to enable rapid tripping in conjunction with inrush, overfluxing and through-stabilization. Amplitude and vector group matching is made by just entering the nominal values of each transformer end and the associated current transformers. A new (optional) overreaching current measuring circuit monitoring function will prevent unwanted tripping by differential protection for faults in the CT's secondary circuit. When considering 1 circuit breaker arrangements and ring busbar arrangements it is also possible to define a virtual end, where phase currents and the residual current from two freely-selectable ends may be added geometrically (vector sum). A phase reversal function is available for applications in pumped storage power stations. In a device type where protection functions are available more than once they may each be freely assigned to individual winding ends. Moreover there are numerous backup protection and automatic control functions available. The relevant protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter subsets in order to adapt the protection device to different operating and power system management conditions.
1-1

(continued)
General functions
General functions are complete function groups, which may be individually configured or cancelled, depending on the application (e.g. included in or excluded from the devices configuration). An exception is the M A I N function, which is always visible. A function is selected by a mouse click in the support software:
Unused or cancelled function groups are hidden to the user, thus simplifying the menu. Communication functions and measured value functions may also be configured or excluded. This concept provides a wide choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple and clear parameter settings and adaptations to each protection scheme can be made. The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes it possible to accommodate special applications.
1-2

(continued)
General Functions
87 DIFF Differential protection > Three-stage differential protection > Amplitude and vector group matching > Residual current filtering > Tripping characteristic with two knee points > Inrush stabilization > Overfluxing stabilization > Through stabilization 87 G 50 51 49 27 / 59 81 O/U 24 REF_x DTOCx IDMTx THRMx V<> f<> U_f CTS MCM_x LIMIT, LIM_x LOGIC Ground differential protection (Br: Restricted earth fault protection) Definite-time overcurrent protection Inverse-time overcurrent protection Thermal overload protection Time-voltage protection Over-/underfrequency protection Overfluxing protection Current transformer supervision Measuring-circuit monitoring Limit value monitoring Programmable logic 2 2 1
P631
2 ends
P632
2 ends
P633
3 ends
P634
4 ends
2 2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 2 1 1 1 optional 3 3 1
3 3 3 2 1 1 1 optional 4 3 1
optional 2 2 1
optional 2 2 1
Communication Functions
COMM1, COMM2 IRIGB IEC, GOOSE, GSSE 2 information interfaces IRIG-B IEC 61850 communications protocol
P63x
options
Input/output functions
INP / OUTP Binary signal inputs / Output relays (maximum number)
P631
4 / 14
P632
34 / 22
P633
40 / 30
P634
34 / 22
Measured Value Functions

MEASI / MEASO Analog input / output (20 mA and resistance thermometer inputs, 2 x 20 mA outputs)
P631
-
P632
optional
P633
optional
P634
optional
Measuring inputs
Phase currents Resultant current and neutral-point current Voltage
P631
2x3 -
P632
2x3 2 1
P633
3x3 3 1
P634
4x3 3 1
1-3

(continued)
Global functions
In addition to the listed features and extensive self-monitoring, the P63x offers the following global functions: Global functions
PSS Parameter subset selection System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing and operation Operating data recording (time-tagged event logging) Overload Data Acquisition Overload recording (time-tagged event logging) Fault data acquisition for a particular, settable point in time during a fault Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the three phase currents, the residual currents, the three phase-to-ground voltages, the neutral-point displacement voltage and the reference voltage before, during and after a fault).
OP_RC OL_DA OL_RC FT_DA FT_RC
Further functions Further functions

MAIN DVICE LED LOC PC SFMON MT_RC Main function Device LED indicators Local control panel PC link Comprehensive self-monitoring Monitoring Signal Recording
1-4

(continued)
Functional diagram
Communication
COMM1
COMM2
IEC
Inter MiCOM
IRIG-B
Iph V IY,a
to SCADA / Substation control / RTU / Modem ... via RS485 or Optical Fibre using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier resp. via RJ45 or Fibre Optics using IEC 61850
Self Monitoring
Recording and Data Acquisition
Overload rec.
LOGIC
LIM-3
LIM-2
LIM-1
Metering
Fault rec.
27, 59 V<>
81 f<>
24 V/f
IY,b
87G REF_3 87G REF_2 50 DTOC-3 50 DTOC-2 50 DTOC-1 51 IDMT-3 51 IDMT--2 51 IDMT--1 49 THRM2 49 THRM1 BC_4
BC _3
Iph IY,c Iph Iph
87 DIFF
87G REF_1
BC_2
BC_1
Ivirtual
RTD,mA mA_OP
always available optional or specific
Transformer Differential Protection P63x
1-5

(continued)
Design
The MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 protection devices are modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one digital p/c board. The nominal current and voltage values of the measuring inputs on the P63x can be set with the function parameters. The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. As an option binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available. The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range. The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24 VDC version is also available. All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes. The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for PT 100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751. The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points. Two selectable measured values (cyclically updated measured operating data and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available, a selectable measured value can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
Inputs and outputs
1-6

(continued)
Control and display
Local control panel 17 LED indicators, 12 with user-definable functional assignment PC interface Communication interfaces (optional)
Information interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2). Using the first communication interface, the numerical protection device can be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system. The first communication interface is optionally available with a switcheable protocol (per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or Courier) or as an IEC 61850 interface. The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103 only) is designed for remote control. External clock synchronization can be accomplished by using the optional IRIG-B input.
1-7

(continued)
Overview of all function groups

P631 IDMT1: IDMT2: IDMT3: OUTP: OP_RC: DIFF: REF_1: REF_2: REF_3: INP: f<>: DVICE: GOOSE: LIMIT: MAIN: LIM_1: LIM_2: LIM_3: GSSE: IEC: IRIGB: COMM1: COMM2: LED: LOGIC: MEASO: MEASI: MCM_1: MCM_2: MCM_3: MCM_4: PC: PSS: SFMON: CTS: FT_RC: FT_DA: THRM1: THRM2: V<>: V/f: OL_RC: OL_DA: DTOC1: DTOC2 DTOC3: MT_RC: UCA2: LOC: Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 2 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 3 Binary outputs Operating data recording Differential protection Ground differential protection 1 (Br: Restricted earth fault protection 1) Ground differential protection 2 (Br: Restricted earth fault protection 2) Ground differential protection 3 (Br: Restricted earth fault protection 3) Binary input Over-/underfrequency protection Device Generic Object Orientated Substation Events (as of P63x 610) Limit value monitoring Main function Limit value monitoring 1 Limit value monitoring 2 Limit value monitoring 3 IEC Generic Substation Status Events (as of P63x 610) IEC 61850 Communication (as of P63x 610) IRIG-B interface Communication interface 1 Communication interface 2 (as of P63x 602) LED indicators Logic Measured data output Measured data input Measuring-circuit monitoring 1 (as of P63x 602) Measuring-circuit monitoring 2 (as of P63x 602) Measuring-circuit monitoring 3 (as of P63x 602) Measuring-circuit monitoring 4 (as of P63x 602) PC link Parameter subset selection Self-monitoring Current transformer supervision (as of P63x 606) Fault recording Fault data acquisition Thermal overload protection 1 Thermal overload protection 2 Time-voltage protection Overfluxing protection (as of P63x 602) Overload recording Overload data acquisition Definite-time overcurrent protection 1 Definite-time overcurrent protection 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection 3 Monitoring signal recording Utility Communication Architecture 2.0 (P63x 604/-605/-606 only) Local control panel P632 P633 P634
1-8
2 Technical Data
2 2.1 Notice
Technical Data Conformity
Applicable to P631 / P632 / P634, version -305 -403/404/-610 and P633 version -305-404/405/406-610. (Per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.) The products designated P631, P632, P633 and P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices have been designed and manufactured in compliance with European standards EN 60255-6 and EN 60010-1 and with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive issued by the Council of the European Community. 2.2 General Data
Declaration of conformity
General device data
Design Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for 19" cabinets and for control panels. Installation Position Vertical 30 Degree of Protection Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529. IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case (IP 10 for ring-terminal connection) Weight 40TE case: Approx. 7 kg; 84TE case: Approx. 11 kg Dimensions and Connections See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5). Terminals PC interface (X6): EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin. Communication Interface: Optical fibers (X7 and X8): F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 60874-2 and DIN 47258 (for plastic fibers) or optical fiber connection BFOC-ST connector 2.5 per IEC 60874-10-1 and DIN 47254-1 (for glass fibers) (ST is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors) M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm.
or Leads (X9 and X10):
or (for IEC 61850 only via 100 Mbit/s Ethernet board) (X13): Glass fiber SC per IEC 60874-14-4 and RJ45 wire IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug.
2-1
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Current Measuring Inputs: Threaded terminals for pin-terminal connection: M5, self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross-sections 4 mm2 or Threaded terminals for ring-terminal connection: M4 Other Inputs and Outputs: Threaded terminals for pin-terminal connection: M3, self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross-sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 or Threaded terminals for ring-terminal connection: M4. Creepage Distances and Clearances Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 664-1. Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V, overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV. 2.3 2.3.1 Type tests Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Tests Type Tests
All tests per EN 60263-6 or IEC 60255-26. Interference Suppression Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A. 1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3 Contact discharge, single discharges: > 10 Holding time: > 5 s Test voltage: 6 kV Test generator: 50 to 100 M, 150 pF / 330 Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204 , severity level 3 Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 % Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 %
For this EN, ENV or IEC standard, the DIN EN, DINV ENV or DIN IEC edition, respectively, was used in the test.
2-2
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements Per IEC 60255-22-4, Class B. Power supply: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz Inputs and outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz Communications: Amplitude: 1 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz Per EN 61000-4-4 , severity level 4: Power supply: Amplitude: 4 kV, Burst frequency: 2.5 kHz and 5 kHz Inputs and outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz Communications: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns Burst duration: 15 ms Burst period: 300 ms Source impedance: 50 W Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4 Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines. Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 s Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 s Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV Pulse frequency: > 5 / min Source impedance: 12 / 42 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields Per EN 61000-4-6 or IEC 61000-4-6, severity level 3 Test voltage: 10 V Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Per EN 61000-4-8 or IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4 Frequency: 50 Hz Test field strength: 30 A / m Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity Per IEC 255-11 12 % Insulation Voltage Test Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 255-5. 2 kV AC, 60 s. Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. Impulse Voltage Withstand Test Per IEC 255-5. Front time: 1.2 s Time to half-value: 50 s Peak value: 5 kV Source impedance: 500 W
2-3
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Mechanical robustness 1(**)
Vibration Test Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1 Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2, acceleration and pulse duration: Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test severity class 1 , 5 g for 11 ms, Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test severity class 1 , 15 g for 11 ms Seismic Test Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1 Frequency range: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
Mechanical robustness 2(**)
Vibration Test Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2 Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2, acceleration and pulse duration: Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test severity class 2, 10 g for 11 ms; Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test severity class 1, 15 g for 11 ms Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during transport), test severity class 1, 10 g for 16 ms Seismic Test Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2 Frequency range: 5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm / 3.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle. (**) Mechanical robustness 2: Valid for with delivery date as of May 2005, if one of the following case variants is used: Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) Surface-Mounted Case
2-4
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3.2
Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6 and DIN 57435 Part 303. Voltage Test Per IEC 255-5 2.2 kV AC, 1 s. Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. Additional Thermal Test 100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded. 2.4 Environment Environmental Conditions
Temperatures Recommended temperature range: -5C to +55C (23F to 131F) Storage and transit: -25 C to +70 C (-13 F to +158 F) Ambient Humidity Range 75 % relative humidity (annual mean), 56 days at 95 % relative humidity and 40 C (104F), condensation not permitted. Solar Radiation Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
P63X/EN M/Ca4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
2-5
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.5 Measuring inputs
Inputs and Outputs
Current Rated current: 1 or 5 A AC (settable). Nominal burden per phase: < 0.13 VA at Inom Load rating: continuous: 4 Inom for 10 s: 30 Inom for 1 s: 100 Inom Nominal surge current: 250 Inom Voltage Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable) Nominal burden per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC Load rating: continuous 150 V AC Frequency Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable) Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz All other protection functions: Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom Overfluxing protection: 0.5 to 1.5 fnom
Binary signal inputs
Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option 18 V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC): Switching threshold in the range 14 V to19 V Special variant with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal supply voltage (i.e. definitively ,low for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage, definitively ,high for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage) "Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC "Special variant 90 V": Nominal supply voltage 127 V DC "Special variant 146 V": Nominal supply voltage 220 V DC "Special variant 155 V": Nominal supply voltage 250 V DC Power consumption per input Standard variant: VA = 19 ... 110 V DC: 0.5 W 30 %, VA > 110 V DC: VA 5 mA 30 %. Special variant: Vin > Switching threshold: VA 5 mA 30 %. Notes The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required. The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC.
2-6
2 Technical Data
(continued)
IRIG-B interface
Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp. Input impedance: 33 k at 1 kHz. Electrical isolation: 2 kV Input current: 0 to 26 mA Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA) Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V Input resistance: 100 Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable) Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable)
Direct current input
Resistance thermometer inputs
Resistance thermometer: For analog module, PT 100 permitted only. Mapping curve as per IEC 751. Value range: -40.0 to +215.0C 3-wire configuration: max. 20 per conductor. Open and short-circuited input permitted Open-circuit monitoring: > +215 C and < -40 C Rated voltage: Continuous current: Short-duration current: Making capacity: Breaking capacity: 250 V DC, 250 V AC 5A 30 A for 0.5 s 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms 4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4
Output relays
BCD Measured Data Output
Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399 Value range: 0 to 20 mA Permissible load: 0 to 500 Maximum output voltage: 15 V
Direct Current Output
2-7
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6 Local control panel
Interfaces
Input or output: via seven keys and a 4 x 20 character-LCD display State and fault signals: 17 LED indicators (13 permanently assigned, 4 freely configurable)
PC interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
Communication interfaces 1 and 2
The communication module can be provided with up to two communication channels, depending on the module variant. Channel 1 is designed for twisted pair connection or fiber optic connection, whereas Channel 2 is intended for twisted pair connection only. For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS or DNP 3.0 (as of version P63x -602 Courier) can be set. Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on IEC 60870-5-103. For Wire Leads Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation Distance to be bridged Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m Multipoint connection: max. 100 m Transmission rate BA-no. -910 (one channel) BA-no. -921 (two channels) 300 to 19,200 baud (adjustable) 300 to 64,000 baud (adjustable for COMM1) 300 to 57,600 baud (adjustable for COMM2) Communication Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Can be set by user for one channel
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation. 2-8
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Plastic Fiber Connection Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm Optical input: max. -5 dBm Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m Transmission rate BA-no. -910 (one channel) BA-no. -922 (two channels) 300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable) 300 to 64,000 baud (adjustable for COMM1) 300 to 57,600 baud (adjustable for COMM2) Communication Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Can be set by user for one channel
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm Optical input: max. -10 dBm Distance to be bridged:1) max. 400 m Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125 Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm Optical output: min. -16 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm Optical input: max. -10 dBm Distance to be bridged:1) max. 1,400 m Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 or G 62.5/125 Transmission rate BA-no. -910 (one channel) BA-no. -924 (two channels) 300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable) 300 to 64,000 baud (adjustable for COMM1) 300 to 57,600 baud (adjustable for COMM2) Communication Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Can be set by user for one channel
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
1)
2-9
2 Technical Data
(continued)
IRIG-B interface
B122 format Amplitude modulated signal Carrier frequency: 1 kHz BCD-coded variation data (daily)
Data transmission using the IEC 61850 protocol
Order ext. No. -936: Interface to connect a 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber-SC and RJ45 wire or Order ext. No. -937: Interface to connect a 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber-SC and RJ45 wire For Wire Leads per RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation Distance to be bridged: Max. 100 m Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 Optical wavelength: typically 1300 nm Optical output: min. -23.5 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -31 dBm Optical input: max. -14 dBm Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125 Optical wavelength: typically 1300 nm Optical output: min. -20 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -31 dBm Optical input: max. -14 dBm The second communication interface (RS 485 connection, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol) is also available.
2-10
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7
Information Output
Counters, measured data, signals and LED indications: see Chapter 8. 2.8 Typical characteristic data Settings
Main function Minimum output pulse duration for a trip command:
0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Differential Protection Operate time at Id = 10 Idiff> with inrush restraint disabled, or at Id > Idiff>>>: at least 13 ms, typically 15 ms. Operate time at Id = 2.5 Idiff> with inrush restraint disabled: at least 19 ms, typically 21 ms. Operate time at Id = 2.5 Idiff> with inrush restraint enabled: at least 30 ms, typically 33 ms. Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection Operate time including output relay (measured value from 0 to 2-fold operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Reset time (measured value drops from 2-fold operate value to 0): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Starting resetting ratio: Approx. 0.95 Time-Voltage Protection Operate time including output relay (measured value from nominal value to 1.2-fold operate value or measured value from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Reset time (measured value from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured value from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value): 45 ms, approx. 30 ms Resetting ratio for V<>: 1 to 10 % (adjustable) Overfluxing protection Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95
2-11
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9 2.9.1 Definitions
Deviations Deviations of the Operate Values
Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom Deviation Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Differential Protection
Measuring system Deviation for Idiff : 0.2 Iref: 5 % Harmonic blocking: 10 % Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) Deviation: 10 %
Ground differential protection (Br: Restricted earth

fault protection)
Measuring system Deviation for Idiff : 0.2 Iref: 5 %
Definite-time and inversetime overcurrent protection Thermal Overload Protection
Deviation: 5 %
Deviation: 5 % Operate Values fnom = 50 Hz: Deviation: 30 mHz fnom = 60 Hz: Deviation: 40 mHz Operate Values fnom = 50 Hz: Deviation: 0.1 Hz/s fnom = 60 Hz: Deviation: 0.1 Hz/s Deviation: 3 % Deviation: : 3 % Deviation: 1 % Deviation: 2 or 1 %
Frequency protection
df/dt protection
Time-Voltage Protection
Overfluxing protection
Direct current input
Resistance thermometer
2-12
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Analog Measured Data Output
Deviation: 1 % Output residual ripple with max. load: 1 % 2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
Definitions
Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20 C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. Deviation Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Definite-time stages
Deviation: 1 % or + 20 ms to 40 ms Deviation when I 2 Iref: 5 % + 10 to 25 ms or for IEC 'Extremely Inverse', thermal overload and V/f characteristics: 7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms
Inverse-time stages
Limit Value Monitoring
Limit Value Monitoring is not designed to be a high-speed protection function; it is used for reporting purposes. This function is calculated approximately one time per second. Therefore, it is not accurate enough to provide meaningful data for the time deviation.
2-13
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.3 Definitions
Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20 C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. Deviation Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Measured Operating Data
Measuring Input Currents Deviation: 1 % Measuring Input Voltage Deviation: 0.5 % Internally formed restraining and differential currents Deviation: 2 % Frequency Deviation: 10 mHz Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output Deviation: 1 % Temperature Deviation: 2 C
Fault data
Phase and Star point currents Deviation: 3 % Restraining and Differential Currents Deviation: 5 %
Internal clock
With free running internal clock: Deviation: < 1 min/month With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval 1 min): Deviation: < 10 ms With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: 1 ms
2-14
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.10 Recording Functions Organization of the Recording Memories: Operating data memory Scope for signals: Depth: Monitoring signal memory Scope for signals: Depth: Overload memory All operation-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals The 100 most recent signals All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different logic state signals Up to 30 signals
Number: The 8 most recent overload events Scope for signals: Depth: All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024 different logic state signals 200 entries per overload event
Fault memory
Number: The 8 most recent fault events Scope for signals: Signals: All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals Depth for fault values: Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages Depth for signals Signals: 200 entries per fault event Depth for fault values: Max. number of periods per fault set by the user; 820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)
2-15
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Resolution of the Recorded Data Signals Time resolution: 1 ms Time resolution: 20 sampled values per period
Fault values
Phase and Star point currents
Dynamic range: Amplitude resolution
33 Inom at Inom = 1 A: 2 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 5 A: 10.1 mA r.m.s. 150 V AC 9.2 mVrms
Voltage
Dynamic range: Amplitude resolution: 2.11 Power Supply
Power supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom: 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC or 24 V DC (ordering option) Operating range for direct voltage: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration: For case: Relays de-energized, approx.: Relays energized approx.: 40TE 13 W 29 W 84TE 13 W 37 W
Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms Permitted supply interruption: 50 ms for interruption of VA 220 V DC
2-16
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for the offset maximum primary current:
' Vsat = (R nom + R i ) n Inom R op + R i k I1,max
with: Vsat: I'1,max: Inom: n: k: Rnom: Rop Ri
saturation voltage (IEC knee point) non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side rated secondary current rated overcurrent factor over-dimensioning factor rated burden actual connected operating burden internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
' Vsat R op + R i k I1,max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as follows:
n
(R nom + R i )
(R op + R i )
' I1,max
Inom
(Pnom + Pi )
(Pop + Pi )
' I1,max
Inom
With
2 Pnom = R nom Inom 2 Pop = R op Inom 2 Pi = R i Inom
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum value:
k max 1 + T1
with: : T1:
system angular frequency system time constant
2-17
2 Technical Data
(continued)
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the overdimensioning factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function is guaranteed under the given conditions. The transformer differential protection device is equipped with a saturation discriminator. This function will generate a stabilizing blocking signal if a differential current occurs as a consequence of transformer saturation with an external fault (in contrast to an internal fault). For the passing maximum fault current in the case of an external fault, overdimensioning is, therefore, obviated. For the maximum fault current with an internal fault, static saturation up to a maximum saturation factor fS of 4 is permissible. This corresponds to an overdimensioning factor k of 0.25. The implementation of these requirements is comparatively unproblematic as transformer differential protection would require overdimensioning in accordance with the total fault clearing time, which includes the total circuit-breaker open time for an external fault. Current transformers should observe the error limit values for class 5P.
2-18
3 Operation
3 3.1
Operation Modular Structure
The P63x, a numeric device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. The device types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules. Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P63x.
3-1
Basic hardware structure
3-1
3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities electrically isolated are converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X. Commands and signals internally generated by the device are connected to the external plant via contacts through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally. Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary signals, generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor module also handles overall device communication. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the processor module to provide serial communication with substation control systems. The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2
3 Operation
(continued)
3.2
Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user and the device: Integrated local control panel (LOC) PC interface Communication interface All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are: Parameters branch All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails. This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays. The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when required. Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance with the users choice. Chapters 7, 8 and 10 describe the settings, signals and measured values available with the P63x. The possible setting values can be found in the P63x's data model file associated with the PC operating program (MiCOM S1). The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of Measured Value 'Panels on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P63x provides the measured data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
Operation branch
Events branch
3-3
3 Operation
(continued)
3.3
Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)
The P63x offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured values relevant at a given time. During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel - provided that measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload event, the display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset. Operation Panel The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on the Operation Panel by means of an m out of n parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
3-2
Operation Panel
3-4
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared. The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
3-3
Fault panel
3-5
3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel. The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
3-4
Overload Panel
3-6
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4
Serial Interfaces
The P63x has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels, depending on the design version. Communication between the P63x and the control stations computer is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is possible through all the P63x's interfaces. If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section "Main Functions"). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for communication channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P63x if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead". It will only be enabled again after the PC interface Time-out has elapsed. If tests are run on the P63x, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see section "Main Functions"). 3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for data transfer between the P63x and the PC to function, several settings must be made in the P63x. There is a support software available as an accessory for P63x control (see Chapter 13).
3-7
3 Operation
(continued)
3-5
PC interface settings
3-8
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2
Communication Interface (Function Group COMM1)
Communication between the P63x and the control stations computer is done through the communication interface. Depending on the design version of communications module A (see "Technical Data") there are several interface protocols available. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is always supported. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P63x: IEC 60870-5-103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, "Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility level 2", February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks," first edition 1995-11 ILS-C, internal protocol of Schneider Electric MODBUS DNP 3.0 COURIER In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x. Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
P63X/EN M/Ba4-S // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
3-9
3 Operation
(continued)
3-6
Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol

3-10
3 Operation
(continued)
3-7
Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
3-11
3 Operation
(continued)
3-8
Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol

3-12
3 Operation
(continued)
3-9
Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
3-13
3 Operation
(continued)
3-10
Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
3-14
3 Operation
(continued)
3-11
Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol
3-15
3 Operation
(continued)
3-12
Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
3-16
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via setting parameters.
3-13
3-17
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.3
Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)
Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol. In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x.
3-18
3 Operation
(continued)
3-14
Settings for communication interface 2
3-19
3 Operation
(continued)
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via setting parameters.
Spontan. signal start
Spontan. signal end
3-15
3-20
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.4
UCA2 Communication Interface (Function Group UCA2)
This function group is available only with the P63x -604/-605/-606 device. (As of device version P63x 610, the IEC 61850 communication interface is available: it uses function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE. A description is provided in the following section). The communication protocol Utility Communication Architecture 2.0 is implemented with the UCA2 function group and the Ethernet module (in the 10 MHz and 100 MHz variants). Function group UCA2 is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1 (hardware ordering option!). Pending the implementation of the IEC 61850 protocol, the use of UCA2 is reserved for specific projects. The UCA2 addresses for setting, information and control functions are described in chapters 7 and 8. (See also the detailed description of the UCA2 protocol implementation: P54x_EN_UC_B42.pdf).
3-21
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5
IEC 61850 Communication Interface (Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)
These function groups are available only with the P63x -610 device. The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and the Ethernet module. Note: Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1 (hardware ordering option!). 3.4.5.1 IEC 61850 Communication Interface (Function Group IEC) IEC 61850 IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation. Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands. For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal images. The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used with the P63x, is available: IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are to be imported into the system configurator. PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents: PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available services. MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available object types. ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3-22
3 Operation
(continued)
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter I E C : E t h e r n e t m e d i a . The optical interface of the Ethernet module is currently available with an SC connector (100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm). A variant with an ST connector is being developed. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote access with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2). Notes: The P63x may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as an alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1. The Ethernet module can only be applied in conjunction with the processor module P (included in current hardware version) with the item number 9650 135 or other processor modules available in the near future. When upgrading older P63x hardware versions with an Ethernet module, which is technically possible, it must be kept in mind that such units are usually equipped with the processor module P, item number 0337 875. But this processor module P does not support the Ethernet module and therefore the communications protocol per IEC 61850 is also not supported. If such an upgrade is carried out the processor module P must be exchanged. The processor module item number can be checked by reading the device identification setting at DVICE: Module var. slot 1.
Activating and Enabling
The IEC function group can be activated by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting IEC: General enable USER. The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online at MAIN: Device on-line.
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the 'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices. A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic information. In its function as server the P63x can supply up to 16 clients with information.
3-23
3 Operation
(continued)
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard for Ethernet. Here the P63x functions as a SNTP client. For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P63x requests the device specific time signal during a settable cycle.
Fault Transmission Transmission of "Goose Messages"
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".
The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority. Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850 "Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, a reverse interlocking, a transfer trip or a decentralized substation interlock. In future the "Goose Message" will therefore replace a wired or serial protective interface. According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", GSSE and IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However IEC-GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more extensive configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the opposite side. With IEC-GOOSE the P63x at this time supports sending and receiving of binary information.
Communication with the Operating Program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet Interface
Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating program MiCOM S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication and "Goose Messages". Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM S1 such as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data. The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-24
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE) For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network, the P63x provides function group GOOSE (IEC-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission for trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals. "Goose Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "Goose Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on. Activating and Enabling Function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GOOSE: General enable USER. The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition function group IEC must be configured and enabled. Sending GOOSE With GOOSE the P63x can transmit up to 32 logic binary state signals. Selection of binary state signals is made by setting G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The assignment of data object indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1 to 32 according to the assignment to GOOSE outputs. GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after 2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at 2-second intervals.
3-25
3 Operation
(continued)
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered through parameter settings. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string "System/LLNO$GooseST".
GOOSE-DataSet: LLN0$GooseST
Identification: Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00 VLAN Identifier: 0 VLAN Priority: 4 Application ID: 12288 Goose ID: "Local IED" DataSet Ref. : "Local IEDSystem/LLNO$GooseST" DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100
Data range:
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out2/stVal Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out32/stVal
GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
64Z6090A_EN
3-16
Basic structure of sent GOOSE
3-26
3 Operation
(continued)
With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic state signals received (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 16) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). For each state signal to be received from an external device the "Goose Message" must be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the Goose ID, the Application ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the data object index and the data attribute index through parameters, the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The device will not evaluate the identification features VLAN identifier and Dataset Configuration Revision that are also included in the GOOSE received. Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a communications fault), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective default values G O O S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t o r G O O S E : E x t . D e v . n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 16). The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are described in chapters 7 and 8. 3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE) For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network, the P63x provides, as an additional functionality, the function group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals. Activating and Enabling Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter G S S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G S S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GSSE: General enable USER. The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and enabled.
3-27
3 Operation
(continued)
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state signals is made by setting G S S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). Each state signal selected is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (G S S E : O u t p u t n b i t p a i r (n = 1 to 32)), which will transmit this state signal. GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter G S S E : M i n . c y c l e . The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter G S S E : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . c y c l e ) , then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time. In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which was set in function group IEC.
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic binary state signals received (G S S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 32) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the required information, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I E D n a m e ) . Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair (G S S E : b i t p a i r ) . Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a communications fault), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default value ( G S S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 32)). The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GSSE are described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-28
3 Operation
(continued)
3.5
IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of the P63x can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at the P63x, the P63x calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY). Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter. If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P63x checks the received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P63x. If the P63x does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.
Synchronization readiness
3-17
IRIG-B interface
3-29
3 Operation
(continued)
3.6
Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P63x has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation. The functions that will be activated in the P63x by triggering these binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. The typical response time is < 10 ms, although for reliability it is recommended that the initiating signal is maintained for at least 30 ms. Configuring the binary inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several control points having different signal voltages. In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration. It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O module as these have an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
Operating mode of the binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify whether the presence (active 'high' mode) or the absence (active 'low' mode) of a voltage should be interpreted as the logic '1' signal. The display of the state of a binary signal input 'low' or 'high' is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal input.
3-18
Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
3-30
P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-6
3 Operation
(continued)
3.7
Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
The P63x has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed to the P63x through one of the inputs. The other input is designed to connect a resistance thermometer. The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring"). The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and monitored by the limit value monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring"). Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
The measured data input can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
3-19
Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
3-31
3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.1
Direct Current Input
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured the temperature, for example. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for certain applications it may be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range with a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair M EASI: ID C x and M EASI: ID C ,l i n x, the user specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting points, called "interpolation points", are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (see figure 3-20). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to implement a complex characteristic. When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a monotonically increasing curve is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If an invalid setting is entered, the S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g I D C signal will be generated.
IDClin / IDC,nom
1.2 1.1
IDClin20
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1
IDClin1
0 0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6
IDC/ IDC,nom
IDC1
IDC20
19Z5266A_EN
D5Z52KDA
3-20
Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin
3-32
3 Operation
(continued)
IDClin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points IDC,lin20

0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4
0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3
0.3
IDC,lin2
0.2
IDC,lin1
0.1
0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
IDC1 Enable IDC p.u.
IDC2
IDC3
IDC4
IDC20
IDC / IDC,nom
D5Z52KEB _EN D5Z52KEB
3-21
Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line)
Zero suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of 0 .
Open-circuit and overload monitoring
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below the set threshold, M E A S I : I D C < o p e n c i r c u i t , the M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p . signal is issued. The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA input against overloading. If it exceeds the fixed threshold of 24.8 mA, the M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t signal is issued.
3-33
3 Operation
(continued)
3-22
Analog direct current input

3-34
3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-23
Scaling of the linearized measured value
3-35
3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.2
Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer
This input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping curve, R = f(T), of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in the IEC 751 standard. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is required. Open-circuit monitoring If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . P T 1 0 0 is issued.
3-24
Temperature measurement using a resistance thermometer
3-36
3 Operation
(continued)
3.8
Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group OUTP)
The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal assignment is freely-configured by the user. Configuration of the output relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be assigned to several output relays by configuration.
Operating mode of the output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled either manually via a setting parameter, or by an appropriately configured binary signal input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the selected operating mode. The P63x offers the option of blocking all output relays via a setting parameter or by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs. In these cases the relays are treated according to their set operating mode, i.e. relays in a normally open arrangement (NO) are not triggered, whereas relays in a normally closed arrangement (NC) are triggered. This does not apply to the relays associated with the signals SF M O N : W a r n i n g ( r e l a y) or M AIN : Bl o c k e d /fa u l ty. Self-monitoring alarms are thus correctly indicated. If the self-monitoring detects a serious hardware fault (see error messages in chapter 10, which will lead to a blocking of the protection), all output relays are reset regardless of the set operating mode or signal configuration.
Blocking the output relays
3-37
3 Operation
(continued)
3-25
Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
3-38
3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays
For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via a setting parameter. Therefore the device must be switched to 'off-line'. Triggering persists for the duration of the set hold time.
MAIN: Protection enabled No (off)
47Z1050A_EN
3-26
Testing the output relays
3-39
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9
Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)
Measured values made available by the P63x can be provided in BCD (binary coded decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. Output as direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD output is always possible, whether the device is equipped with analog module Y or not. Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
The measured data output can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
3-27
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
3-40
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling measured data output
The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input, then the measured data output is always enabled.
3-28
Enabling measured data output
3-41
3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured data output function
BCD or analog output of measured values is terminated for the duration of the hold time if one of the following conditions is met: The measured data output is reset either via a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. There is a general reset. LED indicators reset
3-29
Resetting the measured data output function
Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device's inherent setting range.
3-42
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.1
The user can select a measured value for output in BCD form by assigning output relays. The selected measured value is available in BCD form for the duration of the set hold time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no output of a measured value. Output of measured event values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is restarted. If the hold time has been set to 'blocked', the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset. The resolution for measured data output is defined by setting the scaling factor. The scaling factor should be selected so that the value 399 is not exceeded by the maximum measured value to be output. If this should occur or if the measured value is outside the acceptable measuring range, then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Mx,scal = Mx,max scaling factor
Scaling of BCD output
where: Mx,scal : scaled measured value

Mx,max : maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
3-43
3 Operation
(continued)
3-30
3-44
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.2
Analogue output of measured data is two-channel. The user can select two of the measured values available in the P63x for output in the form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value. The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time M E A S O : H o l d t i m e o u t p u t A - x . If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no output of a measured value. Output of measured event values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Configuration of output relays assigned to the output channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x o u t p u t , since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal connection diagrams).
3-45
3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling the analog display
In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measured value range in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value for the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure 3-31.
Measured value range to be output
The measured value range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max), with: Mx,min: minimum value to be output Mx,knee: Knee point value for the measured value range to be output Mx,max: maximum value to be output This measured value range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters: MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-x MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected measured value (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the S&R-103 - PC MiCOM S1
Support Software - under "minimum" and "maximum".) Measured values Measured values of the variable Mx Associated scaled measured values Measured value to be output Measured values with kneepoint to be output Scaled measured values with a scaled knee-point to be output Range Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2 0 ... 1
Range Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max with: Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1 Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1) Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model
"Scal. min. value Ax" ... ... "Scal. knee-point Ax" ... ... "Scal. max. value Ax"
3-46
3 Operation
(continued)
Associated display range
The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters: MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x MEASO: AnOut knee point A-x MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x
Measured values Measured values in the range "Measured values to be output" Analog display values "AnOut min. val. A-x" ... ... "AnOut knee point A-x" ... ... ... "AnOut max. val. A-x" (Value A-x valid) "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid) "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid) "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
Measured values: Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min Measured values Mx: Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2 Measured values Mx: Mx < Mx,RL1 or Mx > Mx,RL2
3-47
3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of analog display ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measured value to be transmitted by channel A-1. The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V. The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA. The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA.
Measured values Measured values of the variable Mx Associated scaled measured values Measured values to be output Measured values with kneepoint to be output Associated scaled measured values Range 0 V ... 150 V 0 ... 1
Range 2 V ...10 V... 100 V 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67 with: Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013 Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067 Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67
Measured values
Analog display values 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
Measured values in the range "Measured values to be output" 0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
In this example the following device settings are selected: /Parameter/Config. parameters/ Address 056 020 031 074 053 000 010 114 037 104 037 105 037 106 037 107 037 108 037 109 Description MEASO: Function group MEASO MEASO: General enable USER MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MEASO: Hold time output A-1 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 Current value With Yes MAIN: Voltage A-B PU 1.00 s 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom) 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10 Vnom) 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00 Vnom) 4 mA 16 mA 18 mA
3-48
3 Operation
(continued)
By setting M E A S O : A n O u t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O : A n O u t m a x . v a l . A - x defines the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a monotonically increasing or decreasing curve is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not properly entered, the signal SF M O N : In va l i d s c a l i n g A- x will be issued. Note: A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was properly entered, will only occur after the device, with the setting M AIN : D e vi c e o n - l i n e is again switched on-line.
Ia / mA
Max. output value18 Knee point 16 output value

14 12 10 8
20
Min. output value 4

2 0 0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0,013
0,067
0,667
1,0Mx,scal
D5Z52KFA 19Z5265A_EN
3-31
Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).
3-49
3 Operation
(continued)
3-32

3-50
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.3
Output of External Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be written to the following parameters of the P63x via the communications interface. MEASO: Output Value 1 MEASO: Output Value 2 MEASO: Output Value 3 These "external" measured values are output by the P63x either in BCD data form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output function or the channels of the analogue measured data output function are configured accordingly.
3-51
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) LED indicators The P63x has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Four of the LED indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED indicators are freely configurable.
Configuring the LED indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the freely configurable LED indicators (example for H 5 : L ED : F c t. a s s i g n m . H 5 ). The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators, if required.
LED indicator H1 H 17
Label 'HEALTHY' 'EDIT MODE'
Configuration Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device (supply voltage is present). Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only when the device is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by pressing the and keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and Keypad') Permanently configured with function M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y . Permanently configured with function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) . As a standard LED indicator H 4 is configured at M A I N : G e n . t r i p s i g n a l . The factory setting for this LED indicator is shown in the terminal connection drawings included in the documentation or the appendix. These 12 LED indicators are freely configurable.
H2 H3 H4
'OUT OF SERVICE' 'ALARM' 'TRIP'
H 5 to H 16
----
The drawing below shows the layout of the LED indicators situated on the local control panel.
3-52
3 Operation
(continued)
H4 H3 H2 H1 H17
TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY EDIT MODE
H5 H6 H7 H8
= CLEAR = READ = ENTER
C
G
H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16

64Z6000A_EN
3-33
Layout of the LED indicators
3-53
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode of the LED indicators
The mode determines whether a logic "1" will light the LED, defined as a follower mode, or whether the binary signal is inverted such that a logic zero will light the LED. Latching is disabled either manually via a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see "Main Functions of the P63x"), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the selected operating mode.
3-54
3 Operation
(continued)
3-34
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
3-55
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN) 3.11.1 Conditioning of the Measured values The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P63x. Furthermore, there is the option of connecting a measuring voltage. The measured values are electrically isolated converted to normalized electronics levels. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further processing. Depending on the design version, the P63x has the following measuring inputs: P631: Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured values for two winding ends of the transformer P632: Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured values for two winding ends of the transformer Two current inputs for the measurement of the residual currents (see Figure 3-36) One voltage input P633 and P634: Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured values for three (P633) or four (P634) winding ends of the transformer. Current inputs for up to three neutral-point-to-ground connections (see Figure 3-35) or, alternatively, for looping into ground connections of the phase current transformers or for connection to a Holmgreen group. One voltage input.
3-56
3 Operation
(continued)
3-35
Connection of the measured values to the P63x, connection of the fourth current transformer set to the transformers of the neutral-point-to-ground connections
3-57
3 Operation
(continued)
3-36a
Connection of the measured values to the P63x, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the ground connections of the phase current transformers, Part 1 of 2
3-58
3 Operation
(continued)
3-36b
Connection of the measured values to the P63x, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the ground connections of the phase current transformers, Part 2 of 2
3-59
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.2 Phase Reversal Function The phase reversal function is available as of version P63x -610. It is intended to protect machines in pumped storage power stations that are operated either as motors or as generators, depending on the demand. In such applications it is common practice to swap two phases in order to facilitate the pumping operation. Because of this, the P63x phase reversal function can maintain correct operation of all protection functions even when the phase reversal switch is inside the protected zone. The processing is done right after A/D conversion, such that the link between physical transformer input and internal numerical signal will be swapped, depending on the setting. (The measured values stored in the respective measured value memories are swapped.) Thus all further processing of measured values and protection functions remains unchanged. Phase reversal can be set independently for each transformer end and in each parameter subset. The parameters are included in function group 'MAIN' because phase reversal affects not only the differential protection function (DIFF), but also the negative sequence elements of Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent protection functions (IDMTx, DTOCx) as well as Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) and MeasuringCircuit Monitoring (MCM_x) functions. PS1 010 200 010 204 010 208 010 212 PS2 010 201 010 205 010 209 010 213 PS3 010 202 010 206 010 210 010 214 PS4 010 203 010 207 010 211 010 215 Description MAIN: Phase reversal a PSx MAIN: Phase reversal b PSx MAIN: Phase reversal c PSx MAIN: Phase reversal d PSx Range of Values No swap A-B swapped B-C swapped C-A swapped
Using parameter subsets readily allows phase reversal to be activated via any control interface (LOC, PC, COMMx) or via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Since the currently active parameter subset is shown on the LC-display and may be recalled from the recordings, phase reversal information is accessible. There are however applications where an additional display of a phase reversal may be useful. Such would be the case when recordings by a P63x are to be compared with those by other devices not featuring phase reversal (e.g. Backup overcurrent-time protection device) and without knowledge of the P63x setting file. For this the following display is used: Description 036 220 MAIN: Phase reversal active Range of Values No Yes
Phase reversal is active (Yes) when at least one of the setting parameters in the active parameter subset has a value other than No swap. The setting file must be viewed to determine which phases are swapped.
3-60
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase reversal a PSx [ *1 ] 0 1 2 3 0: without 1: a-b 2: b-c 3: c-a
MAIN: Phase reversal b PSx [ *2 ] 0 1 2 3 0: without 1: a-b 2: b-c 3: c-a
MAIN: Phase reversal activ [ 036 220 ]
MAIN: Phase reversal c PSx [ *3 ] 0 1 2 3 0: without 1: a-b 2: b-c 3: c-a *2 Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 MAIN: Phase reversal b PSx 010 204 010 205 010 206 010 207 MAIN: Phase reversal c PSx 010 208 010 209 010 210 010 211 MAIN: Phase reversal d PSx 010 212 010 213 010 214 010 215 *1 Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 MAIN: Phase reversal a PSx 010 200 010 201 010 202 010 203
MAIN: Phase reversal d PSx [ *4 ] 0 1 2 3 0: without 1: a-b 2: b-c 3: c-a *4 *3
Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4
64Z6001 A_EN
3-37
Phase reversal function of the P63x
3-61
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.3 Selection of the Residual Current to be Monitored For protection functions of the P632, P633 and P634 monitoring the residual current, the user can select whether the device is to use the current derived from the three phase currents or the current measured at the fourth current transformer.
3-62
3 Operation
(continued)
3-38
Evaluation of residual current
3-63
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.4 Forming a Virtual Transformer End The P633 and P634 offer the option of forming a new variable by combining the phase currents or the residual currents from two or three ends of the transformer. The following options are possible: Forming the sum of the phase currents or of the residual currents from two ends of the transformer (options 1 to 6). Options 1 to 6 are shown in Figure 3-39. Forming the sum of the phase currents or of the residual currents from three ends of the transformer (options 7 to 10). Subtracting the phase currents or the residual currents from two ends of the transformer (options 11 to 16). By subtraction (unstable) transverse differential protection including time-overcurrent protection may be obtained.
3-64
3 Operation
(continued)
3-39
Forming the sum of the phase currents or of the residual currents, options 1 to 6
3-65
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.5 Operating Data Measurement The P63x has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and voltages measured by the P63x during normal power system operation; quantities derived from these measured values are also displayed. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded, the value 'not measured' is displayed. The following measured values are displayed: Phase currents of all three phases of all four ends of the transformer Maximum phase current of each end of the transformer Minimum phase current of each end of the transformer Delayed and stored maximum phase current of each end of the transformer Positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of all ends Current IN derived by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents for each end of the transformer Current IY measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) Phase currents of all three phases of the virtual end of the transformer. The virtual end is formed by adding the corresponding currents of two transformer ends selected by the user at M AIN : C u r r e n t s u m m a ti o n . (See description in previous section.) Positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of the virtual end Maximum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer Minimum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer Current IN of the virtual end of the transformer Voltage Frequency Angle between the phase currents for a given end of the transformer Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer Angle between derived IN and the current measured at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if a general starting state occurs or if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
3-66
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values
The measured values for the current are displayed both as per unit quantities referred to the nominal current of the P63x and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary values, the primary nominal current of the transformers connected to the P63x needs to be set.
3-67
3 Operation
(continued)
Delayed maximum phase current display
The P63x offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase current display is an exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max (see upper curve in Figure 3-40). The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase current IP,max is set at M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l .
Stored maximum phase current display
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase current (see middle curve in Figure 3-40). The stored maximum phase current is set to the actual value of the delayed maximum phase current at M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d (see lower curve in Figure 3-40).
3-68
3 Operation
(continued)
3-40
Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display, end d (P634 only)
3-69
3 Operation
(continued)
3-41
Measured operating data for the phase currents, ends a to d
3-70
3 Operation
(continued)
3-42
Measured operating data for the residual currents, ends a to c
3-71
3 Operation
(continued)
3-43
Measured operating data for the residual current, end d (P634 only)
3-72
3 Operation
(continued)
3-44
Measured operating data for the phase currents and the residual current for the virtual end (formed by current summation, P633 and P634 only, see Figure 3-39)
3-73
3 Operation
(continued)
Positive- and negativesequence currents
As of version P63x -606 the positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of all ends (primary and per unit values) are determined continuously and displayed as measured operating data: z: End a MAIN: Current Ineg z prim. M AIN : C u r r e n t Ip o s z p r i m . MAIN: Current Ineg z p.u. M AIN : C u r r e n t Ip o s z p .u . 005 125 005 127 005 126 005 128 z: End b 005 129 005 134 005 130 005 135 z: End c 005 136 005 138 005 137 005 139 z: End d 005 140 005 146 005 145 005 147
As of version P63x -606 the positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of the virtual end, formed by summation or subtraction of current values (primary and per unit values), are also continuously determined and displayed as measured operating data: MAIN: Curr. Ineg,add p.u. MAIN: Curr. Ipos,add p.u. 005 149 005 150
When the CB's contacts are open, it is also possible to force to zero the setting of small positive- and negative-sequence current measured values if such measured values are below additionally created settable thresholds. MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ineg M AIN : M e a s .va l u e r e l . Ip o s 011 048 011 049
3-74
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured voltage value
The measured voltage value is displayed both as a per unit quantity referred to the nominal voltage of the P63x and as a primary quantity. To allow a display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer connected to the P63x must be set.
3-45
Measured voltage value
Frequency
The P63x determines the frequency from the voltage. This voltage needs to exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be determined.
3-46
Frequency measurement
3-75
3 Operation
(continued)
Angle determination
The P63x determines the angle between the following currents if the associated currents exceed the minimum threshold of 0.033 Inom: Angle between the phase currents for each end of the transformer Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer Angle between the derived residual current and the current measured at the transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) for each end of the transformer
3-47
Determination of the angle between the phase currents
3-76
3 Operation
(continued)
3-48
Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends
3-77
3 Operation
(continued)
3-49
Determination of the angle between the derived residual current and the current measured at transformer -Tx4
3-78
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.6 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by configuring the available function range. By including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and cancelling all other protection functions, the user creates an individual device appropriate to the application. Parameters, signals, and measured values of canceled protection functions are not displayed on the local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled. Cancelling a protection function
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be cancelled: The protection function in question must be disabled. None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled may be assigned to a binary input. None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or an LED indicator. No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list setting. If the above conditions are met, proceed through the 'Configuration' branch of the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the device function to be cancelled. If, for example, the "LIMIT" function group is to be cancelled, the setting L IM IT : F u n c ti o n g r o u p L I M I T is accessed and its value is set to 'Without'. To re-include the "LIMIT" function in the device configuration, the same setting is accessed and its value is changed to 'With'. The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: In the following description of the protection functions, it is presumed that this protection function is included in the configuration.
3-79
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the protection function
Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled via a function setting or via binary signal inputs. Protection can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T and M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the condition is interpreted as "Protection externally enabled". If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible i.e. both are at logic level = "1" then the last plausible state remains stored in memory. Note: If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T , the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y is not issued.
3-50
Enabling or disabling protection
3-80
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.7 Activation of Dynamic Parameters For several of the protection functions, it is possible to switch the duration of the set hold time to other settings - the "dynamic parameters" through an appropriately configured binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s, switching is effective while the binary signal input is being triggered.
3-51
Activation of dynamic parameters
3-81
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.8 Multiple Blocking Four multiple blockings may be defined via 'm out of n' parameters. Thereby the functions defined by the selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-82
3 Operation
(continued)
3-52
Multiple Blocking
3-83
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.9 Multiple Signaling of the Measuring Circuit Monitoring Function Signals issued by the measuring circuit monitoring (MCMON) function are combined to one signal in function group M AIN .
3-53
Signals issued by measuring circuit monitoring
3-84
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.10 Blocked / Faulty If the protective functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by continuous illumination of the amber (yellow) LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay configured at M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y . In addition, the user can select the functions that will issue the M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y signal by setting an m out of n parameter.
3-54
"Blocked/Faulty" signal
3-85
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.11 Tripping signals for autotransformers
Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
As of version P63x -603 the following new tripping signals are available for applications with autotransformers: MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF2 MAIN: Trip sig.REF2 & REF3 MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF3 036 174 036 175 036 176
Starting signals
The trip signals of differential protection and ground differential protection plus the general starting signals of the definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection functions are combined into one common general starting signal.
DTOC1: General starting [ 035 128 ] DTOC2: General starting [ 035 234 ] DTOC3: General starting [ 035 244 ] IDMT1: General starting [ 038 115 ] IDMT2: General starting [ 038 135 ] IDMT3: General starting [ 038 155 ] DIFF: Starting [ 041 106 ] REF_1: Trip signal [ 041 005 ] REF_2: Trip signal [ 041 016 ] REF_3: Trip signal [ 041 067 ]
MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ]
64Z6002 A_EN
3-55
General starting of the P63x
3-86
3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of starting signals
The general starting signals are counted. The counter can be reset individually.
3-56
Counter for general starting signals.
Trip command
The P63x has four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip can be selected by setting a m out of n parameter independently for each of the four trip commands. The minimum trip command time may be set. The trip signals are present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met. A manual trip command may be issued via a parameter or a binary signal input configured accordingly, but it is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
Manual trip command
Latching of the trip commands
For each of the four trip commands, the user can specify by way of the appropriate setting whether it will operate in latching mode. The trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by parameters or reset through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Blocking of the trip commands
The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for all four trip commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands are both blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay configured to "Blocked/Faulty". (To identify H2, see the dimensional drawings in the Chapter entitled Design.)
3-87
3 Operation
(continued)
3-57
Forming the trip commands
3-88
3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of trip commands
The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
3-58
Counter of trip commands
3-89
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.12
Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date and time need to be set in the P63x. The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately configured binary signal input. The P63x evaluates the rising edge. This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
3-59
Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input
3-90
3 Operation
(continued)
Priority control of time synchronization
The protection device provides several ways of synchronizing the internal clock: o o o o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full time) Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time) IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only) Impulse every minute via a binary signal input (MAIN), see Figure 3-59 and previous section.
Up to device version P63x -605 these interfaces were of equal priority, i.e. clock synchronization was carried out irrespective of the source. No conflicts have to be taken into account as long as synchronization sources (communication master, IRIG-B and minute impulse source) operate at the same time of day. Should the synchronization sources operate with a different time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface even if and while the SCADA communication is out of service. As of device version P63x -606 a primary and a backup source for time of day synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in the above. MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set at M A I N : T i m e s yn c . t i m e - o u t . When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source. Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is blocked.
3-91
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.13
Resetting Mechanisms
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways. The following mechanisms are available: Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local control panel LCD by pressing the "Clear" key C located on the local control panel. Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs General reset In the first two cases listed above only the displays on the local control panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory. In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
3-60
General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
3-92
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.14
Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels
There are two communication channels available. These physical communications channels may be assigned to communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2. If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2, then the settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to communications channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P63x if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
3-61
Assigning communications interfaces to physical communications channels
3-93
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.15
Test mode
If tests are run on the P63x, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be marked accordingly.
3-62
Setting the test mode
3-94
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) With the P63x, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection function. Selecting the parameter subset
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or binary signal input) may be selected via the function setting P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R or via the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l v i a u s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals. The parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e .
Selecting the parameter subset via binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P63x first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the function setting will be active. The P63x also checks whether the signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset selection. This is only true when only one binary signal input is set to a logic level of "1". If more than one signal input is set to a logic level of "1", then the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic level of "0"), then the stored hold time is started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of "1", the associated parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic level of "1", the parameter subset selected via the function parameter becomes active. If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of "1" is present at any of the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter subset selected via the function parameter will become active once the stored time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored hold timer stage is running. Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately 100 ms must be taken into account. Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-95
3 Operation
(continued)
3-63
Activating the parameter subsets

3-96
3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P63x ensure that internal faults are detected and do not lead to malfunctions. Tests during start-up After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full operability of the P63x. If the P63x detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P63x can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again. After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory the monitoring signal memory along with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording). The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery replacement. Signals The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured to S F M O N : W a r n i n g . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
Cyclic tests
3-64
Monitoring signals
3-97
3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
The response of the P63x depends on the type of monitoring signal. The following responses are possible: Signaling Only If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow. Selective Blocking If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface. Warm Restart If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system restart such as a fault in the hardware , then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again. Cold Restart If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal memory.
3-98
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring signal memory (as of version P63x -605)
Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 ,Troubleshooting.) Whether or not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the device will be blocked after the second warm restart. Previously this occurred independently of the time duration that had passed since the first monitoring signal was issued. The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. A "memory retention time" timer stage has been introduced to defuse this problem. SFMON: Mon.sig. retention Now device blocking only occurs, when the same internal device fault is detected twice during this time duration. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a warm restart. In the default setting this timer stage is blocked so that, when an internal fault is detected, the device will operate in the same way as the previous versions.
Monitoring signal memory time tag (as of version P63x -605)
Because of these changes the significance of the time tag for entries to the monitoring signal memory has been re-defined. The time when the device fault occurred first was previously recorded. As of version P63x 605 the time when the device fault occurred last is now recorded.
3-99
3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The "operationally relevant" signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared/reset. Counter for signals relevant to system operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
3-65
Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
3-100
3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of 30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the SFMON: O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an 'm out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring'). If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....). The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local control panel. Monitoring signal counter The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the monitoring signal counter (MT_RC: N o . m o n i t . s i g n a l s ).
3-66
Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
3-101
3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) In the event of an overload, the P63x determines the following measured overload data. Overload duration Measured overload data derived from the measured operating data of the thermal overload protection functions THRM1 and THRM2. The following values are determined for each of the two functions: Status of the thermal replica Load current Object temperature Coolant temperature Time remaining before tripping Offset of the thermal replica
3-102
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the overload duration
The overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
3-67
Overload duration
3-103
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the measured overload data from the thermal overload protection
Measured overload values are derived from the measured operating data of the thermal overload protection function. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
3-68
Measured overload data from thermal overload protection (THRM1 shown)
3-104
3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) Start of overload recording The following description refers to the thermal overload protection 1 (THRM1) function and can be applied similarly to THRM2. An overload exists and consequently overload recording begins if at least the T H R M 1 : Sta r ti n g k * Ir e f> signal is issued. Counting overload events Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
3-69
Counting overload events
3-105
3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or communication interfaces. Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then O L _ R C : O v e r l . m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the overload memory. The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Overload logging
3-106
3 Operation
(continued)
3-70
Overload memory
3-107
3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) When there is a fault in the power system, the P63x collects the following measured fault data: Running time Fault duration Fault currents Differential current of all three measuring systems Second and fifth harmonic of the differential current Restraining current of all three measuring systems Differential currents of ground differential protection Restraining currents of ground differential protection Running time and fault duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting signal that is generated within the P63x, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the F T _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
3-71
Running time and fault duration
3-108
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time
The P63x determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time during a fault. Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the criterion for the determination of the recording start time is selected by the P63x. If, for example, the differential protection function detects a fault then the P63x determines the measured fault data at the time during the fault when the maximum differential current was measured. The measured fault data are displayed at the end of the fault. If several protection functions detect a fault then the criterion is selected on the basis of the priorities given in the table below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P63x. Priority 1 2 3 4 5 Function Recognizing the Fault Differential protection function Ground differential protection, end a
(Br: Restricted earth fault protection, end a) (Br: Restricted earth fault protection, end b) (Br: Restricted earth fault protection, end c)
Acquisition Time Criterion Maximum differential current Maximum differential current (REF_1) Maximum differential current (REF_2) Maximum differential current (REF_3) Maximum restraining current
Ground differential protection, end b Ground differential protection, end c Definite-time overcurrent protection or inverse-time overcurrent protection Functions according to the selection through m out of n parameters
End of fault
The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time is determined by the P63x and displayed.
3-109
3 Operation
(continued)
3-72
Determination of the fault data acquisition time
3-110
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the fault currents
The P63x stores the fault currents data determined at the acquisition time. The following fault currents are stored: The maximum phase currents for each end of the transformer The residual current calculated from the phase currents The current measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) The fault currents are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom.
3-111
3 Operation
(continued)
3-73
Acquisition of the fault currents
3-112
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents
The P63x stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the acquisition time by the differential protection and ground differential protection functions. Moreover, the values for the second and fifth harmonics of the differential current are stored. Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to Iref.
3-113
3 Operation
(continued)
3-74
Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection
3-114
3 Operation
(continued)
3-75
Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of ground differential protection
Fault data reset
After pressing the reset key C on the local control panel, the fault data value is displayed as 'Not measured'. However, the values are not erased and can continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
3-115
3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) Start of fault recording A fault exists and therefore fault recording begins if at least one of the signals selected through an m out of n parameter is present. Moreover, fault recording is started if the Id> and IR> triggers operate. In addition fault recording may also be started manually using setting parameters or externally through an appropriately configured binary signal input. Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
Fault counting
3-116
3 Operation
(continued)
3-76
Start of fault recording and fault counter
3-117
3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A faults individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces. Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the nonvolatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then F T _ R C : F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal F T _ R C : F a u l t y t i m e t a g is generated. In addition to the fault signals, the measured RMS fault data will also be entered in the fault memory. The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Fault recordings
3-118
3 Operation
(continued)
3-77
Fault memory
3-119
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data recording
The following analog signals are recorded: The phase currents of all four ends of the transformer The residual current measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) Voltage The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of 16.4 s (for 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for 60 Hz) is available for recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached. The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero. If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten. The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or communication interfaces. When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults remain stored.
3-120
3 Operation
(continued)
3-78 Fault value recording
3-121
3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) The P63x is designed for the protection of transformers as well as for the protection of motors and generators and of other two-winding end (P631, P632, P633, P634), threewinding (P633, P634) or four-winding end (P634) arrangements. For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude matching is required. This is achieved simply by setting the reference power - generally the nominal power of the transformer - and of the primary nominal voltages for all winding ends of the transformer. Vector group matching is achieved by the straightforward input of the relevant vector group identification number. For special applications, zero-sequence current filtering may be disabled. For conditions where it is possible to load the transformer with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, the overfluxing restraint prevents unwanted tripping. For application as differential protection device for motors or generators, harmonic restraint (inrush compensation) can be disabled. The start-up of directly switched asynchronous motors represents a problem in differential protection due to transient transformer saturation caused by a displacement of the start-up current for relatively high primary time constants. Even under these unfavorable measurement conditions, the P63x exhibits an excellent stable performance due to the application of a saturation discriminator. All observations below are based on the assumption that the system current transformers are connected to the P63x in standard configuration (see section 'Conditioning of the measured values'). In particular, the application as transformer differential protection presupposes that end 'a' corresponds to the high voltage side of the transformer. For a non-standard connection, the appropriate settings must be taken selected (see Chapter 7).
3-122
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling differential protection
Differential protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-79 Enabling or disabling differential protection
3-123
3 Operation
(continued)
Amplitude matching
In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power identical for all windings - needs to be defined. For two-end arrangements, the nominal power will usually be the transformers reference power. For three- or four-end transformers, the nominal power of the winding with the highest-power should be set as the reference power. The individual reference currents for each end of the protected object are then calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
I ref ,a = I ref ,c = Sref 3 Vnom ,a Sref 3 Vnom ,c I ref ,b = I ref ,d = Sref 3 Vnom ,b Sref 3 Vnom ,d
Sref: Vnom,a to d:
Iref,a to d
reference power reference current of end a, b, c or d nominal voltage of end a, b, c or d
The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
k am ,a = I nom ,a I ref ,a I nom ,c I ref ,c k am ,b = I nom ,b I ref ,b I nom ,d I ref ,d
k am ,c =
k am ,d =
with kam,a to d: Inom,a to d: amplitude matching factor of end a, b, c or d primary nominal currents of the system transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P63x. The P63x checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within their permissible ranges. The acceptable ranges for the reference currents are found in the Address List in the Appendix. The matching factors must satisfy the following conditions: The matching factors must always be 16. The value for the second highest matching factor (kam,mid) must always be 0.5.
3-124
3 Operation
(continued)
In three- or four-end protection, the weakest end, that is the end with the smallest primary nominal transformer current, is thus not under any restrictions pertaining to the settings for the amplitude matching. Should the P63x calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically. The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected object are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents or the nominal currents of the device.
3-125
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Vnom prim., end a [ 019 017 ] MAIN: Vnom prim., end b [ 019 018 ] MAIN: Vnom prim., end c [ 019 019 ] MAIN: Vnom prim., end d [ 019 037 ] DIFF: Reference power Sref [ 019 016 ] DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,a [ 019 023 ] DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,b [ 019 024 ] DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,c [ 019 025 ] DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,d [ 019 038 ] Monit. range limits SFMON: Iref, a inval. range [ 091 007 ] SFMON: Iref, b inval. range [ 091 008 ] SFMON: Iref, c inval. range [ 091 009 ] SFMON: Iref, d inval. range [ 091 016 ]
Iref ,a =Sref /( Vnom , a* 3)
Iref , b= Sref /( Vnom ,b* 3 )
Monit. range limits
Iref , c= Sref /( Vnom ,c* 3 )
Monit. range limits
Iref , d= Sref /( Vnom ,d* 3 )
Monit. range limits
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end a [ 019 020 ] MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end b [ 019 021 ] MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end c [ 019 022 ] MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end d [ 019 026 ] kam,a > 16
DIFF: fact. [ 004 DIFF: fact. [ 004 DIFF: fact. [ 004 DIFF: fact. [ 004
Matching kam,a 105 ] Matching kam,b 106 ] Matching kam,c 127 ] Matching kam,d 168 ]
SFMON: Matching fail. end a [ 091 000 ] SFMON: Matching fail. end b [ 091 001 ] SFMON: Matching fail. end C [ 091 002 ] SFMON: Matching fail. end D [ 091 017 ]
kam,b > 16
kam,c > 16
kam,d > 16 kam,a=Inom,a/Iref,a
kam,b=Inom,b/Iref,b
kam,c=Inom,c/Iref,c
kam,d=Inom,d/Iref,d
kam,pos
kam,pos < 0.5
SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv. [ 091 006 ] DIFF: Sound match

303 310
64Z6013 A_EN
3-80 Calculating and checking the matching factors.
3-126
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Protection active

306 001
DIFF: Sound match

303 310
DIFF: Matching fact. kam,a [ 004 105] IA,a
kam,a*IA,a
Iam,A,a
kam,a*IB,a IB,a
Iam,B,a
kam,a*IC,a IC,a DIFF: Matching fact. kam,b [ 004 106] IA,b
Iam,C,a
kam,b*IA,b
Iam,A,b
kam,b*IB,b IB,b
Iam,B,b
kam,b*IC,b IC,b DIFF: Matching fact. kam,c [ 004 127] IA,c
Iam,C,b
kam,c*IA,c
Iam,A,c
kam,c*IB,c IB,c
Iam,B,c
kam,c*IC,c IC,c DIFF: Matching fact. kam,d [ 004 168] IA,d
Iam,C,c
kam,d*IA,d
Iam,A,d
kam,d*IB,d IB,d
Iam,B,d
kam,d*IC,d IC,d
Iam,C,d
64Z5004 B_EN
3-81 Amplitude matching
3-127
3 Operation
(continued)
Vector group matching
Vector group matching indicates that the low voltage-side currents are rotated with respect to the high voltage-side currents according to the vector group of the transformer to be protected. Thereby, phase coincidence with the high voltage-side currents is restored. With the P63x, this is achieved by calculating the relevant vector difference or where appropriate, by sign inversion for the low voltage-side phase currents (end b, c or d). Care must be taken to avoid distortion of the amplitude matching by this operation. For all odd vector groups, this is achieved by means of the factor 1/ 3 . Using vector diagrams, it can be shown that the operations listed in the following table will lead to phase coincidence of the high and low voltage-side currents while maintaining the amplitude matching. In Figure 3-82, such a vector diagram is depicted for a transformer having the vector group Yd5 as an example. By subtraction of each phase current from the cyclically leading phase current and subsequent multiplication by the factor 1/ 3 , the desired matching is achieved.
3-128
3 Operation
(continued)
3-82 Vector diagram for vector group matching with a transformer having the vector group Yd5
3-129
3 Operation
(continued)
Zero-sequence current filtering
The table shows that the zero-sequence current is subtracted from the phase currents of end a and, for all even vector groups, from the phase currents of ends b, c and d. According to the theory of symmetrical components, the zero-sequence current is calculated by dividing by 3 the vector sum of the phase currents:
I am ,0,z = 1 I am ,A ,z + I am ,B ,z + I am ,C ,z 3
z: Iam:
end a, b, c or d amplitude-matched current
Zero-sequence filtering may be disabled separately for each end. In general this disabling of zero-sequence filtering is intended for even-numbered vector groups. Should the side considered here require the setting of an odd-numbered vector group while at the same time no operational system star point grounding is provided within the protected area, then, in view of increased sensitivity with single-pole internal faults, it is recommended that the respective zero-sequence current is fed to the individual measuring systems again. Zero-sequence filtering for end z is enabled using setting parameter: DIFF: 0-seq. filt.z en.PSx. The following table lists the required operations for all vector groups that may occur. The indices in the equations have the following meanings: am: s: x: y: z: x+1: x-1: amplitude-matched amplitude- and vector group-matched phase A, B or C measuring system 1, 2 or 3 end b, c or d cyclically trailing phase cyclically leading phase
3-130
3 Operation
(continued)
End
ID of the vector group
Setting: With zero-sequence filtering Is,y ,z =

I am ,x,a I am ,0,a
Setting: Without zero-sequence filtering Is,y ,z =

I am ,x,a I am ,x,z
a 0 = 12 1 2 3 4 b, c or d 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I am ,x,z I am ,0,z
[I am ,x,z I am,x +1,z ]

I am ,0,z I am ,x ,+1,z
1 3
[I am ,x,z I am,x +1,z ]

I am ,x +1,z 1 3
1 3
+ I am ,0,z
[I
amp ,x 1,z
I am ,x +1,z
[I
amp ,x 1,z
I am ,x +1,z
1 3
+ I am ,0,z
I am ,x 1,z I am ,0,z
I am ,x 1,z 1 3
[I am,x 1,z I am,x ,z ]

I am ,0,z I am ,x ,z
[I am,x 1,z I am,x ,z ]

I am ,x ,z
1 3
+ I am ,0,z
[I am,x +1,z I am,x,z ]

I am ,x +1,z I am ,0,z
1 3
[I am,x +1,z I am,x,z ]

I am ,x +1,z
1 3
+ I am ,0,z
[I am,x +1,z I am,x 1,z ]

I am ,0,z I am ,x 1,z
1 3
[I am,x +1,z I am,x 1,z ]

I am ,x -1,z
1 3
+ I am ,0,z
[I am,x ,z I am,x 1,z ]
1 3
[I am,x ,z I am,x 1,z ]
1 3
+ I am ,0,z
Vector group matching is via a straight-forward input of the vector group identification number provided that the phase currents of the high and low voltage side(s) are connected in standard configuration (see section 'Conditioning of the measured values'). For other configurations, special considerations apply (see Chapter 7). A reverse phase rotation (A-C-B) needs to be taken into account by making the appropriate setting at the P63x. The P63x will then automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 set ID).
3-131
3 Operation
(continued)
Is,1,a Is,y,a Is,2,a Is,3,a DIFF: 0-seq. filt.a en.PSx Parameter set set set set DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 4 DIFF: 0-seq. filt.a en.PSx 072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155 DIFF: 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx 072 156 073 156 074 156 075 156 DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx 019 010 019 040 019 041 019 042
0: no 1: yes DIFF: 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx
0: no 1: yes
Iam,A,a Iam,B,a Iam,C,a Iam,A,b Iam,B,b Iam,C,b Iam,A,c Iam,B,c Iam,C,c Is,1,b Is,y,b Is,2,b Is,3,b Iam,A,d DIFF: 0-seq. filt.c en.PSx DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-c PSx [ * ] Parameter set set set set 0: no Iam,C,d 1: yes 1 2 3 4 DIFF: 0-seq. filt.c en.PSx 072 157 073 157 074 157 075 157 DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-c PSx 019 011 019 043 019 044 019 045 Iam,0,c Iam,0,b Iam,0,a
Iam,B,d
MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ]
Is,1,c Is,y,c Is,2,c Is,3,c
64Z6010 A_EN
3-83 Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, ends a to c
3-132
3 Operation
(continued)
Parameter DIFF 0-seq filt : . .d en .PSx set set set set 1 2 3 4
DIFF 0 : -seq. filt.d en .PSx 072 154 073 154 074 154 075 154
DIFF: Vec.gr ends . a-d PSx 019 014 019 046 019 047 019 048
DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-d PSx [ * ] MAIN Phase sequence : [ 010 049 ]
d Iam,A, ,d Iam,B ,d Iam,C I am,0,d
Is,1,d Is,y,d Is,2,d Is,3,d
64Z6011 A_EN
3-84 Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, end d
3-133
3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics
The differential and restraining current values for each measurement system are calculated from the current values after amplitude and vector group matching. The formation of the restraining values differs between two- and three-winding protection The following equations are valid for uniformly defined current arrows relative to the protected equipment, e.g. all the current arrows of all windings point either towards the protected object or away from it. Calculation of differential and restraining currents for two-winding protection:
I d ,y = I s ,y ,a + I s ,y ,b I R ,y = 0.5 I s ,y ,a I s ,y ,b
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for three-winding or four-winding protection:

Id ,y = I s ,y ,a + I s ,y ,b + I s ,y ,c + I s ,y ,d IR ,y = 0.5 I s ,y ,a + I s ,y ,b + I s ,y ,c + I s ,y ,d
The tripping characteristic of the P63x line differential protection device has two knee points. The first knee-point depends on the setting at D I F F : I d i f f > P S x and is on the intersection with the tripping characteristic for single-side feed. If the new current transformer supervision (CTS) function - as of version P63x -606 - is used, the basic pick-up sensitivity D IF F : Id i ff> can be increased to a set value (D IF F : Id i ff> ( C T S) ) when a CT fault is detected. See details given in the section describing the CTS function group. The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the setting at DIFF: IR,m2 PSx. The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure 3-85 shows the tripping characteristic. Characteristics equation for the range 0 IR 0.5 I diff > :
Id I > = diff I ref Iref
Characteristics equation for the range 0.5 Idiff >< IR IR ,m 2 :

I > Id I = m1 R + dif (1 0.5 m1 ) I ref I ref I ref
3-134
3 Operation
(continued)
Characteristics equation for the range I R ,m 2 < I R :

I I > Id I = m2 H + diff (1 0.5 m1 ) + R ,m 2 (m1 m2 ) Iref I ref Iref I ref
Iref: m1: m2:
reference current gradient of the characteristic in range 0.5 Idiff >< IR IH ,m 2 gradient of characteristic in range I R ,m 2 < I H
8.00
Id / Iref
6.00
Tripping area
4.00
Fau for lt cur sin ren gle t -sid char e f acte eed rist ic
m2
7 0.
2.00
0.3 m1 =
Blocking area
IR,m2 / Iref = 4.0
12200e.DS4
Id> / Iref = 0.2 0.00 I

3-85
2.00 II
4.00
6.00 IR / Iref III
8.00
Tripping characteristic of differential protection
3-135
3 Operation
(continued)
If the current transformer supervision (CTS) function is used, the basic pick-up sensitivity D IF F : Id i ff> can be increased to a value set at D IF F : Id i ff> ( C T S) .
Idiff
Fault current characteristic for single-side infeed
m2
Idiff>(CTS)
1
m1
Idiff>
0 1 2 3
IR,m2
IR
64Z6030A_EN
3-86
Changing the characteristic if C T S : I d i f f > ( C T S ) a c t i v e = Yes
Rapid (high-set) differential protection
Above the adjustable threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > P S x of the differential current, the P63x will trip without taking into account either the harmonic restraint or the overfluxing stabilization. If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > > P S x , the restraining current and the saturation discriminator are no longer taken into account either, that is the P63x will trip regardless of the restraining value and the saturation discriminator.
3-136
3 Operation
(continued)
3-87 Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems
3-137
3 Operation
(continued)
DIFF: Sat.discr. 1 trigg. [ 041 115 ] DIFF: Sat.discr. 2 trigg. [ 041 116 ] DIFF: Sat.discr. 3 trigg. [ 041 117 ]
DIFF: Op.mode rush rst.PSx [ * ]
DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg. [ 041 118 ] DIFF: Harm.block 2 trigg. [ 041 119 ] DIFF: Harm.block 3 trigg. [ 041 120 ]
0: Without 1: Not phase -selective 2: Phase-selective DIFF: Overflux.bl.1 trigg. [ 041 121 ] DIFF: Overflux.bl.2 trigg. [ 041 122 ] DIFF: Overflux.bl.3 trigg. [ 041 123 ] DIFF: Idiff>(#) PSx [ * ] DIFF: m1 PSx [ * DIFF: m2 PSx [ * DIFF: IR,m2 PSx [ * DIFF: Op.del., trip sig.PSx [ * ]
DIFF: Trip signal [ 041 075 ]
DIFF: Enabled [ 041 210 ] MAIN: Protection active

306 001
DIFF: Id,1
303 303
DIFF: Trip signal 1 [ 041 002 ] DIFF: Trip signal 2 [ 041 003 ] DIFF: Trip signal 3 [ 041 004 ]
DIFF: IR,1
303 305
DIFF: Id,2
303 304
DIFF: IR,2
303 306
DIFF: Id,3
303 307
DIFF: IR,3
303 308
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx [ * ]
DIFF: Id>> triggered [ 041 221 ] DIFF: Idiff>>> PSx [ * ] # DIFF: Meas.system 1 trigg. [ 041 124 ] DIFF: Meas.system 2 trigg. [ 041 125 ] DIFF: Meas.system 3 trigg. [ 041 126 ] DIFF: Idiff> PSx 072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142 DIFF: m2 PSx 072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146 DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) PSx 080 000 081 000 082 000 083 000 DIFF: IR,m2 PSx 072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147 DIFF: Idiff>> PSx 072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143 DIFF: Idiff>>> PSx 072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144 DIFF: Op.del., trip sig.PSx 010 162 010 163 010 164 010 165 DIFF: Id>>> triggered [ 041 222 ]
or if
DIFF: Idiff>(CTS)PSx CTS: Idiff>(CTS)active =yes [ 036 203 ]
DIFF: Op.mode rush rst .PSx 072 148 073 148 074 148 075 148 DIFF: m1 PSx 072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145
64Z6012 A_EN
3-88 Measuring system of the P63x
3-138
3 Operation
(continued)
Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
When an unloaded transformer is connected, the inrush current at unfavorable switching instants such as for voltage zero, may have values that exceed the transformer nominal current several times over. It takes some time for the current to assume its small stationary value. Since the high inrush current flows on the connected side only, the tripping characteristic of the differential protectionP63x may give rise to a trip unless stabilizing action is taken. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having twice the system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush current. The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I(f0) and second harmonic components I(2*f0) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio I(2*f0) / I(f0) exceeds a specific adjustable value in at least one measuring system, tripping is blocked optionally in one of the following modes: across all three measuring systems selectively for one measuring system (see Figure 3-88). There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
3-139
3 Operation
(continued)
DIFF: Trip signal [ 041 075 ] DIFF: Meas.system 1 trigg. [ 041 124 ] DIFF: Meas.system 2 trigg. [ 041 125 ] DIFF: Meas.system 3 trigg. [ 041 126 ] DIFF: Rush I(2f0)/I(f0) PSx [ * ] 0 DIFF: Id,1 f0 I(f0) I(2*f0)/ I(f0) 0 & I(2*f0)/ I(f0) 0 & I(2*f0)/ I(f0) 30ms & 30ms & & 30ms &
DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg. [ 041 118 ] DIFF: Harm.block 2 trigg. [ 041 119 ] DIFF: Harm.block 3 trigg. [ 041 120 ]
2*f0 I(2*f0) DIFF: Id,2 f0 I(f0)
2*f0 I(2*f0) DIFF: Id,3 f0 I(f0)
2*f0 I(2*f0)
DIFF: I(2*f0),1 * Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 DIFF: Rush I(2f0)/I(f0) PSx 072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159
303 301
DIFF: I(2*f0),2
303 302
DIFF: I(2*f0),3
303 309
Q6Z0110 C_EN
3-89 Inrush stabilization (Harmonic restraint)
3-140
3 Operation
(continued)
Saturation discriminator
Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means of the bias. Due to the triple-slope tripping characteristic, the stabilization is particularly pronounced for high currents. However, as an additional safeguard for through-currents with transformer saturation, the P63x is provided with a saturation discriminator. After each zero crossing of the restraining current, the saturation discriminator monitors the occurrence of the differential current over time. For internal faults, the differential current appears after a zero crossing together with the restraining current. In the case of passing currents with transformer saturation, however, a differential current will not appear until transformer saturation begins. Accordingly, a locking signal is generated on the basis of level monitoring of the differential current as compared to the restraining current, and thus the desired through-stabilization is achieved. Locking is restricted to the measuring system where an external fault was detected. There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
3-90 Saturation discriminator
3-141
3 Operation
(continued)
Overfluxing stabilization
If the transformer is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, saturation effects occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential protection tripping. The fact that the current of the protected object under saturation conditions has a high proportion of harmonics having five times the system frequency serves as the basis of stabilization. The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I(f0) and second harmonic components I(5*f0) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio I(5*f0) / I(f0) exceeds the set value D I F F : O v e r I ( 5 f 0 ) / I ( f 0 ) P S x in at least one measuring system, and if the restraining current is smaller than 4Iref, then tripping is blocked selectively for one measuring system. There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
3-142
3 Operation
(continued)
3-91 Overfluxing stabilization
3-143
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured operating data of differential protection
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-92 Measured operating data of differential and restraining currents
3-144
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_1 to REF_3) The ground differential protection function (Br.: restricted earth fault protection) can be applied to transformer windings with grounded neutral point where the neutral point-toground connection is fitted with a current transformer. The ground differential protection (Br: restricted earth fault protection) function is not provided by the P631. For the other P63x models, one ground differential protection function per transformer winding is available for up to three ends. The P63x display shows the winding end associated with a particular ground differential protection function. Connection for and operation of the ground differential protection function will now be presented with end 'a' as an example. Equivalent considerations apply to ends 'b' and 'c'. Ground differential protection may be applied to transformer ends with a grounded neutral-point, but in this case the neutral-point-to-ground connection must be fitted with a CT. Ground differential protection is based on comparing the vector sum IN of the phase currents of the relevant transformer end to the neutral-point current IY. The P63x calculates the vector sum of the phase currents. For the connection, see section 'Conditioning of the measured values'.
3-145
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling or enabling ground differential protection
Ground differential protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-93
Disabling or enabling ground differential protection
3-146
3 Operation
(continued)
Amplitude matching
For amplitude matching, the nominal power of the transformer end should first be set as the reference power. The reference current is then calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltage of the transformer end.
I ref,N ,a = Sref 3 Vnom ,a
reference power Sref: Iref,N,a: reference current of the ground differential protection function, end a Vnom,a: nominal voltage, end a The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
k am ,N ,a = I nom ,a I ref,N ,a k am ,Y ,a = I nom ,Y ,a I ref,N,a
with am: amplitude-matched Inom,a: primary nominal current of the main current transformer Inom,Y,a: primary nominal current of current transformer in the neutral-point-to-ground connection Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P63x. The P63x checks that the reference current and matching factor are within their permissible ranges. The acceptable range for the reference current can be read out from the S&R 103 operating program. The following applies to the matching factors: The matching factor must always be 16. The value for the smaller matching factor (kam,min) must always be 0.5. Should the P63x calculate a reference current or matching factors not meeting the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically. The measured values are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current of the device.
3-147
3 Operation
(continued)
REF_1: Reference power Sref [ 019 031 ] MAIN: Vnom prim., end a [ 019 017 ] Iref,N,a=Sref/ (Vnom*3) Monit. range limits REF_1: Ref. curr. Iref [ 019 034 ] SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_1 [ 091 105 ]
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end a [ 019 020 ] MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end a [ 019 027 ] kam,N,a = Inom,a/ Iref,N,a kam,N,a = Inom,Y,a/ Iref,N,a kam,N,a > 16 REF_1: Matching fact. kam,N [ 004 160 ] REF_1: Matching fact.kam,Y [ 004 163 ] SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_1 [ 091 101 ] SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1 [ 091 102 ]
kam,N,a > 16
kam,min
kam,min < 0.5
SFMON: Min.mtch. f.inv.REF_1 [ 091 104 ] 64Z6020 A_EN
3-94
Calculating and monitoring the matching factors
3-148
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes
As of version P63x -603 a new parameter makes it possible for the user to choose among three operating modes.
Address PS2 PS3 073 149 074 149 Description PS4 075 149 E D I F 1 : O p e r a t i n g m o d e P S x Low imped. / sum(IP) Low imped. / IP,max High impedance Low imped. / sum(IP) Low imped. / IP,max High impedance Low imped. / sum(IP) Low imped. / IP,max High impedance Range of Values
PS1 072 149
072 169
073 169
074 169
075 169 E D I F 2 : O p e r a t i n g m o d e P S x
072 049
073 049
074 049
075 049 E D I F 3 : O p e r a t i n g m o d e P S x
The 'Low imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode is the same as the (low impedance) ground differential protection function previously provided by version P63x -602.
3-149
3 Operation
(continued)
'Low imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode
From the amplitude-matched resultant currents Iam,N,a and Iam,Y,a , the differential and restraining currents are calculated as follows:
I d ,N ,a = I am ,N,a + I am ,Y,a I R ,N,a = I am ,N,a
Again, the equation for the differential current applies under the condition of uniformly defined current arrows relative to the protected object. Both current arrows point either towards the protected object or away from it. Figure 3-95 shows the tripping characteristic of the ground differential protection function. The characteristic equation is as follows:
I d ,N ,a I ref = Idiff > ,N,a I ref ,N ,a + 1.005 IR ,N,a I ref ,N ,a
with Idiff>,N,a:
setting at R E F _ 1 : I d i f f > P S x
3-150
3 Operation
(continued)
8.00
cu rre nt tra ns fo rm er s sa tu ra tio n
Id,N / Iref
6.00
Tripping area
4.00
m =
2.00
Fa ul tc ur re nt ch ar ac te ris tic
fo rt ra ns ie nt
05 .0 1
Blocking area
12201e.DS4
Id,N> / Iref = 0.2 0.00
2.00
4.00
of th e
m ai n
6.00 IR,N / Iref
8.00
3-95
Tripping characteristic of ground differential protection with the 'Low imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode
3-151
3 Operation
(continued)
'Low imped. / IP,max' operating mode
Using this operating mode differential current Id and restraining current IR are defined as follows:
Id = k am ,P {I A ,I B ,I C }+ k am ,Y I Y IR = 1 (k am ,P max{I A , I B , I C }+ k am ,Y I Y 2
When compared to the 'Low imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode, a double slope tripping characteristic can be used here because of the definition of the restraining current (see Figure 3-96). In particular, this tripping characteristic permits a tripping test under load current by shorting a phase current (to simulate residual current) without the need of star point current IY. Besides the Idiff> parameter, already available to set the basic pick-up sensitivity, the following parameters are also provided with the 'Low imped. / IP,max' operating mode to set the tripping characteristic; in this case IR,m2 is equivalent to Iref.
Address PS2 PS3 073 162 073 163 073 164 073 172 073 165 073 166 073 192 073 193 073 194 074 162 074 163 074 164 074 172 074 165 074 166 074 192 074 193 074 194 Description PS4 075 162 REF_1: m1 075 163 R E F _ 1 : m 2 075 164 R E F _ 1 : I R , m 2 075 172 REF_1: m1 075 165 R E F _ 1 : m 2 075 166 R E F _ 1 : I R , m 2 075 192 REF_1: m1 075 193 R E F _ 1 : m 2 075 194 R E F _ 1 : I R , m 2 PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx 0.00 0.20 1.00 0.15 1.50 0.10 1.00 1.50 0.00 0.20 1.00 0.15 1.50 0.10 1.00 1.50 0.00 0.20 1.00 0.15 1.50 0.10 1.00 1.50 Range of Values
PS1 072 162 072 163 072 164 072 172 072 165 072 166 072 192 072 193 072 194
3-152
3 Operation
(continued)
Id/Iref 2
Fault current characteristic for single-end, single-phase infeed
1.5 m 1
2
0.5 I diff>
IR,m2 0.5 1 1.5 2 IR/Iref

64Z6021A_EN
3-96
Tripping characteristic of the ground differential protection with the 'Low imped. / IP,max' operating mode
'High impedance' operating mode
This operating mode is provided for application with the high impedance current measuring approach. The pick-up sensitivity is set via the Idiff> parameter which is already available.
3-153
3 Operation
(continued)
Idiff>>> threshold
The restraining quantity is no longer taken into account when the differential current value exceeds the threshold set at R E F _ 1 : I d i f f > > > P S x . Therefore the P63x will issue a trip signal independently of the restraining quantity.
Applying Current Transformer Supervision
When applying current transformer supervision (CTS) (as of version P63x -606), the ground differential protection function may be blocked for the relevant end where a CT fault is detected. See details given in the section describing the CTS function group. When a C T S : A l a r m e n d y signals is issued, the associated ground differential protection function is then blocked, if if it has been set accordingly (R E F _ n : C T S e f f e c t i v e P S x = 'Yes' by assigning REF_n to end y).
3-154
3 Operation
(continued)
CTS: Alarm end a [ 036 205 ] 1: yes REF_1: CTS effective [ 080 003 ] 1: yes
REF_1: Idiff> PSx [ * ] REF_1: m1 PSx [ * REF_1: m2 PSx [ *
REF_1: Enabled [ 041 132 ] MAIN: Protection active

306 001
REF_1: IR,m2 PSx [ * ]
IA, a IN,a IB, a IC, a kam,Y,a*IN,a IY, a IR,Y,a kam,N,a*IN,a Id,N,a REF_1: Trip signal [ 041 005 ]
REF_1: Idif>>> PSx [ * ]
REF_1: IR,N,a
402 551
REF_1: Id,N,a
402 550
REF_1: Idiff> PSx 072 150 073 150 074 150 075 150
REF_1: m1 PSx 072 162 073 162 074 162 075 162
DIFF: m2 PSx 072 163 073 163 074 163 075 163
REF_1: IR,m2 PSx 072 164 073 164 074 164 075 164
REF_1: Idiff>>> PSx 072 151 073 151 074 151 075 151
64Z6022 A_EN
3-97
Measuring system of the P63x
3-155
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured operating data of ground differential protection
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-98
Measured operating data of differential and restraining currents
3-156
3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups DTOC1 to DTOC3) In the P63x a three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC protection) is available for up to three transformer ends. The measured values to be monitored by the respective DTOC functions are selected using a setting parameter. With the P633 and P634, these values can also be quantities formed by summation of the current values from two user-selected transformer ends. With the P631 and P632, the 'Current summation' setting has no effect. Phase current values as well as negative-sequence and residual current measured values are monitored. Function group DTOC1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the DTOC protection functions. The same will apply to function groups DTOC2 and DTOC3.
3-99
Selection of measured values for DTOC protection (Selection of end d applies to the P634 only, selection of end c and of 'Current summation' applies to the P633 and P634 only)
3-157
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
3-100
Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
3-158
3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stages
The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters" (see section "Activation of dynamic parameters") and the "normal" thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started. Once the time delays have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
3-159
3 Operation
(continued)
3-101
Phase current stages
3-160
3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence current stages
The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values according to this equation. This is based on the setting at M AIN : Ph a s e s e q u e n c e . Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 Ineg = IA + a IB + a IC 3
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 Ineg = IA + a IB + a 2 IC 3
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters" (see section "Activation of dynamic parameters") and the "normal" thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started. Once these time delays have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The first stage of the negative-sequence current protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
3-161
3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC1: Gen. starting modePSx [ * ] 1: With start IN/ . Ineg DTOC1: Block. tIneg> EXT [ 036 141 ] DTOC1: Rush restr.enabl PSx [ * ] 1: yes DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg. [ 041 118 ] DIFF: Harm.block 2 trigg. [ 041 119 ] DIFF: Harm.block 3 trigg. [ 041 120 ] MAIN: Protection active
306 001
DTOC1: Enabled [ 035 102 ] MAIN: Dynam. param. active [ 040 090] MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] IA,y IB,y IC,y DTOC1: Block. tIneg>> EXT [ 036 142 ] Ineg,y DTOC1: Ineg> PSx [ * ] DTOC1: Ineg> dynamic PSx [ * ] DTOC1: tIneg> PSx [ * ]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg > [ 036 151 ] DTOC1: tIneg> elapsed [ 036 148 ] DTOC1: Starting Ineg> [ 036 145 ]
DTOC1: Ineg>> PSx [ * ] DTOC1: Ineg>> dynamic PSx [ * ] DTOC1: tIneg>> PSx [ * ]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg >> [ 036 152 ] DTOC1: tIneg>> elapsed [ 036 149 ]
DTOC1: Block. tIneg>>> EXT [ 036 143 ] DTOC1: Ineg>>> PSx [ * ] DTOC1: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx [ * ] DTOC1: tIneg>>> PSx [ * ]
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>> [ 036 146 ]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg >>> [ 036 153 ] DTOC1: tIneg>>> elapsed [ 036 150 ] DTOC1: Starting Ineg>>> [ 036 147 ] DTOC1: Starting Ineg [ 036 144 ]
DTOC1: Ineg> PSx 076 197 077 197 078 197 079 197 DTOC1: Ineg>>> PSx 076 199 077 199 078 199 079 199
DTOC1: Ineg> dynamic PSx 076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200 DTOC1: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202
DTOC1: Ineg>> PSx 076 198 077 198 078 198 079 198 DTOC1: tIneg> PSx 076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203
DTOC1: Ineg>> dynamic PSx 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201 DTOC1: tIneg>> PSx 076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204
DTOC1: Rush restr.enabl PSx 076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063 DTOC1: tIneg>>> PSx 076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205 DTOC1: Gen. starting modePSx 076 066 077 066 078 066 079 066 64Z5074 C_EN
3-102
Negative-sequence current stages
3-162
3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stages
The residual current is monitored by the with three-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters" (see "Activation of Dynamic Parameters") and the "normal" thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started. Once the time delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. If the operating mode of the general starting decision is set to 'With starting IN', a trip signal is issued as well. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. In addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multipole starting (depending on the setting).
3-163
3 Operation
(continued)
3-103
Residual current stages

3-164
3 Operation
(continued)
General starting
If the current exceeds one of the set thresholds of the phase current stages, a general starting decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of the negativesequence and residual current stages should be taken into account in the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. A signal is issued when the time delay of this stage has elapsed.
3-104
General starting
3-165
3 Operation
(continued)
Counters of the DTOC protection function
The number of general starts is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
3-105
Counters of the DTOC protection function
3-166
3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 to IDMT3) The P63x features an inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT protection) for up to three transformer ends. The measured variables to be monitored by the respective IDMT function are selected by a setting parameter. With the P633 and P634 this can also be quantities formed by summation of current values from two user-selected transformer ends. With the P631 and P632 the 'Current summation' setting has no effect. Phase current values as well as negative-sequence and residual current measured values are monitored. Function group IDMT1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the IDMT protection functions. The same will apply to function groups IDMT2 and IDMT3.
3-106
Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection (Selection of end d applies to the P634 only, selection of end c and of 'Current summation' applies to the P633 and P634 only)
3-167
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling IDMT protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-107
Disabling or enabling IDMT protection
Time-dependent characteristics
The measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negativesequence current and the residual current operate independently and can be set separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics. The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in figures 3-108 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3 to 3-11 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics.
3-168
3 Operation
(continued)
No Tripping . Characteristic Characteristic settable factor: k = 0.05 to 10.00 0 Definite Time Per IEC 255-3
Formula for the Tripping Characteristic
Constants
Formula for the Reset Characteristic b c R
t=k
t =k
a I I ref 1
b
1 Standard Inverse 2 Very Inverse 3 Extremely Inverse 4 Long Time Inverse Per IEEE C37.112
a + c t = k I b I 1 ref
0.14 13.50 80.00 120.00
0.02 1.00 2.00 1.00

tr = k R I I ref 1
2
5 Moderately Inverse 6 Very Inverse 7 Extremely Inverse Per ANSI

a + c t = k I b I 1 ref
0.0515 19.6100 28.2000
0.0200 2.0000 2.0000
0.1140 0.4910 0.1217

tr = k R I I ref 1
2
4.85 21.60 29.10
8 Normally Inverse 9 Short Time Inverse 10 Long Time Inverse 11 RI-Type Inverse
t =k
8.9341 0.2663 5.6143

1 0.339 0.236 I I ref

2.0938 0.17966 1.2969 0.03393 1.0000 2.18592
9.00 0.50 15.75
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse
I t = k 5.8 1.35 ln I ref
3-169
3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3. Standard Inverse 1000
IEC 255-3. Very Inverse 1000
100 k=10 10
100
10
k=1
k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1 k=1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
S8Z50K1B
I/Iref I/IB
Characteristic No. 1
IEC 255-3. Extremely Inverse 1000
I/Iref
IEC 255-3. Long Time Inverse 1000
S8Z50K2B
100
100
k=10
10
10 k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1
k=1 k=0.1 k=0.05
0.1
k=1 k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.1
0.01
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
Characteristic No. 3 3-108 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
I/Iref
S8Z50K3B
S8Z50K4B
3-170
3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112. Moderately Inverse 1000 1000
IEEE C37.112. Very Inverse
100
100
10
k=10
10
t/s
1 k=1
t/s
1
k=10
k=1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01
I/Iref
IEEE C37.112. Extremely Inverse 1000
I/Iref
S8Z50K5C
S8Z50K6C
100
10
t/s
1
k=10
0.1
k=1
0.01
k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
Characteristic No. 7 3-109 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
S8Z50K7C
3-171
3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI. Normally Inverse 1000 1000
ANSI. Short Time Inverse
100
100
10
10 k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1 k=10 0.1 k=1 0.01 k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.1
k=1
0.01
k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
ANSI. Long Time Inverse 1000
S8Z50K8C
I/Iref
S8Z50K9C
100 k=10 10
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
Characteristic No. 10 3-110 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
S8Z50KAC
3-172
3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse 1000 1000
RXIDG-Type Inverse
100 k=10 10
100 k=10
10 k=1
t/s
1
t/s
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
S8Z50KBB
I/Iref
I/Iref
S8Z50KCB
Characteristic No. 11 3-111 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
3-173
3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stage
The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The dynamic threshold is active for the set hold time of the dynamic parameters (see Activation of Dynamic Parameters); the normal threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function will be triggered when the 1.05-fold of the set reference current value is exceeded in one phase. The P63x will then determine the maximum current flowing in the three phases and this value is used for further processing. Depending on the characteristic selected and the current magnitude, the P63x will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum tripping time can be set; the tripping time will not fall below this minimum independently of the magnitude of the current. The IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
3-174
3 Operation
(continued)
3-112
Phase current stage
3-175
3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence current stage
The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values according to this formula. This is based on the setting at M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e . Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 Ineg = I A + a IB + a IC 3
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 2 Ineg = I A + a IB + a IC 3
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters" (see "Activation of Dynamic Parameters") and the "normal" thresholds are active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set reference current value is exceeded. Dependent on the characteristic selected and the negative-sequence current magnitude the P63x will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum tripping time can be set; the tripping time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the current. The negative-sequence current stage of the IDMT protection function can be blocked optionally by the inrush stabilization function of the differential protection.
3-176
3 Operation
(continued)
DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg. [ 041 118 ] DIFF: Harm.block 2 trigg. [ 041 119 ] DIFF: Harm.block 3 trigg. [ 041 120 ] 1: yes 0: no IDMT1: Enabled [ 038 125 ] MAIN: Protection active
306 001
IDMT1: Rush restr.enabl [ * ]
PSx
MAIN: Dynam. param. active [ 040 090 ]
IDMT1: Iref,neg PSx [ * ] IDMT1: Iref,neg dynamic PSx [ * ]
1.05 * Iref IDMT1: Starting Iref,neg> [ 038 173 ] MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] IA,y IB,y IC,y
Ineg
IDMT1: Character. neg. PSx [ * ] IDMT1: Factor kt,neg PSx [ * ] IDMT1: Min. trip t. neg PSx [ * ] IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx [ * ] IDMT1: Release neg PSx [ * ]
Setting IDMT1: Character neg. . 1: IEC Standart Inverse 2: IEC Very Inverse 3: IEC Extr. Inverse 4: IEC Long Time Inv . 5: IEEE Moderately Inv . 6: IEEE Very Inverse 7: IEEE Extremely Inv . 8: ANSI Normally Inv . 9: ANSI Short Time Inv . 10: ANSI Long Time Inv . PSx
IDMT1: Release neg Setting 1: Without delay 2: Delayed as per char . IDMT1: Block. tIref,neg> EXT [ 038 178 ]
PSx
11: RI-Type Inverse 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse IDMT1: tIref,neg> elapsed [ 038 174 ] Ineg/Iref,neg IDMT1: Hold time neg runn . [ 038 175 ] IDMT1: Memory 'neg' clear [ 038 176 ] IDMT1: Trip sig. tIref,neg> [ 038 177 ]
IDMT1: Gen. starting modePSx [ * ] 1: With start IN/ . Ineg
IDMT1: Rush restr.enabl 081 060 082 060 083 060 084 060 IDMT1: Factor kt,neg PSx 081 114 082 114 083 114 084 114
PSx
IDMT1: Iref,neg PSx 081 111 082 111 083 111 084 111 IDMT1: Min. trip t. neg PSx 081 117 082 117 083 117 084 117
IDMT1: Iref,neg dynamic PSx 081 112 082 112 083 112 084 112 IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx 081 115 082 115 083 115 084 115
IDMT1: Character . neg. PSx 081 113 082 113 083 113 084 113 IDMT1: Release neg PSx 081 116 082 116 083 116 084 116 IDMT1: Gen. starting modePSx 081 059 082 059 083 059 084 059
64Z5076C_EN
3-113
Negative-sequence current stage
3-177
3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stage
The residual current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The "dynamic" threshold is active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters" (see section "Activation of dynamic parameters") and the "normal" threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set reference current value is exceeded by the residual current. Dependent on the characteristic selected and the residual current magnitude the P63x will determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the residual current flow magnitude. The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked by singlepole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
3-178
3 Operation
(continued)
3-114
Residual current stage
3-179
3 Operation
(continued)
Hold time
The setting of the hold time defines the time period during which the IDMT protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped out. Should starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the renewed starting will be added to the time period stored. When the starting times sum reach the tripping time value determined by the P63x then the corresponding signal will be issued. Should starting not recur during the hold time period then, depending on the setting, the memory storing the accumulated starting times value will either be cleared without delay or according to the characteristic set. In figure 3-115 the effect of hold time is shown by the example of a phase current stage.
3-180
3 Operation
(continued)
3-115
The effect of the hold time illustrated for the phase current stage as an example Case A: The determined tripping time is not reached. Case B: The determined tripping time is reached.
3-181
3 Operation
(continued)
General starting
A general starting is triggered if the current in one phase exceeds the 1.05-fold of the set reference current value. It can be selected whether the starting of the negativesequence and residual current stages should be taken into account in the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. A signal is issued when the time period of this stage has elapsed.
3-116
General starting
Counters of the IDMT protection function
The number of general starts is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
3-117
Counters of the IDMT protection function

3-182
3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Groups THRM1 and THRM2) The thermal overload protection function has been designed for overload protection of transformers. Function group THRM1 is available in all devices of the P63x product family (P631, P632, P633 and P634) whereas function group THRM2 is available only in the P633 and P634 devices. Function group THRM1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the thermal overload protection functions. Accordingly, the same is valid for function group THRM2. The measured values to be monitored by the respective thermal overload protection functions are selected using a setting parameter. With the P633 and P634, these can also be quantities formed by summation of the current values from two user-selected transformer ends. With the P631 and P632, the 'Current summation' setting has no effect.
3-183
3 Operation
(continued)
3-118
Selection of measured values for thermal overload protection (Selection of end d applies to the P634 only, selection of end c and of 'Current summation' applies to the P633 and P634 only)
3-184
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection
Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-119
Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection
3-185
3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of thermal overload protection
Thermal overload protection will issue the T H E R M : N o t r e a d y signal if one of the following conditions applies: Thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition. Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting. The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-120
T H E R M : N o t r e a d y signal
3-186
3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics
The maximum phase current IP,max.y of the selected transformer end is used to track a first-order thermal replica according to IEC 255-8. The following parameters will govern the tripping parameters: The set thermal time constant () of the protected object THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx The tripping threshold trip set at T H E R M : R e l . O / T t r i p P S x The accumulated thermal load 0 The updated measured coolant temperature c for the protected object The maximum permissible coolant temperature c,max set at T H R M 1 : M a x . p e r m . c o o l . t m p P S x The maximum permissible object temperature max set at T H R M 1 : M a x . p e r m . o b j . t m p . P S x The object temperature is calculated from the current IP,max.y and can be displayed at T H R M 1 : O b j e c t t e m p e r a t . , T H 1 . The coolant temperature is either measured via the PT 100 input or via a 20 mA input, or a default temperature value is used instead. This choice is governed by the setting at T H R M 1 : Se l e c t C T A PSx. The coolant temperature is displayed at T H R M 1 : C o o l a n t te m p . T H 1 . The difference between the settings for the maximum permissible temperatures of the protected object and the coolant can be displayed at T H R M 1 : O / T f . I r e f p e r s i s t 1 The tripping characteristics are then defined by the equation:
0 t = ln 2 I c ,max trip 1 c I max c , max ref

The setting for the operating mode selects an 'absolute' or 'relative' replica. If the setting is for 'Absolute replica', the P63x will operate with a fixed trip threshold trip of 100 %.
I I ref
3-187
3 Operation
(continued)
10000
trip / %
200
1000
110 50
/min
100
200 110
10
50 200 110 50
1000
t/min
1
30
0.1
0.01
0.00
10
11
I/Iref
D5Z50BE
3-121
Tripping characteristic of the thermal overload protection. Tripping characteristics apply to 0 = 0 % and identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant and the updated measurement of the object temperature.
3-188
3 Operation
(continued)
Coolant temperature acquisition
To permit acquisition of the coolant temperature, an analogue I/O module Y must be fitted to the P63x. If this module is not present then the setting at T H R M 1 : D e f a u l t C T A PS x is used in the calculation of the tripping time. The setting at T H R M 1 : B l . f . C T A f a u l t P S x defines whether the thermal overload protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant temperature acquisition.
3-122
Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition (ambient temperature input)
3-189
3 Operation
(continued)
Warning signal
A warning signal is issued when the thermal load reaches the warning level set at T H R M 1 : R e l . O / T w a r n i n g P S x . Moreover, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-trip time) can be set. When the time left until tripping falls below the setting at T H R M 1 : W a r n i n g p r e - tr i p PSx, a warning signal will be issued. If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the time constant set at T H R M 1 : T i m . c o n s t 2 , < I b l P S x . The thermal replica may be reset from the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-190
3 Operation
(continued)
3-123
Thermal overload protection
3-191
3 Operation
(continued)
3-124
Resetting the thermal replica
3-192
3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>) The time-voltage protection function is not provided by the P631. The two-stage time-voltage protection function provided by the P63x evaluates the fundamental wave of the phase voltages. Disabling or enabling V<> protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltagemeasuring circuit by the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
V<> protection readiness
3-125
Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection
3-193
3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage monitoring
The P63x checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below a set threshold. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands, then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again. Furthermore, time-voltage protection provides a time-window for each timer stage. The windows are defined by the setting V< > : Vm i n PSx as lower threshold for both timer stages and by the set operate value V< or V< < of the relevant timer stage and parameter subset as upper threshold. With an appropriate setting of the successive timer stages, this provision can be used to bridge short periods of voltage failure as encountered in switching operations.
3-126
Overvoltage monitoring
3-194
3 Operation
(continued)
3-127
Undervoltage monitoring
3-195
3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) The frequency protection function is not provided with the P631. The P63x monitors the voltage to determine whether its frequency exceeds or falls below set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency protection function has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be explained below using the first stage as an example. Disabling or enabling over-/underfrequency protection
The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-128
Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection
3-196
3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time
Over-/ underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of adequate magnitude. Over-/ underfrequency protection will be blocked without delay if the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage. In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
3-129
Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
3-197
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes of over-/ underfrequency protection
For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can choose between the following operating modes: Frequency monitoring Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt) Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (f/t)
Frequency monitoring
Depending on the setting, the P63x monitors the frequency to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set nominal frequency is set, the P63x checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set, the P63x checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-198
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (f/t)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems. In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring must be set for 'underfrequency monitoring'. Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value f within the set time t, then the t/f monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring function, then the t/f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-130
Operation of frequency monitoring combined with f/t monitoring
3-199
3 Operation
(continued)
3-131
First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
3-200
3 Operation
(continued)
fmin/fmax measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition, the two following measured event values are available: f<>: Max. frequ. for f> f<>: Min. frequ. for f< Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible: f<>: Reset meas.val. USER
3-201
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f) The overfluxing protection function will detect an inadmissibly high induction B in the iron core of transformers which may have been caused either by a voltage increase and/or a frequency decrease. Disabling or enabling overfluxing protection
The overfluxing protection function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-132
Disabling or enabling overfluxing protection
202
3 Operation
(continued)
Conditioning the measured value
The overfluxing protection function will evaluate the voltage to frequency (V/f) ratio referred to nominal values. This ratio is proportional to the induction in the iron core of a transformer. The overfluxing measurement is not enabled unless the voltage and frequency values are within limits for admissible values.
3-133
Conditioning of measured value
203
3 Operation
(continued)
Fixed-time warning stage
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. A timer stage is triggered when the overfluxing value exceeds this threshold and a signal is issued when the time delay has elapsed.
3-134
Warning stage
204
3 Operation
(continued)
Fixed-time tripping stage
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. A timer stage is triggered when the overfluxing value exceeds this threshold and a signal is issued when the time delay has elapsed.
3-135
Fixed-time tripping stage
205
3 Operation
(continued)
Variable-time tripping stage
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set threshold. When the overfluxing value exceeds this threshold the P63x will determine the tripping time according to the overfluxing magnitude value and the set characteristic. The variable-time tripping characteristic is set by defining 12 pairs of overfluxing values and their associated tripping time values. Intermediate values are obtained by interpolation. The setting of the characteristic is checked for plausibility with regard to a monotonically decreasing characteristic. With values of V/f > 1.6 the tripping time is limited to the value set for V/f = 1.6. The tripping characteristic with default setting values is displayed in Figure 3-136.
100
t/s 10
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50 V/f
1.60
1.70
1.80
1.90
2.00
2.10
64Z5198A_EN
3-136
Example of a tripping characteristic (default setting)
206
3 Operation
(continued)
After a starting, the elapsed starting time is accumulated in a buffer. When the starting drops out, the buffer memory is discharged. The discharge gradient is defined by the set cooling time. When the starting recurs the buffer memory is again accumulated with starting time values. If the accumulated starting time reaches the tripping time value determined by the P63x then the trip signal will be issued. The buffer memory content during an interrupted starting is shown in Figure 3-137. In case A, the tripping time determined by the P63x is not reached by the accumulated starting time. In case B, on the other hand, a trip signal is issued
3-137
Buffer memory content during a starting
207
3 Operation
(continued)
3-138
Variable-time tripping stage

208
3 Operation
(continued)
3-139
Resetting of the thermal replica
209
3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Current Transformer Supervision (Function Group CTS) As of version P63x 606, a new current transformer supervision function has been implemented which can prevent unwanted tripping by differential protection for faults in the CT's secondary circuit. Hardware requirement This function can only be used if the new processor board with DSP coprocessor is fitted!
Disabling and enabling the CTS function
The current transformer supervision function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
CTS: General enable USER [ 031 085 ]
0 1 0: no 1: yes & CTS: Enabled [ 036 080 ]
CTS: Enable PSx [ * ]
0 1 0: no x 1: yes 1 2 3 4 PSS: PS x active eingeschaltet 036 090 036 091 036 092 036 093 Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 CTS: PSx 001 001 001 001 Enable 118 119 120 121
PSS: PS x active [ * ]
64Z5300 B_EN
3-140
Disabling or enabling the CT Supervision
3-210
3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking CTS
Current transformer supervision is blocked if one of the following conditions applies: Protection is disabled (off). The CTS function is not enabled. An external blocking signal is present. The general trip signal is present. Inrush stabilization or overfluxing restraint have operated.
MAIN: Protection active CTS: Enabled [ 036 080 ] CTS: Blocking EXT [ 036 160 ] MAIN: Gen. trip signal [ 036 251 ] DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg. [ 041 118 ] DIFF: Harm.block 2 trigg. [ 041 119 ] DIFF: Harm.block 3 trigg. [ 041 120 ] DIFF: Overflux.bl.1 trigg. [ 041 121 ] DIFF: Overflux.bl.2 trigg. [ 041 122 ] DIFF: Overflux.bl.3 trigg. [ 041 123 ] >1
>1
CTS: blocked
>1
64Z5301 A_EN
3-141
Blocking of current transformer supervision
3-211
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring condition
If CTS is ready, it will monitor the positive- and negative-sequence currents from all transformer ends (2 to 4 ends depending on the device type). A CT fault is detected when the following conditions are simultaneously present: The positive-sequence current exceeds the set threshold Ipos> in at least 2 winding ends. This means that CTS can operate only if a minimum load current is present in the protected object. The negative- to positive-sequence current ratio exceeds a high set threshold value Ineg/Ipos>> in a single winding end. In all the other ends, the negative- to positive-sequence current ratio is smaller than the low set threshold value Ineg/Ipos>, or no significant current is present (i.e. the positive-sequence current is lower than the Ipos> threshold). In such a case, there is a fault in the secondary circuit of the CT at the transformer end where a high negative-sequence current is present. Because this function uses negative-sequence currents, it can only detect unbalanced CT faults. In practice, this does not present a problem as the occurrence of a three-pole CT fault is very unlikely.
3-212
3 Operation
(continued)
CTS:
blocked CTS: Ipos> c [ * PSx ]
MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049
IA,y IC,y IC,y
Ipos
Ipos>,y
Ineg CTS: Ineg/Ipos> c PSx [ * ]
Ineg/Ipos
Ineg/Ipos>,y
CTS: Ineg/Ipos>> c PSx [ * ] * Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 CTS: Ipos> PSx 001 111 001 115 001 116 001 117 CTS: Ineg/Ipos> PSx 001 102 001 103 001 104 001 105 CTS: Ineg/ Ipos>> PSx 001 122 001 123 001 124 001 125
Ineg/Ipos>>,y
64Z5302 A
3-142
Current evaluation referring to the respective end
3-213
3 Operation
(continued)
CTS: blocked Ipos>,a Ipos>,b Ipos>,c Ipos>,d >2
&
>1 Ineg/Ipos>,a >1 Ineg/Ipos>,b >1 Ineg/Ipos>,c >1 Ineg/Ipos>,d
=(N-1)
Note N = Number of ends : P631, P632: N = 2 (a and b) P633: N = 3 (a ... c) P634: N = 4 (a ... d)
Ineg/Ipos>>,a Ineg/Ipos>>,b Ineg/Ipos>>,c Ineg/Ipos>>,d
=1
&
CTS: End a faulty
&
CTS: End b faulty
&
CTS: End c faulty
&
CTS: End d faulty
64Z5303A
3-143
CTS triggering condition
3-214
3 Operation
(continued)
Signaling and indication
Triggering of the CTS function is signaled by multiple signals as well as by single signals referring to the respective ends. Beside the updated signals latched signals are also available in order to achieve stable signaling behavior and a permanent differential protection characteristic with reduced sensitivity when, for instance, intermittent faults have occurred. The updated signal as well as the stored signal are time-delayed in order to suppress any signaling caused by a transient event. On the other hand, instantaneous signals are used to block or restrain the differential protection functions as fast as possible. As soon as a CTS condition is detected (C T S : I d i f f > ( C T S ) a c t i v e is present), the function will raise the differential protection low set threshold to the D I F F : I d i f f > ( C T S ) setting:
Idiff
Fault current characteristic for single-side infeed
m2
Idiff>(CTS)
1
m1
Idiff>
0 1 2 3
IR,m2
IR
64Z6030A_EN
3-144
Modification of the differential protection triggering characteristic with CTS active
The setting for this value determines the CTS operating mode: Signaling only: D I F F : Id i f f > ( C T S ) PSx = D I F F : I d i f f> P S x . Differential protection remains unrestricted, but there is a risk of unwanted tripping occurring under load current. Restricted operation: DIFF : Idi ff> (CT S) PSx = maximum load current. This will permit the safe differential protection behavior, even during CT failure: there will be no unwanted trip under any load condition, but protection will remain operational for internal faults with currents exceeding the load current). Blocking: D IF F : Id i f f>( C T S) P S x = D IF F : Id if f > > P S x . In practice differential protection is blocked for all currents under normal operating conditions. When one of the C T S : A l a r m e n d y signals is issued, the associated ground differential protection function is then blocked, if it has been set accordingly (R E F _ n : C T S e f f e c t i v e P S x = 'Yes' by assigning REF_n to end y).
3-215
3 Operation
(continued)
Reset
Latched CTS signals can be reset using control parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input as well as by a general reset command.
Multiple signaling from the CTS function
The signals issued by the CTS function (and/or measuring circuit monitoring, see description of MCM_x) are combined into the M A I N : M e a s . c i r c . I f a u l t y signal. A signal is simultaneously issued by the self-monitoring function.
CTS: t(Alarm) PSx [ * ]
t CTS: End a faulty CTS: End b faulty CTS: End c faulty CTS: End d faulty CTS: t(Latch) PSx [ * ] >1
CTS: Operated (updating) [ 036 099 ] MAIN: Meas. circ.I faulty [ 036 155 ] SFMON: Meas. circ.I faulty [ 091 018 ]
0 S R 11 1 >1
CTS: Operated (latched) [ 036 202 ] CTS: Idiff>(CTS) active [ 036 203 ]
CTS: Reset latch . USER [ 036 157 ]
0 1 100 ms 1 >1 1 500 ms CTS: Reset
0: don't execute 1: execute CTS: Reset latching EXT [ 036 158 ] MAIN: General reset [ 003 002 ] 1: execute Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 CTS: t(Alarm) PSx 001 126 001 127 001 128 001 129 CTS: t(Latch) PSx 001 130 001 131 001 132 001 133 64Z5304 B_EN
3-145
CTS overreaching signals
3-216
3 Operation
(continued)
CTS: t(Alarm) PSx [ * ]
t CTS: End y faulty
CTS: Alarm end y (updat.) [ * ] CTS: Meas. c. I faulty, y [ * ]
CTS: t(Latch) PSx [ * ]
0 S 1 1 1 >1 CTS: Alarm end y [ * ] CTS: Alarm end y (latch.) [ * ]
CTS: Reset
End a b c d
CTS : Alarm end y (updat .)
CTS : Alarm end y ( latch .)
036 036 036 036
081 082 083 084
036 036 036 036
204 206 208 210
CTS: Alarm end y 036 205 036 207 036 209 036 211
CTS: Meas. c. I faulty y , 091 026 091 027 091 028 091 029
CTS: t(Alarm) PSx 001 126 001 127 001 128 001 129
CTS: t(Latch) PSx 001 130 001 131 001 132 001 133 64Z5305 B_EN
3-146
CTS signals per end
3-217
3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 to MCM_4) The measuring-circuit monitoring function featured by the P63x will detect faults in the CTs' secondary circuits. Measuring-circuit monitoring functions MCM_1, MCM_2, MCM_3 or MCM_4 are permanently assigned to the transformer ends monitored by the P63x . Function group MCM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the measuring-circuit monitoring functions. The same will apply to function groups MCM_2, MCM_3 and MCM_4. Enabling or disabling measuring-circuit monitoring
The measuring-circuit monitoring function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
3-147
Enabling or disabling measuring-circuit monitoring
3-218
3 Operation
(continued)
Measuring circuit monitoring
The negative- to positive-sequence current ratio is used as a criterion for measuringcircuit monitoring. The measuring-circuit monitoring function is triggered when the set ratio value, Ineg / Ipos, is exceeded and either the negative- or the positive-sequence current exceeds 0.02 Inom. After the set operate time-delay has elapsed, a warning is issued.
As of version 606, the previously available measuring-circuit monitoring functions which were based on the phase currents per end, have been enhanced and can now be used to detect broken conductors on the CTs' primary sides. The functions can now be blocked individually via input signals set at MCM_x: Blocking EXT. When the triggering condition is met an instantaneous starting signal is raised: (MCM_x: Starting). The enhanced function is displayed, as an example, by function group MCM_1 in the logic diagram below.
MCM_1: Blocking EXT [ 036 213 ] MCM_1: Enabled [ 036 194 ] MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049
IA,a IB,a IC,a
Ineg
> 0.02 Inom
>1
Ipos
> 0.02 Inom
MCM_1: Ineg/Ipos> c PSx [ * ]
MCM_1: Operate c delay PSx [ * ]
5s Ineg/Ipos
MCM_1: Meas. circ. I faulty [ 036 198 ] SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a [ 091 026 ]
MCM_1: Ineg/ Ipos> PSx 081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042
MCM_1: Operate delay PSx 081 046 082 046 083 046 084 046
MCM_1: Starting [ 036 212 ] 64Z5187 B_EN
3-148
Measuring-circuit monitoring for end a
3-219
3 Operation
(continued)
Multiple signaling from the measuring circuit monitoring function
The signals issued by the measuring circuit monitoring function (and/or current transformer supervision, see description of CTS) are grouped to form the M A I N : M e a s . c i r c . I f a u l t y multiple signal. A signal is simultaneously issued by the self-monitoring function.
3-149
Signals issued by the measuring circuit monitoring function
3-220
3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) The limit value monitoring function (LIMIT) monitors measured values which have been obtained from the analog measured data inputs. Enabling/disabling the Limit Value Monitoring function
The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.
Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below the thresholds then a signal is issued after the associated time-delay has elapsed.
3-221
3 Operation
(continued)
3-150
Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
3-222
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the measured temperature value
The temperature that is measured by the P63x using a resistance thermometer is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time-delay has elapsed.
3-151
Monitoring the measured temperature value
3-223
3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Limit Value Monitoring of Phase Currents (Function Groups LIM_1 to LIM_3) Each of the limit value monitoring functions, LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3, is designed for the monitoring of the minimum and maximum phase currents for a user-selected transformer end. Enabling or disabling limit value monitoring
Limit value monitoring functions LIM_n can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Monitoring minimum and maximum phase currents
In the P631 and P632, two limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1 and LIM_2) are implemented and can be assigned to both transformer ends. In the P633 and the P634, three limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3) are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two user-selected transformer ends. For each limit value monitoring function, a setting parameter is provided for this assignment by the user. The function will then monitor the minimum and maximum phase currents for the selection. If a maximum phase current exceeds the relevant set threshold or if a minimum phase current falls below the relevant set threshold, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed. Function group LIM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the limit value monitoring functions in the following figures.
3-224
3 Operation
(continued)
3-152
Selection of measured values (Selection of end d applies to the P634 only, selection of end c and of 'Current summation' applies to the P633 and P634 only)
3-225
3 Operation
(continued)
3-153
Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
3-226
3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC) Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within a framework of Boolean equations. Binary signals in the P63x may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations with the option of additional NOT operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . A s s i g n m . O u t p . n , where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR. A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to the signals generated by the P63x, initial conditions for governing the equations can be set via setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces. Depending on the device type the P63x provides up to 40 binary signal inputs. As of version P63x -602 the respective number of binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t 1 E X T to L O G I C : I n p u t 4 0 E X T are provided in order to be able to process these binary input signals. Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways. The binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 40) have an updating function, whereas the input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are latched. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for L O G I C : S e t n E X T if the corresponding reset input L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T ) has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is configured, then this is interpreted as Logic externally set. If the input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of 1 ), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
3-227
3 Operation
(continued)
3-154
Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a triggering function that causes a 100 ms pulse to be issued.
3-228
3 Operation
(continued)
LOGIC: General enable USER [ 031 099 ]
LOGIC: Enabled [ 034 046 ]
0: no 1: yes MAIN: Protection active

306 001
LOGIC: Fct. assignm outp. 1 . [ 030 000 ]
Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC: Input 1 EXT [ 034 000 ]
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 [ 030 001 ]
LOGIC: Input 40 EXT [ 034 109 ]
LOGIC: 1 has been set [ 034 067 ]
LOGIC: 8 has been set [ 034 074 ]
0: Without timer stage 1: Oper./ releas.delay
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 [ 030 002 ] LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 [ 030 003 ]
LOGIC: 1 set externally [ 034 075 ]
2: Oper.del./ puls.dur. 3: Op./ rel.delay,retrig
LOGIC: 8 set externally [ 034 082 ]
4: Op.del./ puls.dur.,rt 5: Minimum time
LOGIC: Output 1(t) [ 042 033 ]
LOGIC: Set 1 USER [ 034 030 ]
LOGIC: Set 8 USER [ 034 037 ] LOGIC: Trigger 1 [ 034 038 ]
LOGIC: Output 1 [ 042 032 ] 0: don't execute 1: execute
LOGIC: Trigger 8 [ 034 045 ]
0: don't execute 1: execute 64Z60CDA_EN
3-155
Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
3-229
3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order equation as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation. It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the equation with the highest order. The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This makes it possible to assign a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In the 'Minimum time' operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures 3156 to 3-160 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating modes. Note: If the device is switched to "offline" the equations are not processed and all outputs are set to a logic value of ' 0 '.
3-156
Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay
3-230
3 Operation
(continued)
3-157
Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup
3-158
Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable
3-231
3 Operation
(continued)
3-159
Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable
3-160
Operating mode 5: Minimum time
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were triggered.
3-232
3 Operation
(continued)
3-161
Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
3-233
3 Operation
(continued)
3-234
4 Design
Design
The P63x is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of modules. The P63x like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 range is equipped with the standard local control panel (LOC). The local control panel is covered with a tough film so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 17 LED indicators is also incorporated into the local control panel. The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip. The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at the bottom of the local control panel. 4.1 Designs
The P63x is available in the following case widths: P631 and P632 in 40TE case P633 in 40TE or 84TE case P634 in 84TE case The P63x is available in the following case designs: Surface-Mounted Case Flush Mounted Case Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1, ) and removing the local control panel. The local control panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall (see Figure 4-1, ). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of the case.
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control panel by inserting it in the slots provided on the left.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation. The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
4-1
4 Design
(continued)
4-1
Surface-mounted case, removal of front panel HMI
4-2
4 Design
(continued)
4-2
Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted 40TE case
4-3
4 Design
(continued)
62Y5001A_Xa_EN
4-3
Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted 84TE case
4-4
4 Design
(continued)
4-4
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 40TE case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame) As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on the next page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
4-5
4 Design
(continued)
4-5
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 40TE case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) As of May 2005, the P63x has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
4-6
4 Design
(continued)
4-6
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 84TE case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame) As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on the next page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
4-7
4 Design
(continued)
62Y5103B_Xa_EN
4-7
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 84TE case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) As of May 2005, the P63x has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
4-8
4 Design
(continued)
4.2
Modules
The P63x is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P63x. (*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, : optional, : standard equipment, : depending on order).
Index Description Width 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 8T 8T 8T 8T 8T 8T 8T 8T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 40TE only 84TE only P631 P632 P634 P634
A A A A A A A
0336 426 9650 107 0336 428 9650 356 9650 354 9650 355 9650 353
J ff
A A A A A A A D C D C B B C B A A A A A A A A A A A A
ff
G ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
(For glass fiber, ST connector) Communication module 1 (For plastic fiber) Communication module 2
Communication module 1 (for wire connection) Communication module 1
Communication module 2 (for wire connection) (For glass fiber, ST connector) Communication module 2 (For plastic fiber) Communication module2 (IRIG-B only) Ethernet module (For 10 MHz Ethernet, glass fiber, ST connector and RJ45 wire) Ethernet module (For 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fiber, SC connector and RJ45 wire)
X 9651 426 X 9651 427
B B B
0336 187 0336 188 0337 870
ff * Bus module (digital) ff * Bus module (digital) ff * Bus module (analog) ff * Local control module (Western European) ff * Local control module (Cyrillic) ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff Processor module, 25 MHz Processor module, 33 MHz Processor module, DSP Transformer module 6 x I (pin connection) Transformer module 4 x I, 1 x V (pin connection) Transformer module 3 x I (pin connection) Transformer module 4 x I (pin connection) Transformer module 6 x I (ring connection) Transformer module 4 x I, 1 x V (ring connection) Transformer module 3 x I (ring connection) Transformer module 4 x I (ring connection) Power supply module 24 V DC Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) Power supply module 24 V DC, switching threshold 73 V Power supply module 24 V DC, switching threshold 90 V Power supply module 24 V DC, switching threshold 146 V Power supply module 24 V DC, switching threshold 155 V
L 9650 194 L 9650 443 P 0337 875 P 9650 135 P 9651 428 T 9650 310 T 9650 311 T 9650 312 T 9650 328 T 9650 324 T 9650 325 T 9650 326 T 9650 329 V 0337 437 V 9651 300 V 9651 328 V 9651 439 V 9651 356
E ff ff ff ff ff
1 2
Required for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, without IRIG-B Required for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, or DNP 3.0 protocols, with IRIG-B 4-9
4 Design
(continued)
Index Description V 0337 191 V 9651 301 V 9651 329 V 9651 437 V 9651 357 X 0337 971 X 9651 306 X 9651 334 X 9651 445 X 9651 362 X 0336 973 X 9650 341 X 0337 612 X 9651 304 X 9651 332 X 9651 443 X 9651 360 Y 0337 406 Y 9651 307 Y 9651 335 Y 9651 446 Y 9651 363 M ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, switching threshold 73 V Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, switching threshold 90 V Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, switching threshold 146 V Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, switching threshold 155 V Binary I/O module (8 binary inputs & 6 output relays), Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) Binary I/O module (8 binary inputs & 6 output relays), switching threshold 73 V Binary I/O module (8 binary inputs & 6 output relays), switching threshold 90 V Binary I/O module (8 binary inputs & 6 output relays), switching threshold 146 V Binary I/O module (8 binary inputs & 6 output relays), switching threshold 155 V Binary module (6 output relays) Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), switching threshold 73 V Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), switching threshold 90 V Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), switching threshold 146 V Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), switching threshold 155 V Analog I/O module, Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) Analog I/O module, switching threshold 73 V Analog I/O module, switching threshold 90 V Analog I/O module, switching threshold 146 V Analog I/O module, switching threshold 155 V
Width 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T
P631 P632
P634
P634
A A A A D A A A A B B A A A A A D A A A A
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Binary module (6 output relays, 4 of these with triacs) 4T
84TE only 84TE only 84TE only 84TE only 84TE only
The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 40TE in width (H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal blocks in the P63x are shown in figures 4-8 to 4-17.
4-10
4 Design
(continued)
4-8
Location diagram for P631 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown Figure 4-17.
4-11
4 Design
(continued)
4-9
Location diagram for P631 in 40TE case, ring-terminal connection The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown Figure 4-17.
4-12
4 Design
(continued)
4-10 Location diagram for P632 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown Figure 4-17.
4-13
4 Design
(continued)
4-11 Location diagram for P632 in 84TE case, ring-terminal connection The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown Figure 4-17.
4-14
4 Design
(continued)
4-15
4 Design
(continued)
4-16
4 Design
(continued)
4-17
4 Design
(continued)
4-18
4 Design
(continued)
4-19
4 Design
(continued)
01
02
-X7 * A * 01
Type
-X12 02 : Alternative module (see order information) Type Designation
-X13 *
-X8 *
-X10
Slot
Item
Communication module
02
-U17; -U18; -U20; -U25; -U26
Px3x_Ethernet_01A_EN
4-17 Location diagram for Ethernet board valid for: 40TE 40TE 84TE 84TE case, case, case, case, pin terminal connection, ring terminal connection, pin terminal connection, ring terminal connection
4-20
5 Installation and Connection
Installation and Connection
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this manual, may work on or operate this device.
The instructions given in the Protective and Operational Grounding section should be noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per the diagram Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal. If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective grounding should be checked again.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.) 5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P63x units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices, and do not use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton. The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped can be determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of components should be filed in carefully. After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper mechanical condition. If the P63x needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height 0.8 m. 5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The nominal data and design type of the P63x can be determined by checking the type identification label (see Figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the side of the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the P63x packaging.
5-1

(continued)
P63x
P634-XXXXXXX-304-403-610-801 Inom = 1 / 5 A IN,nom = 1 / 5 A IEP,nom = A
Diagram
P634.403 fnom = 50/60 Hz
xx.yy
Unom / NE,nom = 50 ... 130 V UH,nom =
UN,nom = 24 Specification EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6
... 250 V DC
F 6.xxxxxx.y
CE
5-1
P63x type identification label; illustrated for the example of a P634 with order number P634-XXXXXXX-304-403-610-801
The P63x design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual and in the supporting documents supplied with the unit. 5.3 Location Requirements
The P63x has been designed to conform to DIN 57 435 part 303. Therefore it is important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several of these important operating conditions are listed below. Environmental Conditions Ambient temperature: Air pressure: Relative humidity: Ambient air: Solar radiation: Mechanical conditions -5 C to +55 C [+23 F to +131 F] 800 to 1100 hPa The relative humidity must not result in the formation of either condensed water or ice in the P63x. The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust, smoke, gases or vapors, or salt content. Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable. 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g (see section "Mechanical Robustness" in Chapter 2) 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle
Vibration stress:
or
Earthquake resistance: Electrical conditions for auxiliary voltage of the power supply
Operating range:
0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Electromagnetic conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices, especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
5-2

(continued)
5.4
Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in Chapter 4. When the P63x is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring to the P63x is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case. Figures 5-2 and 5-3 show such an opening below the surface-mounted case.
5-2
Opening for running the wiring to the surface-mounted 40TE case
(dimensions in mm)
5-3

(continued)
5-3
Opening for running the wiring to the surface-mounted 84TE case
(dimensions in mm)
5-4

(continued)
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P63x is mounted on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51). Figures 5-4 to 5-6 show the required panel cutouts for flushmounted cases of different case widths. Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method: As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness if either the surfacemounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity class of the shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of the shock resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
5-4
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 40TE case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame) As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
5-5

(continued)
5-5
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 40TE case, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm) As of May 2005, the P63x has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
5-6

(continued)
5-6
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 84TE case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame) As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
5-7

(continued)
5-7
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 84TE case, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm) As of May 2005, the P63x has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as follows: Before the P63x can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel must be removed. The local control panel is removed as described below: Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower both hinged flaps 180up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.) Remove the M3 screws (see Figure 5-8). Then remove the local control panel.
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the connecting cable.
5-8

(continued)
Then remove the lower M4 screws and loosen the upper M4 screws (see Figure 5-8). Now insert the P63x into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel. Note: If the control panel thickness is 2 mm, the longer M3 and M4 bolts must be used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
5-8
Installation of a 40TE case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ). Example for a device with a 40TE case. As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on the next page) is used for the flush-mounted cases. Connection of protective grounding conductor: see figure 5-13
5-9

(continued)
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as follows: Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-9, brackets using these same screws. and mount the enclosed angle
Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front. Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws (see Figure 5-10). Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
5-9
Mounting the angle brackets
5-10

(continued)
5-10
Installation of a 40TE case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). As of May 2005, the P63x has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases. Connection of protective grounding conductor: see figure 5-13
5-11

(continued)
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine the 40TE case with a second sub-rack to form a 19" mounting rack (see Figure 5-11). The extra sub-rack can be another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a blank front panel. Fit the 19" mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Figure P63x.
5-11
Combining flush-mounted 40TE cases to form a 19" mounting rack Connection of protective grounding conductor: see figure 5-13
5-12

(continued)
5-12
Fitting a 19" mounting rack Connection of protective grounding conductor: see figure 5-13
5-13

(continued)
5.5
Protective and Operational Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required. In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm2 is required. The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as short as possible.
19Y5220A_EN
5-13
Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal. The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
5-14

(continued)
5.6
Connection
The P63x must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included in the supporting documents supplied with the device. The terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P63x are also to be found in the Appendix to this operating manual. In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm are sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P63x. To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on the P63x. Copper conductors with a cross section of 1.5 mm2 are adequate to connect the binary signal inputs, the signaling and tripping circuits and the power supply input. All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. 5.6.1 Power supply Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P63x power supply, it must be ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage. When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
Current-measuring inputs
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation. The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
Connecting the measuring circuits
The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-14 . It is essential that the grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be taken into account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
5-15

(continued)
5-14
Standard schematic connection diagram for the P63x

5-16

(continued)
Connecting a resistance thermometer
A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y. This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Figure 5-15). No supply conductor compensation is required in this case.
5-15
Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal connection diagrams. This is to be understood as a recommendation only. Connection to binary inputs can be made as desired.
5-17

(continued)
5.6.2
Connecting the IRIG-B Interface
An IRIG-B interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of 50 must be used as the connecting cable. 5.6.3 PC interface Connecting the Serial Interfaces
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal computer (PC).
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Communication interface
The communication interface is provided as a permanent connection of the device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type, communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Communication interface 2 is only available as a RS 485 interface. The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage for the device is shut off.
5-18

(continued)
An RS485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices can be established by using the optional communication interface. The communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices linked to the communication master, e.g. P63x, are set-up as slave devices. The RS 485 interface available on the P63x was designed so that data transfer in a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS485 communication interface the following must be observed: Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in telecommunication installations. At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary. Strip cable cores and cable shield right at the connection point and connect properly in accordance with specifications. All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at both ends. Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end. A 4-wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also possible. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire data link. A 2-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-16, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-17 as an example for channel 2 on the communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on the communication module is available as a RS 485 interface. 2-wire data link: The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P63x. The two devices situated at either far end must have a 200 to 220 resistor installed to terminate the data transmission conductor. In most Schneider Electric MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P63x, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. 4-wire data link: Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an electrically full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system, e.g. the P63x, are connected to the transmitter of the communication master device, and the transmitters of slave devices are connected to the receiver of the master device. Devices equipped electrically with only a half duplex RS485 communication interface are connected to the transmitter of the communication master device. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with a 200 to 220 resistor each. In most Schneider Electric MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P63x, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor order number see Chapter 13).
5-19

(continued)
P63x First participant connected to the line (e.g. the master ) Last participant connected to the line
P63x Device with half -duplex interface 64Z608 0A_EN
5-16
2-wire data link
5-20

(continued)
P63x First participant connected to the line (e.g. the master ) Last participant connected to the line
P63x Device with half -duplex interface 64Z6081 A_EN
5-17
4-wire data link
5-21
5-22
6 Local Control Panel
6 Local control panel
Local Control Panel
All data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control panel, and the data important for system management is read out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control panel: Readout and modification of settings Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the power system Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and commissioning Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and a specific operating program.
6-1

(continued)
6.1 Control and display elements
Display and Keypad
The local control panel consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric characters, seven function keys positioned below the display, and 17 LED indicators.
TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY EDIT MODE
= CLEAR = REAS = ENTR
C
G
6-1
View of the local control panel
6-2

(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels. At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured values, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either the panel . level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the "READ" key
Measured Value Panels

Voltage A-B prim. 20.7 kV Voltage B-C prim. 20.6 kV
Recordings
Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. data record.
Parameters
Operation
Events
Device ID Configuration parameters Function parameters
Cyclic measurements Control and testing Operating data recording
Event counters Measured fault data Event recordings
6-2
Global General functions Parameter subset 1 Parameter subset ...
Measured operating data Physical state signals Logic state signals
Menu tree
Display panels and menu tree
6-3

(continued)
Display panels
The P63x can display 'Measured Value Panels' which are selected automatically by the device according to system conditions. Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Operation Panel is always provided.
Menu tree and data points
All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LC-Display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user. The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form, as selected by the user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line below. List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points generally have more than one associated value element. This category includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is selected, the symbol is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating that a sublevel is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data point are found at this sub-level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value elements are linked by operators such as OR.
List data points
6-4

(continued)
Short description of keys Up and Down Keys / Panel Level: The up/down keys switch between the pages of the Measured Value Panel. Menu Tree Level: Press the up and down keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the up and down keys have a different function. Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the up and down keys in this mode to change the setting value. (Up key: The next higher value is selected. Down key: The next lower value is selected.) With list parameters, the linking operator for the value element is changed by pressing the up and down keys.
G
/ Left and Right Keys Menu Tree Level: Press the left and right keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the left and right keys have a different function. Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the left and right keys are pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the right or left. (Left key: The cursor moves to the next digit on the left. Right key: The cursor moves to the next digit on the right.) In the case of a list parameter, the user can navigate through the list of items available for selection by pressing the left and right keys.
ENTER Key Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree. Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active. CLEAR Key C Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action. Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input mode is exited.
G
6-5

(continued)
READ Key Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level or from any other point in the menu tree. The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can be changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right of the enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is illuminated. The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved. 6.2 Changing between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed. Control Step / Description Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level Control Action Display
0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can

jump to the Panel Level from any position within the menu tree. while pressing the CLEAR key.
G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Device on-line No (=off)
1 First press the up key and hold it down

Note: It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of stored data. Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level
Voltage C-A prim. 20.8 kV Current A prim. 415 A
0 Example of a Measured Value Panel. 1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel
Level to the Menu Tree Level.
G

XX YYY
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: 'Par/Conf/LOC'), the display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been configured.
6-6

(continued)
6.3
Display Illumination
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set "hold" time has elapsed (Backlight time setting in the menu tree at Par/Conf/LOC). Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using a binary input. If continuous display illumination is required, the function return time illumination is set to blocked. 6.4 Control at Panel Level
The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel, and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the section entitled Setting a List Parameter for instructions regarding selection. If the M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n setting has been selected for a given panel, then that panel is disabled. The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key, for example. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
Voltage A-B prim. 20.7 kV Voltage B-C prim. 20.6 kV
G
0 Up to six selected measured values can be

displayed simultaneously on the Panel.
1 If more than two measured values have
been selected, they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the up or down keys. The device will also show the next page of the Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time for Panels (setting in menu tree: 'Par/Conf/LOC') has elapsed.
or
6-7

(continued)
6.5 6.5.1 Folders and function groups
Control at the Menu Tree Level Navigation in the Menu Tree
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements. At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders Parameters, Operation and Events, which form the first folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder levels. At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit type
Folder level 1
PX yyy Parameters
PX yyy Operation
PX yyy Events
Folder level 2
Oper/ Cyclic measurements
Folder level 3
Oper/Cycl/ Meas. operating data
Function groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/ MAIN
Data points
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN Date 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-3
Basic menu tree structure
6-8

(continued)
6.5.2
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in plain text mode only. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 In this example, the user switches from plain

text mode to address mode.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Device on-line No (=off)
1 To switch from address mode to plain text
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or either the left key or the right key simultaneously. This can be done at any point C + in the menu tree.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN 003.030 0
6-9 9

(continued)
6.5.3
Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings. There are two ways to enter the input mode. Global change-enabling function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the Param. change enabl. parameter to Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC). The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all further changes with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the section entitled Password-Protected Control Actions) are enabled without entering the password.
Selective change-enabling function
Password input prior to any setting change. This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
the Param. change enabl. parameter.
0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC, select
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No
Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display.
1 Press the ENTER key.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No ******** Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No *
left
6-10
down. The display will change as shown in the column on the right.
up
right
2 Press the following keys in sequence:
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No *


(continued)
Control Step / Description Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the up or down keys. If an invalid password has been entered, the display shown in Step 1 appears.
Control Action
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No
The LED indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for further setting changes.
4 Press the ENTER key again.
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been activated.
3 Change the setting to Yes.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. Yes
6-11 11

(continued)
Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu tree Par/Conf/LOC) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically disabled, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed. The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing the up key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key. Note: It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid unintentional deletion of stored data.
Forced return
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection enabled'). Such settings include the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The following entries in the "Change" column of the address list indicate whether values can be changed or not: "on": The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled. "off": The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled. "-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed. The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
6-12

(continued)
6.5.4
Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can be entered. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 Example of a display.
In this example, the change-enabling function is activated and the protective function is disabled, if necessary. keys.
G G
1 Select the desired setting by pressing the
Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 50000 s
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit of the value is highlighted by a cursor (underlined). cursor to the left or right.
G G
3 Press the left or right keys to move the
by pressing the up and down keys. In the meantime the device will continue to operate with the old value.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device will now operate with the new value. Press the keys to select another setting for a value change. you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and the device will continue to operate with the old value. A further setting can be selected for a value change by pressing the keys.
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor
6-13 13

(continued)
6.5.5
Setting a List Parameter
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number m that can be selected out of the total number n of the set is given in the address list in the Remarks column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an OR operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an illustration. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN in the menu tree). The down arrow ( ) indicates that a list setting has been selected. The first function and the first selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol #01 in the display indicates the first item of the selection. If 'MAIN: Without function appears for the first item, then this means that no function assignment has been made yet.
G G
0 Select a list setting (in this example, the
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd.
1 Press the down key.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #01 DIST Trip zone 1
Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown on the right will appear.
list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the
pressing the right and left keys in the input mode.
up and down keys. In this particular case, only the OR operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the selection of classes. 6-14
5 Select the operator or the class using the
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing the right and left keys.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 2 Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #05 MAIN ????? Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #02 DIST Trip zone 2 Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #02 DIST Trip zone 4 Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 4

(continued)
Control Step / Description
Control Action
G
Display
The LED indicator will go out. The assignment has been made. The unit will now operate with the new settings. If no operator has been selected, the OR operator is always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes. in the list.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 4
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. Deleting a list setting
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while
If MAIN: Without function is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted. 6.5.6 Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible. The following memories are available: In the menu tree Oper/Rec/OP_RC: Operating data memory In the menu tree Oper/Rec/MT_RC: Monitoring signal memory Event memories In the menu tree Events/Rec/FT_RC: Fault memories 1 to 8 In the menu tree Events/Rec/OL_RC: Overload memories 1 to 8 In the menu tree Events/Rec/GF_RC: Ground fault memories 1 to 8 Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
7 Press the up key to exit the list at any point
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 2
6-15 15

(continued)
Readout of the operating data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
memory.
0 Select the entry point for the operating data
Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. data record.
data memory. The latest entry is displayed.
entries one after the other in chronological order. Once the end of the operating data memory has been reached, pressing the left key again will have no effect. entry.
operating data memory to return to the entry point.
6-16
4 Press the up key at any point within the
3 Press the right key to display the previous
2 Press the left key repeatedly to display the
1 Press the down key to enter the operating
Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 11:33 ARC Enabled USER No Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 10:01 PSIG Enabled USER Yes
Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 11:33 ARC Enabled USER No Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. data record.

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible. After that an overflow signal is issued. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
signal memory.
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring
Oper/Rec/MT_RC Mon. signal record.
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
the entries one after the other in chronological order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last reset, the overflow signal is displayed as the last entry. entry.
monitoring signal is being displayed, the following additional information will be displayed:
G G
4 If the down key is held down while a
First: Time when the signal first occurred Currently: The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring function. Reset: The fault was no longer detected by the self-monitoring function and has been reset (Yes). Number: The signal occurred x times. monitoring signal memory to return to the entry point.
3 Press the left key to display the previous
2 Press the right key repeatedly to display
1 Press the down key to enter the monitoring
Mon. signal record. 01.01.97 13:33 SFMON Checksum error param
Mon. signal record. 01.01.97 10:01 SFMON Exception oper. syst.
First: 13:33:59.744 Active: Yes Reset: No Number: 5
Oper/Rec/MT_RC Mon. signal record.
6-17 17

(continued)
Readout of the event memories (records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth. Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
memory, for example. If the memory contains entries, the third line of the display will show the date and time the fault began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries in the fault memory. memory. First, the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last reset. the measured fault data and then the binary signals in chronological order. The time shown in the second line is the time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which the value was measured or the binary signal started or ended. Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the right key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the right key again will have no effect.
G G
0 Select the entry point for the first fault
Events/Rec/FT_RC Fault recording 1 01.01.99 10:00:33
1 Press the down key to enter the fault
Fault recording 1 FT_RC Event 22
measured value or the previous signal.
fault memory to return to the entry point.
6-18
3 Press the left key to see the previous
G G G
2 Press the right key repeatedly to see first
Fault recording 1 200 ms FT_DA Running time 0.17 s
Fault recording 1 0 ms FT_RC Record. in progress Start
Fault recording 1 241 ms FT_RC Record. in progress End Fault recording 1 0 ms FT_RC Record. in progress Start
Events/Rec/FT_RC Fault recording 1 01.01.99 10:00:33

(continued)
6.5.7
Resetting
All information memories including the event memories and the monitoring signal memory as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected so that they always indicate the latest fault. The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably prevented. Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be the case after injection testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting. The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example. In this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
Line 3 of the display shows the number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this example. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
0 Select the reset setting.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Don't execute

G
setting to Execute.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in line 3 is reset to 0.
2 Press the up or down keys to change the
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Execute Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 0
recordings after leaving the standard control mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out, and the fault recordings remain stored in the device unchanged. Any setting can be selected again for a value change by pressing the keys.
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10
6-19 19

(continued)
6.5.8
Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local control panel (such as a manual trip command for testing purposes) can only be carried out by entering a password. This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
select the parameter Man. trip cmd. USER.
0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN,
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute ******** Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute *
left
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the up or down keys.
G
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The unit will execute the command.
3 Change the setting to Execute.
6-20
down. The display will change as shown in the column on the right.
up
right
2 Press the following keys in sequence:
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute * Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute * Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd USER Don't execute * Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Execute

(continued)
Control Action
C
Display
MODE is on, the control action can be terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. 6.5.9 Changing the Password
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within a specific time interval. The left, right, up and down keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
3
G
6-21 21

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set password. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
Password setting.
0 In the menu tree Par/Conf/LOC, select the
Par/Conf/LOC Password ********
Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** ********
to enter the valid password. The display will change as shown in the column on the right.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The third line shows an underscore character ( _ ) as the prompt for entering a new password. example is done by pressing the UP key followed by the DOWN key.
G G
3 Now press the ENTER key.
4 Enter the new password, which in this
Asterisks appear in the third line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user to enter the new password again.
6-22
G G G G G
2 Press the left, right, up and down keys
Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** *
Par/Conf/LOC Password _
Par/Conf/LOC Password *
Par/Conf/LOC Password **
Par/Conf/LOC Password ** _

(continued)
Control Action
G
Display
6 Re-enter the password.
Par/Conf/LOC Password ** *
If the password has been re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on the right. The new Password L/R is now valid.
7a Press the ENTER key again.
7b If the password has been re-entered
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the display shown on the right appears. The password has to be reentered. It is also possible to cancel the change of the Password L/R by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step 8).
C
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is done, the original Password L/R continues to be valid.
8 The change in password can be canceled at
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6 without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled Change-Enabling Function).
Par/Conf/LOC Password ** **
Par/Conf/LOC Password ** _
6-23 23

(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 Turn off the device.
3 After the four keys are released, startup will continue.
6-24
2 When this condition is detected during startup, the password is displayed.
1 Turn the device on again. At the very beginning of device startup, press the four directional keys (left, right, up and down) at the same time and hold them down.
TEST
Password 1234
TEST
7 Settings
7 7.1
Settings Parameters
The P63x must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located in the folder titled Parameters in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree. The default settings are activated after a cold restart. The P63x is blocked in that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart. Note: In the following tables (except for function group DVICE) an indication for the localization of the corresponding function description is shown in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
7-1
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.1
Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the design version of the P63x. They have no effect on the device functions. These settings should only be changed if the design version of the P63x is modified. Device DVICE: Device type The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: Software version Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: SW date Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.
000 000
002 120
002 122
002 103 DVICE: SW version communic. Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot be altered. 002 059 DVICE: DM IEC 61850 version Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered. 002 123 DVICE: Language version Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display cannot be altered. 002 121 DVICE: Text vers.data model Using the text replacement tool provided by the support software, the user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier 0 (factory-set default). 002 124 DVICE: F number The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: Order No. Order number of the device. The user cannot alter this number. DVICE: PCS Order No. Order numbers (Cortec) per PCS standard.
000 001
001 200
7-2
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 DVICE: Order ext. No. 2 DVICE: Order ext. No. 3 DVICE: Order ext. No. 4 DVICE: Order ext. No. 5 DVICE: Order ext. No. 6 DVICE: Order ext. No. 7 DVICE: Order ext. No. 8 DVICE: Order ext. No. 9 DVICE: Order ext. No. 10 DVICE: Order ext. No. 11 DVICE: Order ext. No. 12 DVICE: Order ext. No. 13 DVICE: Order ext. No. 14 DVICE: Order ext. No. 15 DVICE: Order ext. No. 16 DVICE: Order ext. No. 17 DVICE: Order ext. No. 18 DVICE: Order ext. No. 19 DVICE: Order ext. No. 20 DVICE: Order ext. No. 21 DVICE: Order ext. No. 22 DVICE: Order ext. No. 23 DVICE: Order ext. No. 24 DVICE: Order ext. No. 25 DVICE: Order ext. No. 26 DVICE: Order ext. No. 27 Order extension numbers for the device.
000 003 000 004 000 005 000 006 000 007 000 008 000 009 000 010 000 011 000 012 000 013 000 014 000 015 000 016 000 017 000 018 000 019 000 020 000 021 000 022 000 023 000 024 000 025 000 026 000 027 000 028 000 029
086 050 DVICE: Module var. slot 1 086 051 DVICE: Module var. slot 2 086 052 DVICE: Module var. slot 3 086 053 DVICE: Module var. slot 4 086 054 DVICE: Module var. slot 5 086 055 DVICE: Module var. slot 6 086 056 DVICE: Module var. slot 7 086 057 DVICE: Module var. slot 8 086 058 DVICE: Module var. slot 9 086 059 DVICE: Module var. slot 10 086 060 DVICE: Module var. slot 11 086 061 DVICE: Module var. slot 12 086 062 DVICE: Module var. slot 13 086 063 DVICE: Module var. slot 14 086 064 DVICE: Module var. slot 15 086 065 DVICE: Module var. slot 16 086 066 DVICE: Module var. slot 17 086 067 DVICE: Module var. slot 18 086 068 DVICE: Module var. slot 19 086 069 DVICE: Module var. slot 20 086 070 DVICE: Module var. slot 21 Item number of the module fitted to the respective slot. The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
7-3
7 Settings
(continued)
086 193 DVICE: Module vers. slot 1 086 194 DVICE: Module vers. slot 2 086 195 DVICE: Module vers. slot 3 086 196 DVICE: Module vers. slot 4 086 197 DVICE: Module vers. slot 5 086 198 DVICE: Module vers. slot 6 086 199 DVICE: Module vers. slot 7 086 200 DVICE: Module vers. slot 8 086 201 DVICE: Module vers. slot 9 086 202 DVICE: Module vers. slot 10 086 203 DVICE: Module vers. slot 11 086 204 DVICE: Module vers. slot 12 086 205 DVICE: Module vers. slot 13 086 206 DVICE: Module vers. slot 14 086 207 DVICE: Module vers. slot 15 086 208 DVICE: Module vers. slot 16 086 209 DVICE: Module vers. slot 17 086 210 DVICE: Module vers. slot 18 086 211 DVICE: Module vers. slot 19 086 212 DVICE: Module vers. slot 20 086 213 DVICE: Module vers. slot 21 Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted to the respective slot.
DVICE: Variant of module A Item number of module A in this design version. DVICE: Version of module A Index letter specifying the version of module A. DVICE: MAC address module A MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read. DVICE: Variant of module L Item number of module L in this design version. DVICE: Version of module L Index letter specifying the version of module L. DVICE: Variant of module B Item number of module B in this design version. DVICE: Version of module B Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B. DVICE: Variant module B (a) Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version. DVICE: Version module B (a) Index letter specifying the version of the analog bus module B.
086 047
086 190
104 061
086 048
086 191
086 049
086 192
086 046
086 189
7-4
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Customer ID data 1 DVICE: Customer ID data 2 DVICE: Customer ID data 3 DVICE: Customer ID data 4 DVICE: Customer ID data 5 DVICE: Customer ID data 6 DVICE: Customer ID data 7 DVICE: Customer ID data 8 Set your numerically-coded user data here for your records. DVICE: Location Reference input for the devices location as selected by user. DVICE: Device ID ID code used by the support software for identification purposes. See description of the relevant support software for more detailed setting instructions. DVICE: Substation ID ID code used by the support software for identification purposes. See description of the relevant support software for more detailed setting instructions. DVICE: Feeder ID ID code used by the support software for identification purposes. See description of the relevant support software for more detailed setting instructions. DVICE: Device password 1 DVICE: Device password 2 ID code used by the support software for identification purposes. See description of the relevant support software for more detailed setting instructions.
000 040 000 041 000 042 000 043 000 044 000 045 000 046 000 047
001 201
000 035
000 036
000 037
000 048 000 049
7-5
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2 Local control panel
Configuration Parameters
003 020
LOC: Language Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.
003 021 LOC: Decimal delimiter Character to be used as decimal separator on the local control panel. 003 035 LOC: Password The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is given in Chapter 6. 080 110 LOC: Assignment read key Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is pressed. 053 007 Fig. 3-2 LOC: Fct. Operation Panel Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also referred to as the Operation Panel.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
053 005
Fig. 3-4
053 003 Fig. 3-3 LOC: Fct. Fault Panel Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel. 031 075 Fig: 3-2,3-3 LOC: Hold-time for Panels Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before the unit switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can be shown on the LC-Display. 003 014 Fig. 3-2 LOC: Autom. return time If the user does not press a key on the local control panel within this set time, the change-enabling function is disabled and the Operation Panel is called up provided that values have been assigned to the Operation Panel and that there is no event. 003 023 LOC: Return time illumin. If the user does not press a key on the local control panel within this set time, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
PC link
PC: Name of manufacturer Setting for the manufacturer's name. Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
003 183
Fig. 3-5
003 068 Fig. 3-5 PC: Bay address 003 069 Fig. 3-5 PC: Device address Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
PC: Baud rate Baud rate of the PC interface.
003 081
Fig. 3-5
7-6
7 Settings
(continued)
003 181 Fig. 3-5 PC: Parity bit Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P63x. 003 187 Fig. 3-5 PC: Spontan. sig. enable Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface. 003 189 Fig. 3-5 PC: Select. spontan.sig. Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface. 003 084 Fig. 3-5 PC: Transm.enab.cycl.dat Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. data ILS tel. Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the PC interface.
003 185
Fig. 3-5
003 055 Fig. 3-5 PC: Delta V A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. 003 056 Fig. 3-5 PC: Delta I A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. 003 057 Fig. 3-5 PC: Delta f The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
003 155
Fig. 3-5
003 058 Fig. 3-5 PC: Delta t All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time-delay has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions. 003 188 Fig. 3-5 PC: Time-out Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC interface before activating the second communication channel of communication module A. 056 026 COMM1: Function group COMM1 Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
Communication interface 1
COMM1: General enable USER Disabling or enabling communication interface 1. COMM1: Basic IEC870-5 enabl Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
003 170
Fig: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12 Fig. 3-6
003 215
7-7
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Addit. -101 enable Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on IEC 870-5-101. COMM1: Addit. ILS enable Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol. COMM1: MODBUS enable Enabling settings relevant to the MODBUS protocol. COMM1: DNP3 enable Enabling settings relevant to the DNP 3.0 protocol.
003 216
Fig. 3-6
003 217
Fig. 3-6 Fig. 3-6 Fig. 3-6
003 220
003 231
103 040 Fig. 3-6 COMM1: COURIER enable Enabling settings relevant to the COURIER protocol. 003 167 Fig. 3-6 COMM1: Communicat. protocol Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface.
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol. Note: This setting visible only if the MODBUS protocol is enabled. COMM1: Line idle state Setting for the line idle state indication. COMM1: Baud rate Baud rate of the communication interface. COMM1: Parity bit Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected to the P63x. COMM1: Dead time monitoring
003 214
Fig. 3-10
003 165
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9,3-10, 3-11,3-12 Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9,3-10, 3-11,3-12 Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9,3-10, 3-11,3-12
003 071
003 171
003 176
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9, 3-10,3-11, 3-12
The P63x monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission. COMM1: Mon. time polling
003 202
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9,3-10, 3-11,3-12
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the time set here.
7-8
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Octet comm. address
003 072
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9,3-11, 3-12
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. Note: The former designation for C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s was: ILSA: Bay address "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
003 240 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address set at C OMM1 : Oc te t co mm. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the DNP address.
Note:
This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

003 166
COMM1: Test monitor on Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities. COMM1: Name of manufacturer Setting for the manufacturer's name. Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility. This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. COMM1: Octet address ASDU
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9,3-10, 3-11,3-12 Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
003 161
003 073
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. The former designation for C O M M 1 : O c t e t a d d r e s s A S D U was ILSA: Device address. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable
003 177
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 179
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 1.
Fig: 3-7,3-8, 3-9
7-9
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication interface. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the communication interface. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. COMM1: Delta V
003 074
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
003 175
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
003 050
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 051
COMM1: Delta I
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 052
COMM1: Delta f
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 150
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. COMM1: Delta t
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
003 053
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after this time-delay has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
7-10
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Contin. general scan
003 077
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
A continuous or background general scan means that the P63x transmits all settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams. Note: This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 201
COMM1: Comm. address length Setting for the communication address length. Note: COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address. Note: COMM1: Cause transm. length Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.
Fig. 3-8
This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.

003 200
Fig. 3-8
This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.

003 192
Fig. 3-8
Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. 003 193 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: Address length ASDU Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram structures. Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
003 194 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of telegram structures.
Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj. Setting for the length of the address for information objects.
003 196
Fig. 3-8
Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. 003 197 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects. Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
7-11
7 Settings
(continued)
003 195 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be reversed in the object address.
Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. 003 198 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: Time tag length Setting for the time tag length. Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
003 190 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv. Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a single signal or double signal.
Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM1: ASDU2 conversion Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single signal or double signal. Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM1: Initializ. signal Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
003 199 003 191
Fig. 3-8
Fig. 3-8
Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. 003 226 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: Balanced operation Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis (full duplex operation). Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. 003 227 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: Direction bit Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at the control center and to '0' at the substation. Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. 003 228 Fig. 3-8 COMM1: Time-out interval Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the acknowledgment command is issued. Note: This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
7-12
7 Settings
(continued)
003 210 Fig. 3-10 COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first command is given to the register no. 00301, the second to the register no. 00302, etc.
Note:
This setting visible only if the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
003 211 Fig. 3-10 COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig. MODBUS registers in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first signal is given to the register no. 10301, the second to the register no. 10302, etc.
Note:
003 212 Fig. 3-10 COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val. MODBUS registers in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the register no. 30302, etc.
Note:
003 213 Fig. 3-10 COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param. MODBUS registers in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first parameter is given to the register no. 40301, the second to the register no. 40302, etc.
Note:

003 152
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) All MODBUS registers are transmitted again via the communication interface after this time has elapsed. Note: This setting visible only if the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
Fig. 3-10
003 249 Fig. 3-10 COMM1: Autom.event confirm. Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master, in order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
Note:
003 241 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start of sending the 'response'.
Note:

003 242
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is terminated. Note: This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
Fig. 3-11
7-13
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer. Note: This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 243
Fig. 3-11
003 244 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the link layer.
Note:
003 245 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Link Max. Retries Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
Note:
003 246 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the application layer.
Note:
003 247 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del. Time interval within which the slave cyclically requests time synchronization from the master.
Note:
003 232 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 binary inputs. Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled. 003 233 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 binary outputs. Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0. Note: This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled. 003 235 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp. Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 analog inputs. Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0. Note: This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
7-14
7 Settings
(continued)
003 236 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 analog outputs. Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled. 003 250 Fig. 3-11 COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3) Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'. Note: This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 248
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3) Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs). Note: This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled. COMM1: Command selection Selection of commands to be issued via the Courier protocol. Note: This setting visible only if the Courier protocol is enabled. COMM1: Signal selection Selection of signals to be transmitted via the Courier protocol. Note: This setting visible only if the Courier protocol is enabled.
Fig. 3-11
103 042
Fig. 3-12
103 043
Fig. 3-12
103 044 Fig. 3-12 COMM1: Meas. val. selection Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note:
This setting visible only if the Courier protocol is enabled.

103 045
COMM1: Parameter selection Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol. Note: This setting visible only if the Courier protocol is enabled.
Fig. 3-12
103 046 Fig. 3-12 COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again transmitted.
Note:
This setting visible only if the Courier protocol is enabled.
7-15
7 Settings
(continued)
056 057 COMM2: Function group COMM2 Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. 103 170 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: General enable USER Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.
COMM2: Line idle state Setting for the line idle state indication. COMM2: Baud rate Baud rate of the communication interface. COMM2: Parity bit Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected to the P63x.
103 165
Fig. 3-14 Fig. 3-14 Fig. 3-14
103 071
103 171
103 176 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Dead time monitoring The P63x monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission. 103 202 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Mon. time polling The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the time set here. 103 203 COMM2: Positive ackn. fault It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the COMM2/PC interface). 103 072 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Octet comm. address The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM2: Name of manufacturer Setting for the manufacturer's name.
103 161
Fig. 3-14
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility. 103 073 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Octet address ASDU The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
103 177 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface. 103 179 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Select. spontan.sig. Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 2.
7-16
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication interface. COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel. Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the communication interface.
103 074
Fig. 3-14
103 175
Fig. 3-14
103 050 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Delta V A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. 103 051 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Delta I A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. 103 052 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Delta f The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
103 150
Fig. 3-14
103 053 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Delta t All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after this time-delay has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions.
7-17
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC 61850 Communication
IEC: Function group IEC Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. IEC: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
056 059
104 000
104 058 IEC: Enable configuration This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain consistency among all the parameters in function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE, they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this command is sent to the device, the actual state of the previously changed setting parameter of the three function groups is enabled in the communication data model of the connected device. This function is carried out automatically with the off-line/on-line switching of the device. 104 050 IEC: Inactivity timer Additional communication monitor at Ethernet. Should a logged-on client issue no further request message after this time-delay has elapsed, this client will automatically be logged-off, i.e. no further reports will be issued to him. To re-establish communication the client is required to perform a new log-on procedure with the device (IED). 104 056 IEC: Ethernet media Selecting the physical communication channel on the Ethernet module from either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering option) connection. 104 057 IEC: IED name Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as device identification in the IEC 61850 system; it is included in the Logical Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous. All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names. 104 001 IEC: IP address IP address for the device (IED has server function).
Note: In the S&R 103 support software, the complete IP address is displayed here. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to the following four data model addresses: IEC: I P a d d r e s s , I E C : IP Address 1, IEC: IP address 2, IEC: IP address 3 (104 001, 104 002, 104 003, 104 004).
104 005 IEC: Subnet mask The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note: In the S&R 103 support software, the complete IP address is displayed here. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to four data model addresses.
7-18
7 Settings
(continued)
104 010 IEC: Number of routes Number of network routes that can be contacted outside of the sub-network, between the device (IED) and a client or server, communicating with this device, and situated in an exterior target network.
Such a configuration is required only then when this device must contact an external client/server direct without having its own network router to convert an IP address. Addressing of the router and the target network however are always necessary. Up to four such external target networks can be contacted. IEC: Router address 1 IEC: Router address 2 IEC: Router address 3 IEC: Router address 4 IP address of network router # 1, 2, 3 or 4. Note: In the S&R 103 support software, the complete IP address is displayed here. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to each of the four data model addresses. IEC: Target network 1 IEC: Target network 2 IEC: Target network 3 IEC: Target network 4 IP address of target network # 1, 2, 3 or 4. Note: In the S&R 103 support software, the complete IP address is displayed here. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to each of the four data model addresses.
104 200 IEC: SNTP operating mode Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization signal after its own cycle time. 104 201 IEC: SNTP poll cycle time Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode is set to Request from Server. 104 202 IEC: SNTP Server 1 IP. 104 210 IEC: SNTP Server 2 IP. IP address of synchronizing clock server 1 or 2. 104 015 104 023 104 031 104 039 104 011 104 019 104 027 104 035
Note: In the S&R 103 support software, the complete IP address is displayed here. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to each of the four data model addresses.
7-19
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Diff. local time Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED).
104 206
104 207 IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time Time difference when changing to daylight saving time. 104 051 IEC: Deadband value Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. Should a change occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to this formula: Step size measured value setting IEC: Deadband value 104 060 IEC: Update cycle energy Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB transmission with setting to blocked!
7-20
7 Settings
(continued)
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
056 068 GOOSE: Function group GOOSE Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are only active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device off-line/on-line.
GOOSE: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
106 001
106 003 Fig. 3-16 GOOSE: Multic. MAC address Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE: Application ID Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
106 004
Fig. 3-16
106 002 Fig. 3-16 GOOSE: Goose ID Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with 32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the maximum of 10 monitored external devices 106 006 Fig. 3-16 GOOSE: VLAN Identifier VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages, if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE: VLAN Priority VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE: DataSet Reference DataSet Reference of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
106 007
Fig. 3-16 Fig. 3-16
106 008
106 009 Fig. 3-16 GOOSE: DataSet Cfg.Revision Display of the 'DataSet Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is sent from this device (IED).
7-21
7 Settings
(continued)
106 011 GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 106 013 GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 106 015 GOOSE: Output 3 fct.assig. 106 017 GOOSE: Output 4 fct.assig. 106 019 GOOSE: Output 5 fct.assig. 106 021 GOOSE: Output 6 fct.assig. 106 023 GOOSE: Output 7 fct.assig. 106 025 GOOSE: Output 8 fct.assig. 106 027 GOOSE: Output 9 fct.assig. 106 029 GOOSE: Output 10 fct.assig. 106 031 GOOSE: Output 11 fct.assig. 106 033 GOOSE: Output 12 fct.assig. 106 035 GOOSE: Output 13 fct.assig. 106 037 GOOSE: Output 14 fct.assig. 106 039 GOOSE: Output 15 fct.assig. 106 041 GOOSE: Output 16 fct.assig. 106 043 GOOSE: Output 17 fct.assig. 106 045 GOOSE: Output 18 fct.assig. 106 047 GOOSE: Output 19 fct.assig. 106 049 GOOSE: Output 20 fct.assig. 106 051 GOOSE: Output 21 fct.assig. 106 053 GOOSE: Output 22 fct.assig. 106 055 GOOSE: Output 23 fct.assig. 106 057 GOOSE: Output 24 fct.assig. 106 059 GOOSE: Output 25 fct.assig. 106 061 GOOSE: Output 26 fct.assig. 106 063 GOOSE: Output 27 fct.assig. 106 065 GOOSE: Output 28 fct.assig. 106 067 GOOSE: Output 29 fct.assig. 106 069 GOOSE: Output 30 fct.assig. 106 071 GOOSE: Output 31 fct.assig. 106 073 GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig. Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured Dataset of GOOSE.
7-22
7 Settings
(continued)
107 000 GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID 107 010 GOOSE: Input 2 Applic. ID 107 020 GOOSE: Input 3 Applic. ID 107 030 GOOSE: Input 4 Applic. ID 107 040 GOOSE: Input 5 Applic. ID 107 050 GOOSE: Input 6 Applic. ID 107 060 GOOSE: Input 7 Applic. ID 107 070 GOOSE: Input 8 Applic. ID 107 080 GOOSE: Input 9 Applic. ID 107 090 GOOSE: Input 10 Applic. ID 107 100 GOOSE: Input 11 Applic. ID 107 110 GOOSE: Input 12 Applic. ID 107 120 GOOSE: Input 13 Applic. ID 107 130 GOOSE: Input 14 Applic. ID 107 140 GOOSE: Input 15 Applic. ID 107 150 GOOSE: Input 16 Applic. ID Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. 107 001 GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID 107 011 GOOSE: Input 2 Goose ID 107 021 GOOSE: Input 3 Goose ID 107 031 GOOSE: Input 4 Goose ID 107 041 GOOSE: Input 5 Goose ID 107 051 GOOSE: Input 6 Goose ID 107 061 GOOSE: Input 7 Goose ID 107 071 GOOSE: Input 8 Goose ID 107 081 GOOSE: Input 9 Goose ID 107 091 GOOSE: Input 10 Goose ID 107 101 GOOSE: Input 11 Goose ID 107 111 GOOSE: Input 12 Goose ID 107 121 GOOSE: Input 13 Goose ID 107 131 GOOSE: Input 14 Goose ID 107 141 GOOSE: Input 15 Goose ID 107 151 GOOSE: Input 16 Goose ID Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input.
7-23
7 Settings
(continued)
107 002 GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref 107 012 GOOSE: Input 2 DataSet Ref 107 022 GOOSE: Input 3 DataSet Ref 107 032 GOOSE: Input 4 DataSet Ref 107 042 GOOSE: Input 5 DataSet Ref 107 052 GOOSE: Input 6 DataSet Ref 107 062 GOOSE: Input 7 DataSet Ref 107 072 GOOSE: Input 8 DataSet Ref 107 082 GOOSE: Input 9 DataSet Ref 107 092 GOOSE: Input 10 DataSet Ref 107 102 GOOSE: Input 11 DataSet Ref 107 112 GOOSE: Input 12 DataSet Ref 107 122 GOOSE: Input 13 DataSet Ref 107 132 GOOSE: Input 14 DataSet Ref 107 142 GOOSE: Input 15 DataSet Ref 107 152 GOOSE: Input 16 DataSet Ref 'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered. 107 003 GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind 107 013 GOOSE: Input 2 DataObj Ind 107 023 GOOSE: Input 3 DataObj Ind 107 033 GOOSE: Input 4 DataObj Ind 107 043 GOOSE: Input 5 DataObj Ind 107 053 GOOSE: Input 6 DataObj Ind 107 063 GOOSE: Input 7 DataObj Ind 107 073 GOOSE: Input 8 DataObj Ind 107 083 GOOSE: Input 9 DataObj Ind 107 093 GOOSE: Input 10 DataObj Ind 107 103 GOOSE: Input 11 DataObj Ind 107 113 GOOSE: Input 12 DataObj Ind 107 123 GOOSE: Input 13 DataObj Ind 107 133 GOOSE: Input 14 DataObj Ind 107 143 GOOSE: Input 15 DataObj Ind 107 153 GOOSE: Input 16 DataObj Ind Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
7-24
7 Settings
(continued)
107 004 GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind 107 014 GOOSE: Input 2 DatAttr Ind 107 024 GOOSE: Input 3 DatAttr Ind 107 034 GOOSE: Input 4 DatAttr Ind 107 044 GOOSE: Input 5 DatAttr Ind 107 054 GOOSE: Input 6 DatAttr Ind 107 064 GOOSE: Input 7 DatAttr Ind 107 074 GOOSE: Input 8 DatAttr Ind 107 084 GOOSE: Input 9 DatAttr Ind 107 094 GOOSE: Input 10 DatAttr Ind 107 104 GOOSE: Input 11 DatAttr Ind 107 114 GOOSE: Input 12 DatAttr Ind 107 124 GOOSE: Input 13 DatAttr Ind 107 134 GOOSE: Input 14 DatAttr Ind 107 144 GOOSE: Input 15 DatAttr Ind 107 154 GOOSE: Input 16 DatAttr Ind Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated. 107 005 GOOSE: Input 1 default 107 015 GOOSE: Input 2 default 107 025 GOOSE: Input 3 default 107 035 GOOSE: Input 4 default 107 045 GOOSE: Input 5 default 107 055 GOOSE: Input 6 default 107 065 GOOSE: Input 7 default 107 075 GOOSE: Input 8 default 107 085 GOOSE: Input 9 default 107 095 GOOSE: Input 10 default 107 105 GOOSE: Input 11 default 107 115 GOOSE: Input 12 default 107 125 GOOSE: Input 13 default 107 135 GOOSE: Input 14 default 107 145 GOOSE: Input 15 default 107 155 GOOSE: Input 16 default Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-25
7 Settings
(continued)
107 006 GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 016 GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 107 026 GOOSE: Input 3 fct.assig. 107 036 GOOSE: Input 4 fct.assig. 107 046 GOOSE: Input 5 fct.assig. 107 056 GOOSE: Input 6 fct.assig. 107 066 GOOSE: Input 7 fct.assig. 107 076 GOOSE: Input 8 fct.assig. 107 086 GOOSE: Input 9 fct.assig. 107 096 GOOSE: Input 10 fct.assig. 107 106 GOOSE: Input 11 fct.assig. 107 116 GOOSE: Input 12 fct.assig. 107 126 GOOSE: Input 13 fct.assig. 107 136 GOOSE: Input 14 fct.assig. 107 146 GOOSE: Input 15 fct.assig. 107 156 GOOSE: Input 16 fct.assig. Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was received with the Dataset of GOOSE
7-26
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC Generic Substation Status Events
056 060 GSSE: Function group GSSE Cancelling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. The parameters in this function group are active only if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device off-line/on-line.
GSSE: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.
104 049
104 052 GSSE: Min. cycle Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with this formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms] The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state change of a GSSE bit pair.
104 053 GSSE: Max. cycle Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max. value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value time. 104 054 GSSE: Increment Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. 104 055 GSSE: Operating mode In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed. In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have logged-on successfully, are read and processed.
7-27
7 Settings
(continued)
104 101 GSSE: Output 1 bit pair 104 104 GSSE: Output 2 bit pair 104 107 GSSE: Output 3 bit pair 104 110 GSSE: Output 4 bit pair 104 113 GSSE: Output 5 bit pair 104 116 GSSE: Output 6 bit pair 104 119 GSSE: Output 7 bit pair 104 122 GSSE: Output 8 bit pair 104 125 GSSE: Output 9 bit pair 104 128 GSSE: Output 10 bit pair 104 131 GSSE: Output 11 bit pair 104 134 GSSE: Output 12 bit pair 104 137 GSSE: Output 13 bit pair 104 140 GSSE: Output 14 bit pair 104 143 GSSE: Output 15 bit pair 104 146 GSSE: Output 16 bit pair 104 149 GSSE: Output 17 bit pair 104 152 GSSE: Output 18 bit pair 104 155 GSSE: Output 19 bit pair 104 158 GSSE: Output 20 bit pair 104 161 GSSE: Output 21 bit pair 104 164 GSSE: Output 22 bit pair 104 167 GSSE: Output 23 bit pair 104 170 GSSE: Output 24 bit pair 104 173 GSSE: Output 25 bit pair 104 176 GSSE: Output 26 bit pair 104 179 GSSE: Output 27 bit pair 104 182 GSSE: Output 28 bit pair 104 185 GSSE: Output 29 bit pair 104 188 GSSE: Output 30 bit pair 104 191 GSSE: Output 31 bit pair 104 194 GSSE: Output 32 bit pair Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are used by this device (IED) during a send operation.
7-28
7 Settings
(continued)
104 102 GSSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 104 105 GSSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 104 108 GSSE: Output 3 fct.assig. 104 111 GSSE: Output 4 fct.assig. 104 114 GSSE: Output 5 fct.assig. 104 117 GSSE: Output 6 fct.assig. 104 120 GSSE: Output 7 fct.assig. 104 123 GSSE: Output 8 fct.assig. 104 126 GSSE: Output 9 fct.assig. 104 129 GSSE: Output 10 fct.assig. 104 132 GSSE: Output 11 fct.assig. 104 135 GSSE: Output 12 fct.assig. 104 138 GSSE: Output 13 fct.assig. 104 141 GSSE: Output 14 fct.assig. 104 144 GSSE: Output 15 fct.assig. 104 147 GSSE: Output 16 fct.assig. 104 150 GSSE: Output 17 fct.assig. 104 153 GSSE: Output 18 fct.assig. 104 156 GSSE: Output 19 fct.assig. 104 159 GSSE: Output 20 fct.assig. 104 162 GSSE: Output 21 fct.assig. 104 165 GSSE: Output 22 fct.assig. 104 168 GSSE: Output 23 fct.assig. 104 171 GSSE: Output 24 fct.assig. 104 174 GSSE: Output 25 fct.assig. 104 177 GSSE: Output 26 fct.assig. 104 180 GSSE: Output 27 fct.assig. 104 183 GSSE: Output 28 fct.assig. 104 186 GSSE: Output 29 fct.assig. 104 189 GSSE: Output 30 fct.assig. 104 192 GSSE: Output 31 fct.assig. 104 195 GSSE: Output 32 fct.assig. Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as configured above.
7-29
7 Settings
(continued)
105 001 GSSE: Input 1 bit pair 105 006 GSSE: Input 2 bit pair 105 011 GSSE: Input 3 bit pair 105 016 GSSE: Input 4 bit pair 105 021 GSSE: Input 5 bit pair 105 026 GSSE: Input 6 bit pair 105 031 GSSE: Input 7 bit pair 105 036 GSSE: Input 8 bit pair 105 041 GSSE: Input 9 bit pair 105 046 GSSE: Input 10 bit pair 105 051 GSSE: Input 11 bit pair 105 056 GSSE: Input 12 bit pair 105 061 GSSE: Input 13 bit pair 105 066 GSSE: Input 14 bit pair 105 071 GSSE: Input 15 bit pair 105 076 GSSE: Input 16 bit pair 105 081 GSSE: Input 17 bit pair 105 086 GSSE: Input 18 bit pair 105 091 GSSE: Input 19 bit pair 105 096 GSSE: Input 20 bit pair 105 101 GSSE: Input 21 bit pair 105 106 GSSE: Input 22 bit pair 105 111 GSSE: Input 23 bit pair 105 116 GSSE: Input 24 bit pair 105 121 GSSE: Input 25 bit pair 105 126 GSSE: Input 26 bit pair 105 131 GSSE: Input 27 bit pair 105 136 GSSE: Input 28 bit pair 105 141 GSSE: Input 29 bit pair 105 146 GSSE: Input 30 bit pair 105 151 GSSE: Input 31 bit pair 105 156 GSSE: Input 32 bit pair Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input. A GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
7-30
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 IED name GSSE: Input 2 IED name GSSE: Input 3 IED name GSSE: Input 4 IED name GSSE: Input 5 IED name GSSE: Input 6 IED name GSSE: Input 7 IED name GSSE: Input 8 IED name GSSE: Input 9 IED name GSSE: Input 10 IED name GSSE: Input 11 IED name GSSE: Input 12 IED name GSSE: Input 13 IED name GSSE: Input 14 IED name GSSE: Input 15 IED name GSSE: Input 16 IED name GSSE: Input 17 IED name GSSE: Input 18 IED name GSSE: Input 19 IED name GSSE: Input 20 IED name GSSE: Input 21 IED name GSSE: Input 22 IED name GSSE: Input 23 IED name GSSE: Input 24 IED name GSSE: Input 25 IED name GSSE: Input 26 IED name GSSE: Input 27 IED name GSSE: Input 28 IED name GSSE: Input 29 IED name GSSE: Input 30 IED name GSSE: Input 31 IED name GSSE: Input 32 IED name IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
105 002 105 007 105 012 105 017 105 022 105 027 105 032 105 037 105 042 105 047 105 052 105 057 105 062 105 067 105 072 105 077 105 082 105 087 105 092 105 097 105 102 105 107 105 112 105 117 105 122 105 127 105 132 105 137 105 142 105 147 105 152 105 157
7-31
7 Settings
(continued)
105 003 GSSE: Input 1 default 105 008 GSSE: Input 2 default 105 013 GSSE: Input 3 default 105 018 GSSE: Input 4 default 105 023 GSSE: Input 5 default 105 028 GSSE: Input 6 default 105 033 GSSE: Input 7 default 105 038 GSSE: Input 8 default 105 043 GSSE: Input 9 default 105 048 GSSE: Input 10 default 105 053 GSSE: Input 11 default 105 058 GSSE: Input 12 default 105 063 GSSE: Input 13 default 105 068 GSSE: Input 14 default 105 073 GSSE: Input 15 default 105 078 GSSE: Input 16 default 105 083 GSSE: Input 17 default 105 088 GSSE: Input 18 default 105 093 GSSE: Input 19 default 105 098 GSSE: Input 20 default 105 103 GSSE: Input 21 default 105 108 GSSE: Input 22 default 105 113 GSSE: Input 23 default 105 118 GSSE: Input 24 default 105 123 GSSE: Input 25 default 105 128 GSSE: Input 26 default 105 133 GSSE: Input 27 default 105 138 GSSE: Input 28 default 105 143 GSSE: Input 29 default 105 148 GSSE: Input 30 default 105 153 GSSE: Input 31 default 105 158 GSSE: Input 32 default Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-32
7 Settings
(continued)
105 004 GSSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 105 009 GSSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 105 014 GSSE: Input 3 fct.assig. 105 019 GSSE: Input 4 fct.assig. 105 024 GSSE: Input 5 fct.assig. 105 029 GSSE: Input 6 fct.assig. 105 034 GSSE: Input 7 fct.assig. 105 039 GSSE: Input 8 fct.assig. 105 044 GSSE: Input 9 fct.assig. 105 049 GSSE: Input 10 fct.assig. 105 054 GSSE: Input 11 fct.assig. 105 059 GSSE: Input 12 fct.assig. 105 064 GSSE: Input 13 fct.assig. 105 069 GSSE: Input 14 fct.assig. 105 074 GSSE: Input 15 fct.assig. 105 079 GSSE: Input 16 fct.assig. 105 084 GSSE: Input 17 fct.assig. 105 089 GSSE: Input 18 fct.assig. 105 094 GSSE: Input 19 fct.assig. 105 099 GSSE: Input 20 fct.assig. 105 104 GSSE: Input 21 fct.assig. 105 109 GSSE: Input 22 fct.assig. 105 114 GSSE: Input 23 fct.assig. 105 119 GSSE: Input 24 fct.assig. 105 124 GSSE: Input 25 fct.assig. 105 129 GSSE: Input 26 fct.assig. 105 134 GSSE: Input 27 fct.assig. 105 139 GSSE: Input 28 fct.assig. 105 144 GSSE: Input 29 fct.assig. 105 149 GSSE: Input 30 fct.assig. 105 154 GSSE: Input 31 fct.assig. 105 159 GSSE: Input 32 fct.assig. Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with GSSE
IRIG-B interface
056 072 IRIGB: Function group IRIGB Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
IRIGB: General enable USER Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
023 200
Fig. 3-17
7-33
7 Settings
(continued)
Binary input
The P63x has opto-coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation. The number and connection schemes for the available binary signal inputs are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The configuration options for all binary inputs can be displayed in the support software. The P63x identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree. When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several control points having different signal voltages. In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify whether the presence (active high mode) or absence (active low mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal.
7-34
7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Fct. assignm. U 1201 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1202 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1203 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1204 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1401 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1402 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1403 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1404 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1405 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1406 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1407 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1408 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1409 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1410 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1411 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1412 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1413 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1414 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1415 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1416 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1417 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1418 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1419 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1420 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1421 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1422 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1423 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1424 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1601 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1602 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1603 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1604 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1605 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1606 INP: Fct. assignm. U 2001 INP: Fct. assignm. U 2002 INP: Fct. assignm. U 2003 INP: Fct. assignm. U 2004 Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
152 199 152 202 152 205 152 208 190 002 190 006 190 010 190 014 190 018 190 022 190 026 190 030 190 034 190 038 190 042 190 046 190 050 190 054 190 058 190 062 190 066 190 070 190 074 190 078 190 082 190 086 190 090 190 094 192 002 192 006 192 010 192 014 192 018 192 022 153 087 153 090 153 093 153 096
7-35
7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Oper. mode U 1201 INP: Oper. mode U 1202 INP: Oper. mode U 1203 INP: Oper. mode U 1204 INP: Oper. mode U 1401 INP: Oper. mode U 1402 INP: Oper. mode U 1403 INP: Oper. mode U 1404 INP: Oper. mode U 1405 INP: Oper. mode U 1406 INP: Oper. mode U 1407 INP: Oper. mode U 1408 INP: Oper. mode U 1409 INP: Oper. mode U 1410 INP: Oper. mode U 1411 INP: Oper. mode U 1412 INP: Oper. mode U 1413 INP: Oper. mode U 1414 INP: Oper. mode U 1415 INP: Oper. mode U 1416 INP: Oper. mode U 1417 INP: Oper. mode U 1418 INP: Oper. mode U 1419 INP: Oper. mode U 1420 INP: Oper. mode U 1421 INP: Oper. mode U 1422 INP: Oper. mode U 1423 INP: Oper. mode U 1424 INP: Oper. mode U 1601 INP: Oper. mode U 1602 INP: Oper. mode U 1603 INP: Oper. mode U 1604 INP: Oper. mode U 1605 INP: Oper. mode U 1606 INP: Oper. mode U 2001 INP: Oper. mode U 2002 INP: Oper. mode U 2003 INP: Oper. mode U 2004 Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
152 200 152 203 152 206 152 209 190 003 190 007 190 011 190 015 190 019 190 023 190 027 190 031 190 035 190 039 190 043 190 047 190 051 190 055 190 059 190 063 190 067 190 071 190 075 190 079 190 083 190 087 190 091 190 095 192 003 192 007 192 011 192 015 192 019 192 023 153 088 153 091 153 094 153 097
7-36
7 Settings
(continued)
Measured Data Input
056 030 MEASI: Function group MEASI Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. 011 100 Fig. 3-19 MEASI: General enable USER Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
MEASI: Enable IDC p.u. Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P63x to display a measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
037 190
Fig: 3-21, 3-22
037 191 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC< open circuit If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P63x will issue an open circuit signal.
MEASI: IDC 1
037 150
037 152 MEASI: IDC 2 037 154 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 3 037 156 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 4 037 158 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 5 037 160 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 6 037 162 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 7 037 164 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 8 037 166 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 9 037 168 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 10 037 170 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 11 037 172 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 12 037 174 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 13 037 176 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 14 037 178 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 15 037 180 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 16 037 182 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 17 037 184 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 18 037 186 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 19 037 188 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC 20 Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has been set accordingly.
Fig: 3-20, 3-21,3-22 Fig. 3-22
7-37
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASI: IDC,lin 1
037 151
037 153 MEASI: IDC,lin 2 037 155 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 3 037 157 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 4 037 159 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 5 037 161 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 6 037 163 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 7 037 165 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 8 037 167 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 9 037 169 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 10 037 171 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 11 037 173 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 12 037 175 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 13 037 177 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 14 037 179 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 15 037 181 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 16 037 183 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 17 037 185 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 18 037 187 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 19 037 189 Fig. 3-22 MEASI: IDC,lin 20 Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that has been set accordingly.
Fig: 3-20, 3-21,3-22 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1 Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1. MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20 Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
037 192
Fig. 3-23 Fig. 3-23
037 193
7-38
7 Settings
(continued)
Binary outputs
The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The configuration options for all binary outputs can be displayed in the support software. The P63x identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree. The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as command relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of contact multiplication. An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled. OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1201 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1202 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1601 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1602 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1603 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1604 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1605 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1606 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1607 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1608 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1801 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1802 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1803 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1804 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1805 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1806 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2001 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2002 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2003 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2004 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2005 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2006 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2007 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2008 Assignment of functions to output relays.
151 009 151 012 171 002 171 006 171 010 171 014 171 018 171 022 171 026 171 030 173 002 173 006 173 010 173 014 173 018 173 022 151 201 151 204 151 207 151 210 151 213 151 216 151 219 151 222
7-39
7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP: Oper. mode K 1201 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1202 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1601 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1602 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1603 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1604 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1605 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1606 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1607 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1608 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1801 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1802 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1803 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1804 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1805 OUTP: Oper. mode K 1806 OUTP: Oper. mode K 2001 OUTP: Oper. mode K 2002 OUTP: Oper. mode K 2003 OUTP: Oper. mode K 2004 OUTP: Oper. mode K 2005 OUTP: Oper. mode K 2006 OUTP: Oper. mode K 2007 OUTP: Oper. mode K 2008 Selection of operating mode for output relays.
151 010 151 013 171 003 171 007 171 011 171 015 171 019 171 023 171 027 171 031 173 003 173 007 173 011 173 015 173 019 173 023 151 202 151 205 151 208 151 211 151 214 151 217 151 220 151 223
7-40
7 Settings
(continued)
Measured Data Output
056 020 MEASO: Function group MEASO Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
MEASO: General enable USER Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
031 074
Fig. 3-27
053 002 Fig. 3-30 MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form. 010 010 Fig. 3-30 MEASO: Hold time output BCD Setting for thetransmission time of the selected measured value in BCD form. 016 082 Fig. 3-30 MEASO: Scale BCD Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form. The scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula: M Scaling factor = x,max M x,scal
where: Mx,scal :
Mx,max :
scaled measured value maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
053 000 053 001
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2 Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
Fig. 3-32
010 114 Fig. 3-32 MEASO: Hold time output A-1 010 115 MEASO: Hold time output A-2 Setting for the time-delay for output of the selected measured value. 037 104 Fig. 3-32 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 037 110 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2 Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula: M x,min M x,scal,min = M x,RL
where: Mx,min :
M x,RL :
minimum transmitted value for the selected measured value range limit value of the selected measured value
7-41
7 Settings
(continued)
037 105 Fig. 3-32 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 037 111 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2 Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point of the characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula: M x,knee M x,scal,knee = M x,RL
where: M x,knee :
M x,RL :
knee point value to be transmitted for the selected measured value range limit value of the selected measured value
037 106 Fig. 3-32 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 037 112 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2 After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax (x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range "measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.
Measured values
Range
Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2 Associated scaled measured values 0 ... 1
Measured values to be issued Measured values to be issued
Range Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max Designation of the set values in the data model
with: Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1 Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
"Scaled min. val. Ax" ... ... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
Knee point for characteristic Value for knee point Scaled knee point value Designation of this set value in the data model
with:
Designation Mx,knee Mx,scaled,knee "Scaled knee val. Ax"
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
7-42
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2 Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller than or equal to the minimum measured value to be transmitted.
037 107 037 113
Fig. 3-32
037 108 Fig. 3-32 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 037 114 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2 Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is in the knee point of the characteristic.
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2 Display values Output current range for measured values in the range "measured values to be issued" Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,min. Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,max. Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee
with: Mx,min ... Mx,max : measured values to be issued
037 109 037 115
Fig. 3-32
Designation in the data model "AnOut min. val. Ax" ... ... "AnOut max. val. Ax" "AnOut min. val. Ax" "AnOut max. val. Ax" "AnOut knee point Ax"
MEASO: Output value 1 MEASO: Output value 2 MEASO: Output value 3
037 120 037 121 037 122
Fig: 3-30, 3-32 Fig: 3-30, 3-32 Fig: 3-30, 3-32
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be issued.
7-43
7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicators
The P63x has a total of 17 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. The configuration options for all LED indicators can be displayed in the support software. LED indicator H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled "HEALTHY" and signals the operational readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled "OUT OF SERVICE" and signals a blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled "ALARM" and signals a warning alarm. LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the "EDIT MODE". The factory setting for LED indicator H 4 is shown in the terminal connection drawings included in the documentation or the appendix. The layout of the LED indicators is shown in the dimensional drawings in chapter 4. An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode ('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
7-44
7 Settings
(continued)
LED: Fct. assignm. H 2 Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2. The M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y function is permanently assigned. LED: Fct. assignm. H 3 Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3. The S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) function is permanently assigned. LED: Fct. assignm. H 4 LED: Fct. assignm. H 5 LED: Fct. assignm. H 6 LED: Fct. assignm. H 7 LED: Fct. assignm. H 8 LED: Fct. assignm. H 9 LED: Fct. assignm. H 10 LED: Fct. assignm. H 11 LED: Fct. assignm. H 12 LED: Fct. assignm. H 13 LED: Fct. assignm. H 14 LED: Fct. assignm. H 15 LED: Fct. assignm. H 16 Assignment of functions to LED indicators. LED: Operating mode H 2 LED: Operating mode H 3 LED: Operating mode H 4 LED: Operating mode H 5 LED: Operating mode H 6 LED: Operating mode H 7 LED: Operating mode H 8 LED: Operating mode H 9 LED: Operating mode H 10 LED: Operating mode H 11 LED: Operating mode H 12 LED: Operating mode H 13 LED: Operating mode H 14 LED: Operating mode H 15 LED: Operating mode H 16 Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
085 001
Fig. 3-33
085 004
Fig. 3-33
085 007 085 010 085 013 085 016 085 019 085 022 085 025 085 028 085 031 085 034 085 037 085 040 085 043
Fig. 3-33
085 002 085 005 085 008 085 011 085 014 085 017 085 020 085 023 085 026 085 029 085 032 085 035 085 038 085 041 085 044
7-45
7 Settings
(continued)
Main function
MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2 Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
003 169
Fig. 3-61
103 210 Page: 3-91 MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. 103 211 Page: 3-91 MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the primary source after M AIN : Ti me s ync . ti me -ou t has elapsed.
MAIN: Time sync. time-out Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source. Fault Recording
103 212
Page: 3-91
035 160 Fig.*: 3-78 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 161 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 162 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 3 035 163 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 4 035 164 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 5 035 165 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 6 035 166 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 7 035 167 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 8 035 168 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 9 035 169 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.10 035 170 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.11 035 171 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.12 035 172 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.13 035 173 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.14 035 174 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.15 035 175 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.16 The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded. The figure shown illustrates an overview of the assignment.
7-46
7 Settings
(continued)
Cancelling protection functions
By means of a configuration procedure, the user can adapt the device functions flexibly to the scope of protection functions required in each particular h.v. system. The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be cancelled: The protection function in question must be disabled. None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled may be assigned to a binary input. None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or an LED indicator. None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals. The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example:
DIFF: Function group DIFF Cancelling function group DIFF or including it in the configuration.If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
056 027
056 037 Ground differential protection REF_1: Function group REF_1 (Br: Restricted earth fault protection) REF_2: Function group REF_2 056 038 056 039 REF_3: Function group REF_3 Cancelling function groups REF_1 to REF_3 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Note: Ground differential protection is not available with the P631. Function group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. Definite-time overcurrent protection
056 031 DTOC1: Function group DTOC1 056 032 DTOC2: Function group DTOC2: 056 053 DTOC3: Function group DTOC3 Cancelling function groups DTOC1 to DTOC3 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Note: Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
7-47
7 Settings
(continued)
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
056 051 IDMT1: Function group IDMT1 056 061 IDMT2: Function group IDMT2 056 071 IDMT3: Function group IDMT3 Cancelling function groups IDMT1 to IDMT3 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Note: Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
056 054 Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Function group THRM1 056 055 THRM2: Function group THRM2 Cancelling function groups THR_1 to THRM_2 or including them in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
Note: Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Function group V<> Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Note: Time-voltage protection is not available with the P631. Frequency Protection f<>: Function group f<> Cancelling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Note: Frequency protection is not available with the P631. Overfluxing protection V/f: Function group V/f Cancelling function group V/f or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. CTS: Function group CTS Cancelling function group CTS or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Note: The new processor board with a DSP coprocessor is an unconditional hardware requirement for this function group!
056 056 056 033 056 010
Current Transformer Supervision
056 077
7-48
7 Settings
(continued)
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCM_1: Function group MCM_1
056 073
056 074 MCM_2: Function group MCM_2 056 075 MCM_3: Function group MCM_3 056 076 MCM_4: Function group MCM_4 Cancelling function groups MCM_1 to MCM_4 or including them in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Note:
Function group MCM_4 is available with the P634 only. Function group MCM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634.
056 025 LIMIT: Function group LIMIT Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
056 042 Limit Value Monitoring, 1 to 3 LIM_1: Function group LIM_1 056 043 LIM_2: Function group LIM_2 056 050 LIM_3: Function group LIM_3 Cancelling function groups LIM_1 to LIM_3 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Note:
Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
Logic
056 017 LOGIC: Function group LOGIC Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
7-49
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3 7.1.3.1 PC link
Function Parameters Global
003 182 Fig. 3-5 PC: Command blocking When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected from the PC interface.
PC: Sig./meas.val.block. When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through the PC interface. Communication interface 1
003 086
Fig. 3-5
003 172 Fig. 3-6 COMM1: Command block. USER When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from communication interface 1. 003 076 Fig: 3-7, COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER
3-8,3-9
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1. Communication interface 2
103 172 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Command block. USER When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from communication interface 2. 103 076 Fig. 3-14 COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Binary outputs
OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked. MAIN: Protection enabled
021 014
Fig. 3-25
Main function
003 030
Fig: 3-26, 3-50, 3-54
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed when protection is disabled. 003 012 Fig. 3-62 MAIN: Test mode USER When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'. MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system. MAIN: Phase sequence
010 049 010 030
Fig: 3-131, 3133 Fig: 3-83, 3-84, 3-102, 3-113, 3-142, 3-148
Setting for the phase sequence: A-B-C or A-C-B.(Alternative terminology: Setting for the rotary field direction, either clockwise or anticlockwise.)
7-50
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end a MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end b MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end c MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end d Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer (phase currents) of end a or b . MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end a
019 020 019 021 019 022 019 026
Fig: 3-41, 3-80, 3-94 Fig: 3-41, 3-80 Fig: 3-41, 3-80 Fig: 3-41, 3-80
019 027
019 028 MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end b 019 029 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end c Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer at the neutral-point-to-ground connection.
Fig: 3-42, 3-80 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer. MAIN: Inom device, end a MAIN: Inom device, end b MAIN: Inom device, end c MAIN: Inom device, end d Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of phase currents of ends a,b, c and d. This also corresponds to the nominal device current. MAIN: IY,nom device, end a MAIN: IY,nom device, end b MAIN: IY,nom device, end c MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for voltage measurement. MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,a MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,b MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,c
010 002
Fig. 3-45 Fig: 3-35, 3-36a Fig: 3-35, 3-36b Fig: 3-35, 3-36b Fig: 3-36b
010 024 010 025 010 029 010 047
010 142 010 143 010 144 010 009
Fig: 3-35, 3-36a Fig: 3-35, 3-36b Fig: 3-35, 3-36b Fig: 3-35, 3-45
010 140 010 150 010 160
010 170 MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,d The vectorial sum of the phase currents of end a to d is governed by the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard'. If the connection direction is reversed then the setting must be 'Opposite'. Instead of accounting for connection reversal applied to one end in the settings for DIFF: Vector grp. ends z1-z2 (where z1-z2 stands for a-b, a-c or a-d), it is possible to account for it in the settings for connection of the measuring circuits.
Fig: 3-35, 3-36a Fig: 3-35, 3-36b Fig: 3-35, 3-36b Fig: 3-36b
7-51
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,a MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,b MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,c
010 141 010 151 010 161
Fig: 3-35, 3-36a Fig: 3-35, 3-36b Fig: 3-35, 3-36b
If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard'. If the connection direction is reversed then the setting must be 'Opposite'. 011 030 Fig: 3-41, MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP
3-44
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating values of the phase currents to be displayed. MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ineg MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ipos MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating value of the residual current to be displayed. MAIN: Meas. value rel. IY Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating value of the current in the neutral-point-to-ground connection to be displayed. MAIN: Meas. value rel. V Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating values of the voltage to be displayed. MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del
011 048 011 058 011 031
Page: 3-74 Page: 3-74 Fig: 3-42, 3-43,3-44
011 036
Fig. 3-42
011 032
Fig. 3-45
010 113
Fig: 3-40, 3-41
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
021 021 Fig. 3-52 MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1 Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 1 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated. 021 022 Fig. 3-52 MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 2 Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 2 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 2 E X T ) is activated. 021 048 Fig. 3-52 MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 3 Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 3 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 3 E X T ) is activated. 021 049 Fig. 3-52 MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 4 Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 4 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 4 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
021 012
Fig. 3-57
7-52
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1 Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1. MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2 Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 2. MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.3 Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 3. MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.4 Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 4. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1 Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 2 Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 3 Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 3. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 4 Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 4. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1 Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 2 Specification as to whether trip command 2 should latch. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 3 Specification as to whether trip command 3 should latch. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 4 Specification as to whether trip command 4 should latch.
021 001
Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57
021 002
021 046
021 047
021 003
021 004
021 032
021 033
021 023
021 024
021 025
021 026
021 031 Fig. 3-54 MAIN: Fct. assign. fault Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty. The device is blocked in both cases. 003 100 Fig. 3-63 Selecting a parameter subset PSS: Control via USER If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting 'Yes'.
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
003 060
Fig. 3-63
003 063 Fig. 3-63 PSS: Keep time The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is carried out via binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time-delay has elapsed, no binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local control panel shall apply.
7-53
7 Settings
(continued)
Self-Monitoring
021 030 Fig. 3-64 SFMON: Fct. assign. warning Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals 'Warning (LED)' and 'Warning (relay)' and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled 'ALARM'. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to a blocking of the device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and indication.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs. Fault Recording
021 018
Page: 3-99
003 085 Fig. 3-76 FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger This setting defines the signals that will trigger disturbance recording and fault data acquisition. 016 018 Fig. 3-76 FT_RC: Id> This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will trigger disturbance recording. 016 019 Fig. 3-76 FT_RC: IR> This setting defines the threshold value of the restraining current that will trigger disturbance recording. 003 078 Fig. 3-78 FT_RC: Pre-fault time Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before a fault occurs (pre-fault recording time). 003 079 Fig. 3-78 FT_RC: Post-fault time Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault (post-fault recording time). 003 075 Fig. 3-78 FT_RC: Max. recording time Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and post-fault recording times.
7-54
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.2 Main function
General Functions
019 017
MAIN: Vnom prim., end a Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end a of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim., end b Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end b of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim., end c Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end c of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim., end d Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end d of the transformer.
Fig: 3-80, 3-94 Fig. 3-80 Fig. 3-80 Fig. 3-80
019 018
019 019
019 037
016 096 Fig. 3-38 MAIN: Evaluation IN, end a This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual current: either the calculated residual current derived from the sum of the phase currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer. 016 097 Fig. 3-38 MAIN: Evaluation IN, end b This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual current: either the calculated residual current derived from the sum of the phase currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer. 016 098 Fig. 3-38 MAIN: Evaluation IN, end c This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual current: either the calculated residual current derived from the sum of the phase currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer. 019 099 Fig. 3-39 MAIN: Current summation For two ends of the transformer, the currents for each phase and the residual currents can be combined. This setting specifies the transformer ends to be involved.
Note:
This setting is available for the P633 and the P634 only.
018 009 Fig. 3-51 MAIN: Hold time dyn.param. Setting for the hold time of the dynamic parameters. During this period, the dynamic thresholds are active in place of the normal thresholds.
DIFF: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the differential protection function. DIFF: Reference power Sref Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power. DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,a Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end a. DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,b Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end b. DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,c Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end c. DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,d Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end d.
019 080
Fig. 3-79 Fig. 3-80 Fig. 3-80 Fig. 3-80 Fig. 3-80 Fig. 3-80
019 016
019 023
019 024
019 025
019 038
7-55
7 Settings
(continued)
DIFF: Matching fact. kam,a
004 105
004 106 DIFF: Matching fact. kam,b 004 127 DIFF: Matching fact. kam,c 004 168 DIFF: Matching fact. kam,d Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for end a, b, c or d. 011 037 Fig. 3-92 DIFF: Meas. value rel. Id Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the differential currents as measured operating data. 011 038 Fig. 3-92 DIFF: Meas. value rel. IR Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
Fig: 3-80, 3-81
Ground differential protection REF_1: General enable USER (Br: Restricted earth fault protection) REF_2: General enable USER REF_3: General enable USER Disabling or enabling ground fault differential protection. Note: Function group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
019 050 019 150 019 250
Fig. 3-93
019 100 REF_1: Select. meas. input 019 101 REF_2: Select. meas. input 019 102 REF_3: Select. meas. input Display of the measuring input that provides the measured values evaluated by the ground differential protection function. 019 031 Fig. 3-94 REF_1: Reference power Sref 019 032 REF_2: Reference power Sref 019 033 REF_3: Reference power Sref Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power for the relevant transformer end. 019 034 Fig. 3-94 REF_1: Ref. current Iref 019 035 REF_2: Ref. current Iref 019 036 REF_3: Ref. current Iref Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x. 004 160 Fig. 3-94 REF_1: Matching fact. kam,N 004 161 REF_2: Matching fact. kam,N 004 162 REF_3: Matching fact. kam,N Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the vector sum of the phase currents. 004 163 Fig. 3-94 REF_1: Matching fact. kam,Y 004 164 REF_2: Matching fact. kam,Y 004 165 REF_3: Matching fact. kam,Y Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the neutral-point current.
7-56
7 Settings
(continued)
011 039 Fig. 3-98 REF_1: Meas. value rel. Id 011 044 REF_2: Meas. value rel. Id 011 045 REF_3: Meas. value rel. Id Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the differential currents as measured operating data. 011 040 Fig. 3-98 REF_1: Meas. value rel. IR 011 046 REF_2: Meas. value rel. IR 011 047 REF_3: Meas. value rel. IR Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
Definite-time overcurrent protection
DTOC1: General enable USER DTOC2: General enable USER DTOC3: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
031 135 031 136 031 139
Fig. 3-100
Note: Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. 019 103 Fig. 3-99 DTOC1: Select. meas. input 019 104 DTOC2: Select. meas. input 019 105 DTOC3: Select. meas. input Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured values monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function. Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection IDMT1: General enable USER IDMT2: General enable USER IDMT3: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. Note: only.
031 141 031 142 031 143
Fig. 3-107
Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634
019 106 019 116 019 126
IDMT1: Select. meas. input IDMT2: Select. meas. input IDMT3: Select. meas. input Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured values monitored by the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: General enable USER THRM2: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the thermal overload protection function. Note: only.
Fig. 3-106
031 144 031 145
Fig. 3-119
Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634
019 109 Fig. 3-118 THRM1: Select. meas. input 019 110 THRM2: Select. meas. input Selection of the current relevant for thermal overload protection. Select from the currents measured at the measuring input for end a, b, c, d. For the P633 and the P634, there is an additional option, namely the selection of the value obtained according to the setting at M AIN : Cu rren t s u mm a ti on .
7-57
7 Settings
(continued)
THRM1: Operating mode THRM2: Operating mode Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection.
039 121 039 181
Fig. 3-123
004 152 THRM1: O/T f.Iref persist 1 004 172 THRM2: O/T f.Iref persist 2 Display of the difference between the settings for the maximum permissible temperatures of the protected object and the coolant.
V<>: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the time-voltage protection function. Note: Time-voltage protection is not available with the P631.
023 030
Fig. 3-125
f<>: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the over-/underfrequency protection function.
023 031
Fig. 3-128
Note: Frequency protection is not available with the P631. 018 201 Fig. 3-129 f<>: Evaluation time Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the duration of the set evaluation time so that a signal is issued.
018 200 Fig. 3-129 f<>: Undervolt. block. V< Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
V/f: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the Overfluxing protection function. CTS: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the current transformer supervision function.
019 097
Fig. 3-132
031 085
Fig. 3-140
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCM_1: General enable USER MCM_2: General enable USER MCM_3: General enable USER MCM_4: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function. MCM_1: Select. meas. input MCM_2: Select. meas. input MCM_3: Select. meas. input MCM_4: Select. meas. input Assigning measuring-circuit monitoring functions to ends a, b, c and d.
031 146 031 147 031 148 031 149
Fig. 3-147
031 150 031 151 031 152 031 153
7-58
7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the limit value monitoring function. LIMIT: IDC,lin> Setting for operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: IDC,lin>> Setting for operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: tIDC,lin> Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>. LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>. LIMIT: IDC,lin< Setting for operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: IDC,lin<< Setting for operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: tIDC,lin< Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<. LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<. LIMIT: T> Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>. LIMIT: T>> Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>. LIMIT: tT> Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>. LIMIT: tT>> Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>. LIMIT: T< Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<. LIMIT: T<< Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<. LIMIT: tT< Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<. LIMIT: tT<< Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
014 010
Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150
014 110
014 111
Fig. 3-150
014 112
Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150
014 113
014 114
014 115
Fig. 3-150
014 116
Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151
014 117
014 100
014 101
014 103
014 104
014 105
014 106
014 107
014 108
7-59
7 Settings
(continued)
Limit Value Monitoring 1 to 3
LIM_1: General enable USER LIM_2: General enable USER LIM_3: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the limit value monitoring function. Note: Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
014 014 014 015 014 017
Fig. 3-153
LIM_1: Select. meas. input LIM_2: Select. meas. input LIM_3: Select. meas. input Selecting a measuring input for limit value monitoring of the measured values. LIM_1: I> LIM_2: I> LIM_3: I> Setting for the operate value of I>. LIM_1: I>> LIM_2: I>> LIM_3: I>> Setting for the operate value of I>>. LIM_1: tI>> LIM_2: tI>> LIM_3: tI>> Setting for the operate delay of I>>. LIM_1: tI> LIM_2: tI> LIM_3: tI> Setting for the operate delay of I>. LIM_1: I< LIM_2: I< LIM_3: I< Setting for the operate value of I<. LIM_1: tI< LIM_2: tI< LIM_3: tI< Setting for the operate delay of I<. LIM_1: I<< LIM_2: I<< LIM_3: I<< Setting for the operate value of I<<. LIM_1: tI<< LIM_2: tI<< LIM_3: tI<< Setting for the operate delay of I<<.
019 111 019 112 019 113
Fig. 3-152
015 116 016 116 017 114
Fig. 3-153
015 117 016 117 017 117
Fig. 3-153
015 121 016 121 017 121
Fig. 3-153
015 120 016 120 017 120
Fig. 3-153
015 118 016 118 017 118
Fig. 3-153
015 122 016 122 017 122
Fig. 3-153
015 119 016 119 017 119
Fig. 3-153
015 123 016 123 017 123
Fig. 3-153
7-60
7 Settings
(continued)
Logic
LOGIC: General enable USER Enabling or disabling the logic function. LOGIC: Set 1 USER LOGIC: Set 2 USER LOGIC: Set 3 USER LOGIC: Set 4 USER LOGIC: Set 5 USER LOGIC: Set 6 USER LOGIC: Set 7 USER LOGIC: Set 8 USER These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function. LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.11 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.12 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.13 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.14 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.15 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.16 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.17 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.18 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.19 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.20 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.21 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.22 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.23 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.24 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.25 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.26 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.27 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.28 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.29 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.30 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.31 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.32 These settings assign functions to the outputs.
031 099
Fig. 3-155 Fig: 3-154, 3-155
034 030 034 031 034 032 034 033 034 034 034 035 034 036 034 037
Fig. 3-155 Fig. 3-155
030 000 030 004 030 008 030 012 030 016 030 020 030 024 030 028 030 032 030 036 030 040 030 044 030 048 030 052 030 056 030 060 030 064 030 068 030 072 030 076 030 080 030 084 030 088 030 092 030 096 031 000 031 004 031 008 031 012 031 016 031 020 031 024
7-61
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 3 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 4 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 5 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 6 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 7 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 8 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 9 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 10 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 11 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 12 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 13 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 14 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 15 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 16 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 17 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 18 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 19 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 20 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 21 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 22 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 23 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 24 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 25 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 26 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 27 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 28 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 29 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 30 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 31 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 32 These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
030 001 030 005 030 009 030 013 030 017 030 021 030 025 030 029 030 033 030 037 030 041 030 045 030 049 030 053 030 057 030 061 030 065 030 069 030 073 030 077 030 081 030 085 030 089 030 093 030 097 031 001 031 005 031 009 031 013 031 017 031 021 031 025
Fig. 3-155
7-62
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 LOGIC: Time t1 output 2 LOGIC: Time t1 output 3 LOGIC: Time t1 output 4 LOGIC: Time t1 output 5 LOGIC: Time t1 output 6 LOGIC: Time t1 output 7 LOGIC: Time t1 output 8 LOGIC: Time t1 output 9 LOGIC: Time t1 output 10 LOGIC: Time t1 output 11 LOGIC: Time t1 output 12 LOGIC: Time t1 output 13 LOGIC: Time t1 output 14 LOGIC: Time t1 output 15 LOGIC: Time t1 output 16 LOGIC: Time t1 output 17 LOGIC: Time t1 output 18 LOGIC: Time t1 output 19 LOGIC: Time t1 output 20 LOGIC: Time t1 output 21 LOGIC: Time t1 output 22 LOGIC: Time t1 output 23 LOGIC: Time t1 output 24 LOGIC: Time t1 output 25 LOGIC: Time t1 output 26 LOGIC: Time t1 output 27 LOGIC: Time t1 output 28 LOGIC: Time t1 output 29 LOGIC: Time t1 output 30 LOGIC: Time t1 output 31 LOGIC: Time t1 output 32 Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
030 002 030 006 030 010 030 014 030 018 030 022 030 026 030 030 030 034 030 038 030 042 030 046 030 050 030 054 030 058 030 062 030 066 030 070 030 074 030 078 030 082 030 086 030 090 030 094 030 098 031 002 031 006 031 010 031 014 031 018 031 022 031 026
Fig. 3-155
7-63
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 LOGIC: Time t2 output 2 LOGIC: Time t2 output 3 LOGIC: Time t2 output 4 LOGIC: Time t2 output 5 LOGIC: Time t2 output 6 LOGIC: Time t2 output 7 LOGIC: Time t2 output 8 LOGIC: Time t2 output 9 LOGIC: Time t2 output 10 LOGIC: Time t2 output 11 LOGIC: Time t2 output 12 LOGIC: Time t2 output 13 LOGIC: Time t2 output 14 LOGIC: Time t2 output 15 LOGIC: Time t2 output 16 LOGIC: Time t2 output 17 LOGIC: Time t2 output 18 LOGIC: Time t2 output 19 LOGIC: Time t2 output 20 LOGIC: Time t2 output 21 LOGIC: Time t2 output 22 LOGIC: Time t2 output 23 LOGIC: Time t2 output 24 LOGIC: Time t2 output 25 LOGIC: Time t2 output 26 LOGIC: Time t2 output 27 LOGIC: Time t2 output 28 LOGIC: Time t2 output 29 LOGIC: Time t2 output 30 LOGIC: Time t2 output 31 LOGIC: Time t2 output 32 Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs. Note:
030 003 030 007 030 011 030 015 030 019 030 023 030 027 030 031 030 035 030 039 030 043 030 047 030 051 030 055 030 059 030 063 030 067 030 071 030 075 030 079 030 083 030 087 030 091 030 095 030 099 031 003 031 007 031 011 031 015 031 019 031 023 031 027
Fig. 3-155
This setting has no effect in the minimum time operating mode.
7-64
7 Settings
(continued)
044 000 Fig. 3-161 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1 044 002 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2 044 004 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 3 044 006 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 4 044 008 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 5 044 010 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 6 044 012 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 7 044 014 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 8 044 016 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 9 044 018 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 10 044 020 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 11 044 022 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 12 044 024 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 13 044 026 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 14 044 028 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 15 044 030 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 16 044 032 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 17 044 034 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 18 044 036 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 19 044 038 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 20 044 040 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 21 044 042 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 22 044 044 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 23 044 046 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 24 044 048 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 25 044 050 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 26 044 052 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 27 044 054 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 28 044 056 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 29 044 058 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 30 044 060 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 31 044 062 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 32 These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic equation.
7-65
7 Settings
(continued)
044 001 Fig. 3-161 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t) 044 003 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t) 044 005 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 3(t) 044 007 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 4(t) 044 009 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 5(t) 044 011 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 6(t) 044 013 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 7(t) 044 015 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 8(t) 044 017 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 9(t) 044 019 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t) 044 021 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.11(t) 044 023 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.12(t) 044 025 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.13(t) 044 027 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.14(t) 044 029 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.15(t) 044 031 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.16(t) 044 033 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.17(t) 044 035 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.18(t) 044 037 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.19(t) 044 039 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.20(t) 044 041 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.21(t) 044 043 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.22(t) 044 045 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.23(t) 044 047 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.24(t) 044 049 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.25(t) 044 051 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.26(t) 044 053 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.27(t) 044 055 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.28(t) 044 057 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.29(t) 044 059 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.30(t) 044 061 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.31(t) 044 063 LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.32(t) These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic equation.
7-66
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.3 Main function
Parameter Subsets
Fig. 3-37 Fig. 3-37 Fig. 3-37 Fig. 3-37
010 200 010 201 010 202 010 203 MAIN: Phase reversal a PSx 010 204 010 205 010 206 010 207 MAIN: Phase reversal b PSx 010 208 010 209 010 210 010 211 MAIN: Phase reversal c PSx 010 212 010 213 010 214 010 215 MAIN: Phase reversal d PSx Setting for the phase reversal function (see description for function group MAIN) for electrical machines in pumped storage power stations. Phases to be reversed (A-B swapped, B-C swapped or C-A swapped) may be set separately for ends a, b, c and d. At the same time the display M AIN : Phas e re versa l ac ti ve will be triggered unless the setting is No swap. 072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152 DIFF: Enable PSx This setting defines the parameter subset (setting group) in which differential protection is enabled. 019 010 019 040 019 041 019 042 DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx 019 011 019 043 019 044 019 045 DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-c PSx 019 014 019 046 019 047 019 048 DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-d PSx For standard connection of the P63x (see Chapter 5), the vector group ID needs to be entered. For connection reversal applied to one individual end, this can be taken into account in setting (M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I P , x ). The following algorithms apply:
Fig. 3-79
Fig. 3-83 Fig. 3-83 Fig. 3-84
Setting = ID + 6 If the addition results in a value > 12 then: Setting = (ID + 6) 12 If the phase currents of the low and high voltage sides are exchanged and if this is not accounted for by the settings at M AIN : C on n .m eas ,c irc . IP,z (where z is end a,b,c or d) a nd M AIN : C onn .me as,c irc . IY,z (where z is end a,b or c) then the algorithm is: Setting = 12 ID If an A-C-B phase sequence (or "anti-clockwise rotating field") is present then this should be entered as a setting at the P63x. In this case, the P63x will automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 set ID). For application of the P63x as machine protection, the setting must be 0 or 6 depending on the current transformer connection. 072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142 DIFF: Idiff> PSx Operate value of the differential protection function as referred to the reference current of the relevant transformer end.
Fig. 3-88
7-67
7 Settings
(continued)
072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143 DIFF: Idiff>> PSx Threshold value of the differential current which will disable the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) and of the overfluxing restraint.
Fig. 3-88
Note: If the threshold is set too high, the P63x might not trip in the presence of internal faults with transformer saturation. 072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144 DIFF: Idiff>>> PSx This setting defines the threshold value for the differential current where the differential protection is triggered regardless of restraining quantity, inrush stabilization and saturation discriminator. Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P63x can trip in the presence of external faults with transformer saturation. DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) PSx
080 000 081 000 082 000 083 000
Fig. 3-88
Fig: 3-88, 3-86
If the Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) function has detected a CT failure, then the basic operating threshold D IFF : Id iff> can be raised to a settable safe value D IF F : Id i ff> (C TS) . Please refer to the CTS function section for more details.
072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145 DIFF: m1 PSx Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range 0.5 Idiff >< IR IR,m2 . 072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146 DIFF: m2 PSx Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range IR > IR,m2 . 072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147 DIFF: IR,m2 PSx Knee point from which the characteristic runs with a set gradient of m2. 072 148 073 148 074 148 075 148 DIFF: Op.mode rush rst.PSx Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function. For application of the P63x as machine protection, harmonic restraint can be disabled by way of this setting. For application of the P63x as transformer protection, the user can select whether the harmonic restraint should operate in cross-blocking mode or selectively for one measuring system. 072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159 DIFF: RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx Operate value of the inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) of differential protection as a ratio of the second harmonic with the fundamental component of the differential current, in percent. 072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155 DIFF: 0-seq. filt.a en.PSx Enabling or disabling zero-sequence filtering for winding a. 072 156 073 156 074 156 075 156 DIFF: 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx Enabling or disabling zero-sequence filtering for winding b. 072 157 073 157 074 157 075 157 DIFF: 0-seq. filt.c en.PSx Enabling or disabling zero-sequence filtering for winding c. 072 154 073 154 074 154 075 154 DIFF: 0-seq. filt.d en.PSx Enabling or disabling zero-sequence filtering for winding d.
Fig. 3-88
Fig. 3-88
Fig. 3-88 Fig. 3-88
Fig. 3-89
Fig. 3-83 Fig. 3-83 Fig. 3-83 Fig. 3-84
7-68
7 Settings
(continued)
072 158 073 158 074 158 075 158 DIFF: Overflux.bl. en. PSx Enabling or disabling the overfluxing restraint function. 072 160 073 160 074 160 075 160 DIFF: Ov. I(5f0)/I(f0) PSx Operate value of the overfluxing restraint of differential protection as ratio of the fifth harmonic component to the fundamental wave for the differential current, in percent. 010 162 010 163 010 164 010 165 DIFF: Op.del.,trip sig.PSx The time-delay of the differential protection trip signal can be set here. 072 006 073 006 074 006 075 006 DIFF: Hyst. effective PSx The hysteresis of the pick-up characteristics may be disabled or enabled. 072 141 073 141 074 141 075 141 Ground differential protection REF_1: Enable PSx (Br: Restricted earth fault protection) REF_2: Enable 072 161 073 161 074 161 075 161 PSx 072 031 073 031 074 031 075 031 REF_3: Enable PSx This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground differential protection is enabled. 072 149 073 149 074 149 075 149 REF_1: Operating mode PSx 072 169 073 169 074 169 075 169 REF_2: Operating mode PSx 072 049 073 049 074 049 075 049 REF_3: Operating mode PSx As of version P63x -603, 3 operating modes can be selected. The 'Low imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode is the existing low impedance ground differential protection mode from version P63x 602. The alternative selectable modes are 'Low imped. / IP,max' and 'High impedance'. 080 003 081 003 082 003 083 003 REF_1: CTS effective PSx 080 004 081 004 082 004 083 004 REF_2: CTS effective PSx 080 005 081 005 082 005 083 005 REF_3: CTS effective PSx This setting determines whether the ground-differential short circuit protection associated with the corresponding CTS signal (C T S : A l a r m e n d y ) is blocked 072 150 073 150 074 150 075 150 REF_1: Idiff> PSx 072 170 073 170 074 170 075 170 REF_2: Idiff> PSx 072 040 073 040 074 040 075 040 REF_3: Idiff> PSx Operate value of the ground differential protection function as referred to the reference current of the relevant transformer end. 072 151 073 151 074 151 075 151 REF_1: Idiff>>> PSx 072 171 073 171 074 171 075 171 REF_2: Idiff>>> PSx 072 041 073 041 074 041 075 041 REF_3: Idiff>>> PSx Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the ground differential protection function independently of the restraining variable.
Fig. 3-91 Fig. 3-91
Fig. 3-88
Fig. 3-93
Fig. 3-97
Fig. 3-97
Fig. 3-97
7-69
7 Settings
(continued)
072 162 073 162 074 162 075 162 REF_1: m1 PSx 072 172 073 172 074 172 075 172 REF_2: m1 PSx 072 192 073 192 074 192 075 192 REF_3: m1 PSx Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic with the operating mode 'Low imped. / sum(IP)'.
Fig. 3-97
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the range IR < IR,m1 with the operating modes 'Low imped. / IP,max ' and 'High impedance'.
072 163 073 163 074 163 075 163 REF_1: m2 PSx 072 165 073 165 074 165 075 165 REF_2: m2 PSx 072 193 073 193 074 193 075 193 REF_3: m2 PSx Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the range IR > IR,m2 with the operating modes 'Low imped. / IP,max ' and 'High impedance'. 072 164 073 164 074 164 075 164 REF_1: IR,m2 PSx 072 166 073 166 074 166 075 166 REF_2: IR,m2 PSx 072 194 073 194 074 194 075 194 REF_3: IR,m2 PSx Knee point from which the characteristic runs with a set gradient of m2 (operating mode 'Low imped. / IP,max'). 076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050 DTOC1: Enable PSx 076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070 DTOC2: Enable PSx 076 180 077 180 078 180 079 180 DTOC3: Enable PSx This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for definite-time overcurrent protection. 076 067 077 067 078 067 079 067 DTOC1: Block tim.st. IN PSx 076 087 077 087 078 087 079 087 DTOC2: Block tim.st. IN PSx 076 108 077 108 078 108 079 108 DTOC3: Block tim.st. IN PSx This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
Fig. 3-97
Fig. 3-97
Fig. 3-100
Fig. 3-103
DTOC1: Gen.starting modePSx
076 066 077 066 078 066 079 066
076 086 077 086 078 086 079 086 DTOC2: Gen.starting modePSx 076 106 077 106 078 106 079 106 DTOC3: Gen.starting modePSx This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result in the formation of the general starting signal of DTOC protection. 076 065 077 065 078 065 079 065 DTOC1: tGS PSx 076 085 077 085 078 085 079 085 DTOC2: tGS PSx 076 107 077 107 078 107 079 107 DTOC3: tGS PSx Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
Fig: 3-102, 3-103, 3-104
Fig. 3-104
DTOC1: Rush restr.enabl PSx
076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063
076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083 DTOC2: Rush restr.enabl PSx 076 193 077 193 078 193 079 193 DTOC3: Rush restr.enabl PSx Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of differential protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Fig: 3-101, 3-102
7-70
7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC1: I> PSx DTOC2: I> PSx DTOC3: I> PSx Setting for operate value I>. DTOC1: I>> PSx DTOC2: I>> PSx DTOC3: I>> PSx Setting for operate value I>>.
076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051 076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071 076 081 077 081 078 081 079 081
Fig. 3-101
076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052 076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072 076 082 077 082 078 082 079 082
Fig. 3-101
076 053 077 053 078 053 079 053 DTOC1: I>>> PSx 076 163 077 163 078 163 079 163 DTOC2: I>>> PSx 076 183 077 183 078 183 079 183 DTOC3: I>>> PSx Setting for operate value I>>>. 076 151 077 151 078 151 079 151 DTOC1: I> dynamic PSx 076 161 077 161 078 161 079 161 DTOC2: I> dynamic PSx 076 181 077 181 078 181 079 181 DTOC3: I> dynamic PSx Setting for operate value I> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 076 152 077 152 078 152 079 152 DTOC1: I>> dynamic PSx 076 162 077 162 078 162 079 162 DTOC2: I>> dynamic PSx 076 182 077 182 078 182 079 182 DTOC3: I>> dynamic PSx Setting for operate value I>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 076 153 077 153 078 153 079 153 DTOC1: I>>> dynamic PSx 076 173 077 173 078 173 079 173 DTOC2: I>>> dynamic PSx 076 109 077 109 078 109 079 109 DTOC3: I>>> dynamic PSx Setting for operate value I>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.
Fig. 3-101
Fig. 3-101
Fig. 3-101
Fig. 3-101
DTOC1: tI> PSx DTOC2: tI> PSx DTOC3: tI> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the I> stage. DTOC1: tI>> PSx DTOC2: tI>> PSx DTOC3: tI>> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the I>> stage. DTOC1: tI>>> PSx DTOC2: tI>>> PSx DTOC3: tI>>> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the I>>> stage. DTOC1: Ineg> PSx DTOC2: Ineg> PSx DTOC3: Ineg> PSx Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage. DTOC1: Ineg>> PSx DTOC2: Ineg>> PSx DTOC3: Ineg>> PSx Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage.
076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057 076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077 076 187 077 187 078 187 079 187
Fig. 3-101
076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058 076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078 076 188 077 188 078 188 079 188
Fig. 3-101
076 059 077 059 078 059 079 059 076 169 077 169 078 169 079 169 076 189 077 189 078 189 079 189
Fig. 3-101
076 197 077 197 078 197 079 197 076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207 076 217 077 217 078 217 079 217
Fig. 3-102
076 198 077 198 078 198 079 198 076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208 076 218 077 218 078 218 079 218
Fig. 3-102
7-71
7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC1: Ineg>>> PSx DTOC2: Ineg>>> PSx DTOC3: Ineg>>> PSx Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage.
076 199 077 199 078 199 079 199 076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209 076 219 077 219 078 219 079 219
Fig. 3-102
076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200 DTOC1: Ineg> dynamic PSx 076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210 DTOC2: Ineg> dynamic PSx 076 220 077 220 078 220 079 220 DTOC3: Ineg> dynamic PSx Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201 DTOC1: Ineg>> dynamic PSx 076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211 DTOC2: Ineg>> dynamic PSx 076 221 077 221 078 221 079 221 DTOC3: Ineg>> dynamic PSx Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202 DTOC1: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx 076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212 DTOC2: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx 076 222 077 222 078 222 079 222 DTOC3: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.
Fig. 3-102
Fig. 3-102
Fig. 3-102
DTOC1: tIneg> PSx DTOC2: tIneg> PSx DTOC3: tIneg> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg> stage. DTOC1: tIneg>> PSx DTOC2: tIneg>> PSx DTOC3: tIneg>> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>> stage. DTOC1: tIneg>>> PSx DTOC2: tIneg>>> PSx DTOC3: tIneg>>> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>>> stage. DTOC1: IN> PSx DTOC2: IN> PSx DTOC3: IN> PSx Setting for operate value IN>. DTOC1: IN>> PSx DTOC2: IN>> PSx DTOC3: IN>> PSx Setting for operate value IN>>. DTOC1: IN>>> PSx DTOC2: IN>>> PSx DTOC3: IN>>> PSx Setting for operate value IN>>>.
076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203 076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213 076 223 077 223 078 223 079 223
Fig. 3-102
076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204 076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214 076 224 077 224 078 224 079 224
Fig. 3-102
076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205 076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215 076 225 077 225 078 225 079 225
Fig. 3-102
076 054 077 054 078 054 079 054 076 164 077 164 078 164 079 164 076 184 077 184 078 184 079 184
Fig. 3-103
076 055 077 055 078 055 079 055 076 165 077 165 078 165 079 165 076 185 077 185 078 185 079 185
Fig. 3-103
076 056 077 056 078 056 079 056 076 166 077 166 078 166 079 166 076 186 077 186 078 186 079 186
Fig. 3-103
7-72
7 Settings
(continued)
076 154 077 154 078 154 079 154 DTOC1: IN> dynamic PSx 076 174 077 174 078 174 079 174 DTOC2: IN> dynamic PSx 076 194 077 194 078 194 079 194 DTOC3: IN> dynamic PSx Setting for operate value IN> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 076 155 077 155 078 155 079 155 DTOC1: IN>> dynamic PSx 076 175 077 175 078 175 079 175 DTOC2: IN>> dynamic PSx 076 195 077 195 078 195 079 195 DTOC3: IN>> dynamic PSx Setting for operate value IN>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 076 156 077 156 078 156 079 156 DTOC1: IN>>> dynamic PSx 076 176 077 176 078 176 079 176 DTOC2: IN>>> dynamic PSx 076 196 077 196 078 196 079 196 DTOC3: IN>>> dynamic PSx Setting for operate value IN>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 076 060 077 060 078 060 079 060 DTOC1: tIN> PSx 076 170 077 170 078 170 079 170 DTOC2: tIN> PSx 076 190 077 190 078 190 079 190 DTOC3: tIN> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the IN> stage.
Fig. 3-103
Fig. 3-103
Fig. 3-103
Fig. 3-103
DTOC1: tIN>> PSx DTOC2: tIN>> PSx DTOC3: tIN>> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the IN>> stage. DTOC1: tIN>>> PSx DTOC2: tIN>>> PSx DTOC3: tIN>>> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the IN>>> stage.
076 061 077 061 078 061 079 061 076 171 077 171 078 171 079 171 076 191 077 191 078 191 079 191
Fig. 3-103
076 062 077 062 078 062 079 062 076 172 077 172 078 172 079 172 076 192 077 192 078 192 079 192
Fig. 3-103
7-73
7 Settings
(continued)
081 050 082 050 083 050 084 050 IDMT1: Enable PSx 081 170 082 170 083 170 084 170 IDMT2: Enable PSx 081 190 082 190 083 190 084 190 IDMT3: Enable PSx This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for inverse-time overcurrent protection. 081 068 082 068 083 068 084 068 IDMT1: Block tim.st. IN PSx 081 188 082 188 083 188 084 188 IDMT2: Block tim.st. IN PSx 081 208 082 208 083 208 084 208 IDMT3: Block tim.st. IN PSx This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
Fig. 3-107
Fig. 3-114
IDMT1: Gen.starting modePSx
081 059 082 059 083 059 084 059
081 179 082 179 083 179 084 179 IDMT2: Gen.starting modePSx 081 199 082 199 083 199 084 199 IDMT3: Gen.starting modePSx This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result in the formation of the general starting signal of IDMT protection. 081 058 082 058 083 058 084 058 IDMT1: tGS PSx 081 178 082 178 083 178 084 178 IDMT2: tGS PSx 081 198 082 198 083 198 084 198 IDMT3: tGS PSx Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
Fig: 3-113, 3-114, 3-116
Fig. 3-116
IDMT1: Rush restr.enabl PSx
081 060 082 060 083 060 084 060
081 180 082 180 083 180 084 180 IDMT2: Rush restr.enabl PSx 081 200 082 200 083 200 084 200 IDMT3: Rush restr.enabl PSx Setting as to whether the inrush restraint of differential protection shall be able to block the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. 081 051 082 051 083 051 084 051 IDMT1: Iref,P PSx 081 171 082 171 083 171 084 171 IDMT2: Iref,P PSx 081 191 082 191 083 191 084 191 IDMT3: Iref,P PSx Setting for the reference current (phase current system). 081 052 082 052 083 052 084 052 IDMT1: Iref,P dynamic PSx 081 172 082 172 083 172 084 172 IDMT2: Iref,P dynamic PSx 081 192 082 192 083 192 084 192 IDMT3: Iref,P dynamic PSx Setting for the reference current (phase current system) in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 081 053 082 053 083 053 084 053 IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx 081 173 082 173 083 173 084 173 IDMT2: Characteristic P PSx 081 193 082 193 083 193 084 193 IDMT3: Characteristic P PSx Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system). 081 054 082 054 083 054 084 054 IDMT1: Factor kt,P PSx 081 174 082 174 083 174 084 174 IDMT2: Factor kt,P PSx 081 194 082 194 083 194 084 194 IDMT3: Factor kt,P PSx Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
Fig: 3-112, 3-113
Fig. 3-112
Fig. 3-112
Fig. 3-112
Fig. 3-112
7-74
7 Settings
(continued)
081 057 082 057 083 057 084 057 IDMT1: Min. trip t. P PSx 081 177 082 177 083 177 084 177 IDMT2: Min. trip t. P PSx 081 197 082 197 083 197 084 197 IDMT3: Min. trip t. P PSx Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system).
Fig. 3-112
IDMT1: Hold time P
PSx
081 055 082 055 083 055 084 055
081 175 082 175 083 175 084 175 IDMT2: Hold time P PSx 081 195 082 195 083 195 084 195 IDMT3: Hold time P PSx Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out (phase current system). 081 056 082 056 083 056 084 056 IDMT1: Release P PSx 081 176 082 176 083 176 084 176 IDMT2: Release P PSx 081 196 082 196 083 196 084 196 IDMT3: Release P PSx Setting for the reset characteristic (phase current system). 081 111 082 111 083 111 084 111 IDMT1: Iref,neg PSx 081 121 082 121 083 121 084 121 IDMT2: Iref,neg PSx 081 131 082 131 083 131 084 131 IDMT3: Iref,neg PSx Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system). 081 112 082 112 083 112 084 112 IDMT1: Iref,neg dynamic PSx 081 122 082 122 083 122 084 122 IDMT2: Iref,neg dynamic PSx 081 132 082 132 083 132 084 132 IDMT3: Iref,neg dynamic PSx Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system). This value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 081 113 082 113 083 113 084 113 IDMT1: Character. neg. PSx 081 123 082 123 083 123 084 123 IDMT2: Character. neg. PSx 081 133 082 133 083 133 084 133 IDMT3: Character. neg. PSx Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system). 081 114 082 114 083 114 084 114 IDMT1: Factor kt,neg PSx 081 124 082 124 083 124 084 124 IDMT2: Factor kt,neg PSx 081 134 082 134 083 134 084 134 IDMT3: Factor kt,neg PSx Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence current system). 081 117 082 117 083 117 084 117 IDMT1: Min. trip t. neg PSx 081 127 082 127 083 127 084 127 IDMT2: Min. trip t. neg PSx 081 137 082 137 083 137 084 137 IDMT3: Min. trip t. neg PSx Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (negative-sequence current system). 081 115 082 115 083 115 084 115 IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx 081 125 082 125 083 125 084 125 IDMT2: Hold time neg PSx 081 135 082 135 083 135 084 135 IDMT3: Hold time neg PSx Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out (negative-sequence current system). 081 116 082 116 083 116 084 116 IDMT1: Release neg PSx 081 126 082 126 083 126 084 126 IDMT2: Release neg PSx 081 136 082 136 083 136 084 136 IDMT3: Release neg PSx Setting for the reset characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
Fig: 3-112, 3115
Fig. 3-112
Fig. 3-113
Fig. 3-113
Fig. 3-113
Fig. 3-113
Fig. 3-113
Fig. 3-113
Fig. 3-113
7-75
7 Settings
(continued)
081 061 082 061 083 061 084 061 IDMT1: Iref,N PSx 081 181 082 181 083 181 084 181 IDMT2: Iref,N PSx 081 201 082 201 083 201 084 201 IDMT3: Iref,N PSx Setting for the reference current (residual current system). 081 062 082 062 083 062 084 062 IDMT1: Iref,N dynamic PSx 081 182 082 182 083 182 084 182 IDMT2: Iref,N dynamic PSx 081 202 082 202 083 202 084 202 IDMT3: Iref,N dynamic PSx Setting for the reference current (residual current system) in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. 081 063 082 063 083 063 084 063 IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx 081 183 082 183 083 183 084 183 IDMT2: Characteristic N PSx 081 203 082 203 083 203 084 203 IDMT3: Characteristic N PSx Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system). 081 064 082 064 083 064 084 064 IDMT1: Factor kt,N PSx 081 184 082 184 083 184 084 184 IDMT2: Factor kt,N PSx 081 204 082 204 083 204 084 204 IDMT3: Factor kt,N PSx Setting for the kt,N factor of the starting characteristic (residual current system). 081 067 082 067 083 067 084 067 IDMT1: Min. trip t. N PSx 081 187 082 187 083 187 084 187 IDMT2: Min. trip t. N PSx 081 207 082 207 083 207 084 207 IDMT3: Min. trip t. N PSx Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (residual current system). 081 065 082 065 083 065 084 065 IDMT1: Hold time N PSx 081 185 082 185 083 185 084 185 IDMT2: Hold time N PSx 081 205 082 205 083 205 084 205 IDMT3: Hold time N PSx Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out (residual current system). 081 066 082 066 083 066 084 066 IDMT1: Release N PSx 081 186 082 186 083 186 084 186 IDMT2: Release N PSx 081 206 082 206 083 206 084 206 IDMT3: Release N PSx Setting for the reset characteristic (residual current system).
Fig. 3-114
Fig. 3-114
Fig. 3-114
Fig. 3-114
Fig. 3-114
Fig. 3-114
Fig. 3-114
7-76
7 Settings
(continued)
081 070 082 070 083 070 084 070 Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Enable PSx 081 090 082 090 083 090 084 090 THRM2: Enable PSx This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload protection is enabled. 081 074 082 074 083 074 084 074 THRM1: Iref PSx 081 094 082 094 083 094 084 094 THRM2: Iref PSx Setting for the reference current. 081 075 082 075 083 075 084 075 THRM1: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx 081 095 082 095 083 095 084 095 THRM2: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx Starting factor k must be set in accordance with the maximum permissible continuous thermal current of the protected object: I therm,prot.object k= Inom,prot.object 081 082 082 082 083 082 084 082 THRM1: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx 081 102 082 102 083 102 084 102 THRM2: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow (Ibl: base line current). 081 083 082 083 083 083 084 083 THRM1: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx 081 103 082 103 083 103 084 103 THRM2: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current flow (Ibl: base line current).
Fig. 3-119
Fig. 3-123
Fig. 3-123
Fig. 3-123
Fig. 3-123
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
081 077 082 077 083 077 084 077 THRM1: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx 081 097 082 097 083 097 084 097 THRM2: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object. 081 080 082 080 083 080 084 080 THRM1: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx 081 100 082 100 083 100 084 100 THRM2: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.
Fig. 3-123
Fig. 3-123
Note: This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured via the PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
081 072 082 072 083 072 084 072 THRM1: Select CTA PSx 081 092 082 092 083 092 084 092 THRM2: Select CTA PSx Select the mode of the coolant temperature acquisition. Select from: No data acquisition. A default temperature value is used instead. Data acquisition via the PT 100 input Data acquisition via the 20 mA input. 081 081 082 081 083 081 084 081 THRM1: Default CTA PSx 081 101 082 101 083 101 084 101 THRM2: Default CTA PSx Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if there is no data acquisition for the coolant temperature.
Fig. 3-122
Fig. 3-123
7-77
7 Settings
(continued)
081 073 082 073 083 073 084 073 THRM1: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx 081 093 082 093 083 093 084 093 THRM2: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will be blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
Fig. 3-122
THRM1: Rel. O/T warning PSx THRM2: Rel. O/T warning PSx Setting for the operate value of the warning stage. THRM1: Rel. O/T trip PSx THRM2: Rel. O/T trip PSx Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.
081 079 082 079 083 079 084 079 081 099 082 099 083 099 084 099
Fig. 3-123
081 076 082 076 083 076 084 076 081 096 082 096 083 096 084 096
Fig. 3-123
Note: If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the setting here will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter will be hidden as far as the local control panel is concerned. 081 078 082 078 083 078 084 078 THRM1: Hysteresis trip PSx 081 098 082 098 083 098 084 098 THRM2: Hysteresis trip PSx Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
081 085 082 085 083 085 084 085 THRM1: Warning pre-trip PSx 081 105 082 105 083 105 084 105 THRM2: Warning pre-trip PSx A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the warning time and the trip time is set here.
Fig. 3-123
Fig. 3-123
7-78
7 Settings
(continued)
076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000 V<>: Enable PSx This setting defines the parameter subset in which time-voltage protection is enabled.
Fig. 3-125
V<>: V> PSx Setting for operate value V>. V<>: V>> PSx Setting for operate value V>>.
076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005 V<>: tV> PSx Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>. 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006 V<>: tV>> PSx Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>. 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007 V<>: V< PSx Setting for operate value V<.
V<>: V<< PSx Setting for operate value V<<.
076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046 V<>: Vmin> PSx Setting for the operate value Vmin>. 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009 V<>: tV< PSx Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<. 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010 V<>: tV<< PSx Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<. 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 V<>: tTransient PSx Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages. 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048 V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured voltages.
Fig. 3-126
7-79
7 Settings
(continued)
018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199 f<>: Enable PSx This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency protection is enabled. 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123 f<>: Oper. mode f1 PSx 018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147 f<>: Oper. mode f2 PSx 018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171 f<>: Oper. mode f3 PSx 018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195 f<>: Oper. mode f4 PSx Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency protection. 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103 f<>: f1 PSx 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127 f<>: f2 PSx 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151 f<>: f3 PSx 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175 f<>: f4 PSx Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered. 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107 f<>: tf1 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131 f<>: tf2 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155 f<>: tf3 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179 f<>: tf4 PSx Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
Fig. 3-128
Fig. 3-131
Fig. 3-131
Fig. 3-131
f<>: df1/dt PSx f<>: df2/dt PSx f<>: df3/dt PSx f<>: df4/dt PSx Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored
018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
Fig. 3-131
Note: This setting is effective only if operating mode 'f with df/dt' has been selected. f<>: Delta f1 PSx f<>: Delta f2 PSx f<>: Delta f3 PSx f<>: Delta f4 PSx Setting for Delta f.
018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115 018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139 018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163 018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
Fig. 3-131
Note: This setting is effective only if operating mode 'f w. Delta f/Delta t' has been selected. f<>: Delta t1 PSx f<>: Delta t2 PSx f<>: Delta t3 PSx f<>: Delta t4 PSx Setting for Delta t.
018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167 018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
Fig. 3-131
Note: This setting is effective only if operating mode 'f w. Delta f/Delta t' has been selected.
7-80
7 Settings
(continued)
081 210 082 210 083 210 084 210 V/f: Enable PSx This setting defines the parameter subset in which overfluxing protection is enabled. 081 211 082 211 083 211 084 211 V/f: V/f> (alarm) PSx Setting for the operate value of the warning stage. 081 212 082 212 083 212 084 212 V/f: V/f(t)> PSx Setting for the operate value of the time-dependent elements. 081 213 082 213 083 213 084 213 V/f: V/f>> PSx Setting for the operate value of the time-independent elements. 081 214 082 214 083 214 084 214 V/f: tV/f> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the warning stage. 081 217 082 217 083 217 084 217 V/f: t at V/f=1.05 PSx 081 218 082 218 083 218 084 218 V/f: t at V/f=1.10 PSx 081 219 082 219 083 219 084 219 V/f: t at V/f=1.15 PSx 081 220 082 220 083 220 084 220 V/f: t at V/f=1.20 PSx 081 221 082 221 083 221 084 221 V/f: t at V/f=1.25 PSx 081 222 082 222 083 222 084 222 V/f: t at V/f=1.30 PSx 081 223 082 223 083 223 084 223 V/f: t at V/f=1.35 PSx 081 224 082 224 083 224 084 224 V/f: t at V/f=1.40 PSx 081 225 082 225 083 225 084 225 V/f: t at V/f=1.45 PSx 081 226 082 226 083 226 084 226 V/f: t at V/f=1.50 PSx 081 227 082 227 083 227 084 227 V/f: t at V/f=1.55 PSx 081 228 082 228 083 228 084 228 V/f: t at V/f=1.60 PSx The value pairs set here for overfluxing and trip time define the tripping characteristic of the inverse-time trip stage for overfluxing protection. The value set at V/f = 1.60 is also valid for V/f > 1.60. 081 230 082 230 083 230 084 230 V/f: Reset time PSx The value set here for the reset time defines the decreasing rate for the overfluxing protection memory. 081 229 082 229 083 229 084 229 V/f: tV/f>> PSx Setting for the operate delay of the definite-time trip stage.
Fig. 3-132
Fig. 3-134 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-135 Fig. 3-134 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-137
Fig. 3-135
7-81
7 Settings
(continued)
001 118 001 119 001 120 001 121 CTS: Enable PSx This setting defines the parameter subset in which current transformer supervision (CTS) is enabled. 001 111 001 115 001 116 001 117 CTS: Ipos> PSx Setting for operate value Ipos> as a quantity normalized to Iref. (Ipos = positive-sequence current) 001 102 001 103 001 104 001 105 CTS: Ineg/Ipos> PSx 001 122 001 123 001 124 001 125 CTS: Ineg/Ipos>> PSx Setting for the operate value for the ratio Ineg/Ipos. (Ineg = negative-sequence current, Ipos = positive-sequence current) 001 126 001 127 001 128 001 129 CTS: Operate delay PSx
Fig. 3-140
Fig. 3-142
Fig. 3-142 Fig. 3-142
Fig: 3-145, 3146 Fig: 3-145, 3-146
Setting for the operate delay. CTS: t(Latch) PSx Setting for the latching time-delay.
001 130 001 131 001 132 001 133
081 038 082 038 083 038 084 038 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCM_1: Enable PSx 081 039 082 039 083 039 084 039 MCM_2: Enable PSx 081 040 082 040 083 040 084 040 MCM_3: Enable PSx 081 041 082 041 083 041 084 041 MCM_4: Enable PSx This setting defines the parameter subset in which measuring-circuit monitoring (MCM_x) is enabled.
Fig. 3-147
MCM_1: Ineg/Ipos> MCM_2: Ineg/Ipos> MCM_3: Ineg/Ipos> MCM_4: Ineg/Ipos>
PSx PSx PSx PSx
081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042 081 043 082 043 083 043 084 043 081 044 082 044 083 044 084 044 081 045 082 045 083 045 084 045
Fig. 3-148
Setting for the operate value for the ratio Ineg/Ipos. (Ineg = negative-sequence current, Ipos = positive-sequence current) MCM_1: Operate delay PSx MCM_2: Operate delay PSx MCM_3: Operate delay PSx MCM_4: Operate delay PSx Setting for the operate delay.
081 046 082 046 083 046 084 046 081 047 082 047 083 047 084 047 081 048 082 048 083 048 084 048 081 049 082 049 083 049 084 049
Fig. 3-148
7-82
8 Information and Control Functions
Information and Control Functions
The P63x generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control panel. All this information can be found in the Operation and Events folders in the menu tree. Note: In the following tables the localization of the corresponding function description is indicated in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3-xxx" to a page. 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.1.1 Measured Data Input Healthy Cyclic Values Measured Operating Data
004 134
MEASI: Current IDC Display of the input current. MEASI: Current IDC p.u. Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom. MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom. MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin Display of the scaled linearized value. MEASI: Temperature Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. MEASI: Temperature p.u. Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer referred to 100C.
Fig. 3-22 Fig. 3-22
004 135
004 136
Fig: 3-22, 3-23,3-150 Fig. 3-23 Fig: 3-24, 3-151 Fig. 3-24
004 180
004 133
004 221
MEASO: Current A-1 MEASO: Current A-2 Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2: channel 2) MAIN: Date Date display. Note: The date can also be set here. MAIN: Time of day Display of the time of day. Note: The time can also be set here.
005 100 005 099
Fig. 3-32
Main function
003 090
Fig. 3-59
003 091
Fig. 3-59
8-1

(continued)
MAIN: Time switching Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
003 095
Fig. 3-59
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or communication interfaces. Note: The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time. In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received. With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the device must be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other. 004 040 Fig. 3-46 MAIN: Frequency f Display of system frequency.
005 101 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a prim. 005 102 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b prim. 005 103 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Curr. IP,max,c prim. 005 115 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Curr. IP,max,d prim. Display of the maximum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 005 162 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay a 006 162 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay b 007 162 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay c 008 162 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay d Display of the delayed maximum current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 005 161 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: IP,max prim.stored a 006 161 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: IP,max prim.stored b 007 161 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: IP,max prim.stored c 008 161 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: IP,max prim.stored d Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 005 104 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Curr. IP,min,a prim. 005 105 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Curr. IP,min,b prim. 005 106 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Curr. IP,min,c prim. 005 117 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Curr. IP,min,d prim. Display of the minimum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 005 021 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IA,a prim. 005 022 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IA,b prim. 005 023 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IA,c prim. 005 024 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IA,d prim. Display of phase current A of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity.
8-2

(continued)
006 021 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IB,a prim. 006 022 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IB,b prim. 006 023 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IB,c prim. 006 024 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IB,d prim. Display of phase current B of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 007 021 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IC,a prim. 007 022 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IC,b prim. 007 023 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IC,c prim. 007 024 Fig. 3-41 MAIN: Current IC,d prim. Display of phase current C of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 005 125 Page: 3-74 MAIN: Current Ineg a prim. 005 129 MAIN: Current Ineg b prim. 005 136 MAIN: Current Ineg c prim. 005 140 MAIN: Current Ineg d prim. Display of the negative-sequence current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 005 127 Page: 3-74 MAIN: Current Ipos a prim. 005 134 MAIN: Current Ipos b prim. 005 138 MAIN: Current Ipos c prim. 005 146 MAIN: Current Ipos d prim. Display of the positive-sequence current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 005 121 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IN,a prim. 005 122 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IN,b prim. 005 123 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IN,c prim. 005 124 Fig. 3-43 MAIN: Current IN,d prim. Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. 005 131 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IY,a prim. 005 132 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IY,b prim. 005 133 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IY,c prim. Display of the current value as a primary quantity measured by the P63x at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers.
MAIN: Voltage V prim. Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a p.u. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b p.u. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,d p.u. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,c p.u. Display of the maximum phase current, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.
005 018
Fig. 3-45 Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41
005 111 005 112 005 116 005 113
8-3

(continued)
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay a MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay b MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay c MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay d Display of the delayed maximum phase current, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IA,a p.u. MAIN: Current IA,b p.u. MAIN: Current IA,c p.u. MAIN: Current IA,d p.u.
005 163 006 163 007 163 008 163
Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41
005 031 005 032 005 033 005 039
Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41
Display of phase current A, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.

005 038 Fig. 3-44 MAIN: Current IA,add p.u. 006 038 Fig. 3-44 MAIN: Current IB,add p.u. 007 038 Fig. 3-44 MAIN: Current IC,add p.u. Display of phase current A, B or C, respectively, for the virtual end, referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M A IN : C ur r e n t s um mati on . 005 155 Fig. 3-44 MAIN: Current IN,add p.u.
Display of residual current for the virtual end, referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M AIN : Cu rren t s umm a tion . 005 114 Fig. 3-44 MAIN: IP,max,add p.u. Display of the maximum phase current for the virtual end, referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M AIN : Curr en t su mma tion. MAIN: IP,min,add p.u.
005 110
Fig. 3-44
Display of the minimum phase current for the virtual end, referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M AIN : Curr en t su mma tion. MAIN: Curr. Ineg,add p.u.
005 149
Page: 3-74
Display of negative-sequence current for the virtual end, referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M AIN : Curr en t su mma tion. 005 150 Page: 3-74 MAIN: Curr. Ipos,add p.u. Display of positive-sequence current for the virtual end, referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M AIN : Curr en t su mma tion. MAIN: Current IB,a p.u. MAIN: Current IB,b p.u. MAIN: Current IB,c p.u. MAIN: Current IB,d p.u. MAIN: Current IC,a p.u. MAIN: Current IC,b p.u. MAIN: Current IC,c p.u. MAIN: Current IC,d p.u. MAIN: Current Ineg a p.u. 8-4
006 031 006 032 006 033 006 034
Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41
Display of phase current B, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.

007 031 007 032 007 033 007 034
Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41
Display of phase current C, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.

005 126
Page: 3-74

(continued)
MAIN: Current Ineg b p.u. MAIN: Current Ineg c p.u. MAIN: Current Ineg d p.u. Display of the negative-sequence current, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.
005 130 005 137 005 145
005 141 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IN,a p.u. 005 142 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IN,b p.u. 005 143 Fig. 3-42 MAIN: Current IN,c p.u. 005 144 Fig. 3-43 MAIN: Current IN,d p.u. Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored a MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored b MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored c MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored d Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom. MAIN: Curr. IP,min,a p.u. MAIN: Curr. IP,min,b p.u. MAIN: Curr. IP,min,c p.u. MAIN: Curr. IP,min,d p.u. Display of the minimum phase current, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom. MAIN: Current Ipos a p.u. MAIN: Current Ipos b p.u. MAIN: Current Ipos c p.u. MAIN: Current Ipos d p.u. Display of the positive-sequence current, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IY,a p.u. MAIN: Current IY,b p.u. MAIN: Current IY,c p.u.
005 160 006 160 007 160 008 160
Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41 Fig: 3-40, 3-41
005 107 005 108 005 109 005 118
Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-41
005 128 005 135 005 139 005 147
Page: 3-74
005 151 005 152 005 153
Fig. 3-42 Fig. 3-42 Fig. 3-42
Display of the current value as a quantity referred to Inom measured by the P63x at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers. 005 019 Fig. 3-45 MAIN: Voltage V p.u. Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, referred to Vnom. MAIN: Angle phi AB, end a MAIN: Angle phi AB, end b MAIN: Angle phi AB, end c MAIN: Angle phi AB, end d Display of the phase shift between A-B, end a, b, c or d, respectively. MAIN: Angle phi BC, end a MAIN: Angle phi BC, end b MAIN: Angle phi BC, end c MAIN: Angle phi BC, end d Display of the phase shift between B-C, end a, b, c or d, respectively.
005 089 005 092 005 093 005 095
Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47
006 089 006 092 006 093 006 095
8-5

(continued)
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end a MAIN: Angle phi CA, end b MAIN: Angle phi CA, end c MAIN: Angle phi CA, end d Display of the phase shift between C-A, end a, b, c or d, respectively. MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-b MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-b MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-b Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase A, B or C, respectively. MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-c MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-c MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-c Display of the phase shift between ends a and c for phase A, B or C, respectively. MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-d MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-d MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-d Display of the phase shift between ends a and d for phase A, B or C, respectively.
007 089 007 092 007 093 007 095
Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-48 Fig. 3-48 Fig. 3-48
005 090 006 090 007 090
005 091 006 091 007 091
Fig. 3-48 Fig. 3-48 Fig. 3-48
005 094 006 094 007 094
Fig. 3-48 Fig. 3-48 Fig. 3-48
005 077 Fig. 3-49 MAIN: Angle phi NY, end a 005 078 Fig. 3-49 MAIN: Angle phi NY, end b 005 079 Fig. 3-49 MAIN: Angle phi NY, end c Display of the phase displacement between the residual current calculated by the P63x from the three phase currents and the current measured at the T14, T24 or T34 transformer.
DIFF: Diff. current 1 DIFF: Diff. current 2 DIFF: Diff. current 3 Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref. DIFF: Restrain. current 1 DIFF: Restrain. current 2 DIFF: Restrain. current 3 Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref.
005 080 006 080 007 080
Fig. 3-92 Fig. 3-92 Fig. 3-92
005 081 006 081 007 081
Fig. 3-92 Fig. 3-92 Fig. 3-92
Ground differential protection REF_1: Diff. current, REF_1

(Br: Restricted earth fault protection)
008 080 008 070 008 060
Fig. 3-98
REF_2: Diff. current, REF_2 REF_3: Diff. current, REF_3 Display of the differential current referred to Iref. REF_1: Restrain.curr.,REF_1 REF_2: Restrain.curr.,REF_2 REF_3: Restrain.curr.,REF_3 Display of the restraining current referred to Iref.
008 081 008 071 008 061
Fig. 3-98
8-6

(continued)
004 150 Fig. 3-123 Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Status replica, TH1 004 175 THRM2: Status replica, TH2 Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function, THRM1 or THRM2. 004 151 Fig. 3-123 THRM1: Object temperat.,TH1 004 171 THRM2: Object temperat.TH2 Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM1 or THRM2. 004 154 Fig. 3-123 THRM1: Coolant temp. TH1 004 174 THRM2: Coolant temp. TH2 Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object. Depending on the setting at T HR M1 : Se lec t C TA or T HRM 2: Se lec t CT A for coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed:
Setting Default temp. value : Display of the set temperature value. Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via the 20 mA input. THRM1: Pre-trip t. left,TH1 THRM2: Pre-trip t. left,TH2 Display of the time remaining before the THRM1 or THRM2 thermal overload protection function reaches the trip threshold.
004 153 004 173
Fig. 3-123
004 204 Fig. 3-123 THRM1: Stat. repl., p.u.TH1 004 207 THRM2: Stat. repl., p.u.TH2 Display of the buffer content of the THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, thermal overload protection function referred to a buffer content of 100%. 004 205 Fig. 3-123 THRM1: Object temp. p.u. 1 004 208 THRM2: Object temp. p.u. 2 Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, referred to 100C. 004 206 Fig. 3-123 THRM1: Coolant temp. p.u. 1 004 209 THRM2: Coolant temp. p.u. 2 Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object referred to 100C. 004 170 Fig. 3-123 THRM1: Temp. offset repl. 1 004 190 THRM2: Temp. offset repl. 2 Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
8-7

(continued)
V/f: Excitation V/f p.u. Display of the V/f ratio, as a quantity referred to Vnom/fnom.
004 220
Fig: 3-133, 3-134, 3-135,3-138
004 222 Fig. 3-138 V/f: Status replica in % Display of the buffer content in % of the overfluxing protection function. 004 223 Fig. 3-138 V/f: Status replica p.u. Display of the buffer content as a quantity referred to 100 % of the buffer content of the overfluxing protection function.
8.1.1.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
Physical State Signals

106 010 106 012 106 014 106 016 106 018 106 020 106 022 106 024 106 026 106 028 106 030 106 032 106 034 106 036 106 038 106 040 106 042 106 044 106 046 106 048 106 050 106 052 106 054 106 056 106 058 106 060 106 062 106 064 106 066 106 068 106 070 106 072
GOOSE: Output 1 state GOOSE: Output 2 state GOOSE: Output 3 state GOOSE: Output 4 state GOOSE: Output 5 state GOOSE: Output 6 state GOOSE: Output 7 state GOOSE: Output 8 state GOOSE: Output 9 state GOOSE: Output 10 state GOOSE: Output 11 state GOOSE: Output 12 state GOOSE: Output 13 state GOOSE: Output 14 state GOOSE: Output 15 state GOOSE: Output 16 state GOOSE: Output 17 state GOOSE: Output 18 state GOOSE: Output 19 state GOOSE: Output 20 state GOOSE: Output 21 state GOOSE: Output 22 state GOOSE: Output 23 state GOOSE: Output 24 state GOOSE: Output 25 state GOOSE: Output 26 state GOOSE: Output 27 state GOOSE: Output 28 state GOOSE: Output 29 state GOOSE: Output 30 state GOOSE: Output 31 state GOOSE: Output 32 state Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
8-8

(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 state GOOSE: Input 2 state GOOSE: Input 3 state GOOSE: Input 4 state GOOSE: Input 5 state GOOSE: Input 6 state GOOSE: Input 7 state GOOSE: Input 8 state GOOSE: Input 9 state GOOSE: Input 10 state GOOSE: Input 11 state GOOSE: Input 12 state GOOSE: Input 13 state GOOSE: Input 14 state GOOSE: Input 15 state GOOSE: Input 16 state Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
106 200 106 201 106 202 106 203 106 204 106 205 106 206 106 207 106 208 106 209 106 210 106 211 106 212 106 213 106 214 106 215
8-9

(continued)
GSSE: Output 1 state GSSE: Output 2 state GSSE: Output 3 state GSSE: Output 4 state GSSE: Output 5 state GSSE: Output 6 state GSSE: Output 7 state GSSE: Output 8 state GSSE: Output 9 state GSSE: Output 10 state GSSE: Output 11 state GSSE: Output 12 state GSSE: Output 13 state GSSE: Output 14 state GSSE: Output 15 state GSSE: Output 16 state GSSE: Output 17 state GSSE: Output 18 state GSSE: Output 19 state GSSE: Output 20 state GSSE: Output 21 state GSSE: Output 22 state GSSE: Output 23 state GSSE: Output 24 state GSSE: Output 25 state GSSE: Output 26 state GSSE: Output 27 state GSSE: Output 28 state GSSE: Output 29 state GSSE: Output 30 state GSSE: Output 31 state GSSE: Output 32 state Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.
104 100 104 103 104 106 104 109 104 112 104 115 104 118 104 121 104 124 104 127 104 130 104 133 104 136 104 139 104 142 104 145 104 148 104 151 104 154 104 157 104 160 104 163 104 166 104 169 104 172 104 175 104 178 104 181 104 184 104 187 104 190 104 193
8-10

(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 state GSSE: Input 2 state GSSE: Input 3 state GSSE: Input 4 state GSSE: Input 5 state GSSE: Input 6 state GSSE: Input 7 state GSSE: Input 8 state GSSE: Input 9 state GSSE: Input 10 state GSSE: Input 11 state GSSE: Input 12 state GSSE: Input 13 state GSSE: Input 14 state GSSE: Input 15 state GSSE: Input 16 state GSSE: Input 17 state GSSE: Input 18 state GSSE: Input 19 state GSSE: Input 20 state GSSE: Input 21 state GSSE: Input 22 state GSSE: Input 23 state GSSE: Input 24 state GSSE: Input 25 state GSSE: Input 26 state GSSE: Input 27 state GSSE: Input 28 state GSSE: Input 29 state GSSE: Input 30 state GSSE: Input 31 state GSSE: Input 32 state Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
105 000 105 005 105 010 105 015 105 020 105 025 105 030 105 035 105 040 105 045 105 050 105 055 105 060 105 065 105 070 105 075 105 080 105 085 105 090 105 095 105 100 105 105 105 110 105 115 105 120 105 125 105 130 105 135 105 140 105 145 105 150 105 155
8-11

(continued)
Binary input
INP: State U 1201 INP: State U 1202 INP: State U 1203 INP: State U 1204 INP: State U 1401 INP: State U 1402 INP: State U 1403 INP: State U 1404 INP: State U 1405 INP: State U 1406 INP: State U 1407 INP: State U 1408 INP: State U 1409 INP: State U 1410 INP: State U 1411 INP: State U 1412 INP: State U 1413 INP: State U 1414 INP: State U 1415 INP: State U 1416 INP: State U 1417 INP: State U 1418 INP: State U 1419 INP: State U 1420 INP: State U 1421 INP: State U 1422 INP: State U 1423 INP: State U 1424 INP: State U 1601 INP: State U 1602 INP: State U 1603 INP: State U 1604 INP: State U 1605 INP: State U 1606 INP: State U 2001 INP: State U 2002 INP: State U 2003 INP: State U 2004 The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows: 'Without function': 'Low': 'High':
152 198 152 201 152 204 152 207 190 001 190 005 190 009 190 013 190 017 190 021 190 025 190 029 190 033 190 037 190 041 190 045 190 049 190 053 190 057 190 061 190 065 190 069 190 073 190 077 190 081 190 085 190 089 190 093 192 001 192 005 192 009 192 013 192 017 192 021 153 086 153 089 153 092 153 095
No functions are assigned to the binary signal input. Not energized. Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
8-12

(continued)
Binary outputs
OUTP: State K 1201 OUTP: State K 1202 OUTP: State K 1601 OUTP: State K 1602 OUTP: State K 1603 OUTP: State K 1604 OUTP: State K 1605 OUTP: State K 1606 OUTP: State K 1607 OUTP: State K 1608 OUTP: State K 1801 OUTP: State K 1802 OUTP: State K 1803 OUTP: State K 1804 OUTP: State K 1805 OUTP: State K 1806 OUTP: State K 2001 OUTP: State K 2002 OUTP: State K 2003 OUTP: State K 2004 OUTP: State K 2005 OUTP: State K 2006 OUTP: State K 2007 OUTP: State K 2008 The state of the output relays is displayed as follows: 'Without function': 'Low': 'High': No functions are assigned to the output relay. The output relay is not energized. The output relay is energized.
151 008 151 011 171 001 171 005 171 009 171 013 171 017 171 021 171 025 171 029 173 001 173 005 173 009 173 013 173 017 173 021 151 200 151 203 151 206 151 209 151 212 151 215 151 218 151 221
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
8-13

(continued)
LED indicators
LED: State H 2 LED: State H 3 LED: State H 4 LED: State H 5 LED: State H 6 LED: State H 7 LED: State H 8 LED: State H 9 LED: State H 10 LED: State H 11 LED: State H 12 LED: State H 13 LED: State H 14 LED: State H 15 LED: State H 16 The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows: 'Inactive': 'Active': The LED indicator is not energized. The LED indicator is energized.
085 000 085 003 085 006 085 009 085 012 085 015 085 018 085 021 085 024 085 027 085 030 085 033 085 036 085 039 085 042
8-14

(continued)
8.1.1.3 Local control panel Communication interface 1
Logic State Signals

037 101
LOC: Illumination on EXT COMM1: Command block. EXT COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT COMM1: Command blocking COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS COMM1: MODBUS COMM1: DNP3 COMM1: COURIER
003 173 037 074 003 174
Fig. 3-6 Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9 Fig: 3-6, 3-8,3-9,3-10, 3-11,3-12 Fig: 3-7, 3-8,3-9 Fig. 3-7 Fig. 3-8 Fig. 3-9 Fig. 3-10 Fig. 3-11 Fig. 3-12
037 075 003 219 003 218 003 221 003 223 003 230 103 041
IEC 61850 Communication
105 180 IEC: Comm. link faulty Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC address is missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting!
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
GOOSE: IED link faulty
107 250
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at which the next state signal must be received. IEC Generic Substation Status Events GSSE: IED link faulty
105 181
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. The GSSE sending device will attach a validity stamp to each GSSE. Up to that time a repetition of GSSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at which the next state signal must be received. IRIG-B IRIGB: Enabled IRIGB: Synchron. ready MEASI: Enabled MEASI: PT100 open circuit MEASI: Overload 20 mA input MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.
023 201 023 202
Fig. 3-17 Fig. 3-17 Fig: 3-19, 3-22,3-24 Fig: 3-24, 3-122 Fig: 3-22, 3-122 Fig: 3-22, 3-122
Measured Data Input
035 008 040 190 040 191 040 192
8-15

(continued)
Binary outputs
OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT OUTP: Reset latch. EXT OUTP: Outp. relays blocked OUTP: Latching reset MEASO: Enabled MEASO: Outp. enabled EXT MEASO: Reset output EXT MEASO: Output reset MEASO: Valid BCD value MEASO: 1-dig. bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 1-dig. bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: 1-dig. bit 2 (BCD) MEASO: 1-dig. bit 3 (BCD) MEASO: 10-dig. bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 10-dig. bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: 10-dig. bit 2 (BCD) MEASO: 10-dig. bit 3 (BCD) MEASO: 100-dig. bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 100-dig. bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: Value A-1 valid MEASO: Value A-1 output MEASO: Value A-2 valid MEASO: Value A-2 output
040 014 040 015 021 015 040 088
Fig. 3-25 Fig. 3-25 Fig. 3-25 Fig. 3-25 Fig: 3-27, 3-30,3-32 Fig. 3-28 Fig. 3-29 Fig. 3-29 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-32 Fig. 3-32
037 102 036 085 036 087 037 117 037 050 037 051 037 052 037 053 037 054 037 055 037 056 037 057 037 058 037 059 037 060 069 014 037 118 069 015 037 119
Main function
MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF2 MAIN: Trip sig.REF2 & REF3 MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF3 MAIN: Phase reversal activ MAIN: Enable protect. EXT MAIN: Disable protect. EXT MAIN: Time switching EXT MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT MAIN: Blocking 3 EXT MAIN: Blocking 4 EXT MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT
036 174 036 175 036 176 036 220 003 027 003 026 003 096 040 060 040 061 040 116 040 117 040 138 036 045 004 061
Page: 3-86 Page: 3-86 Page: 3-86 Fig. 3-37 Fig. 3-50 Fig. 3-50 Fig. 3-52 Fig. 3-52 Fig. 3-52 Fig. 3-52 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig: 3-125, 3-131, 3-134,3-135, 3-138, 3-139 Fig. 3-51 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-62 Fig. 3-60 Fig. 3-59 Fig. 3-50 Fig: 3-5, 3-7,3-8, 3-9,3-14, 3-25,3-50 Fig. 3-54
MAIN: Switch dyn.param.EXT MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT MAIN: Test mode EXT MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT MAIN: Min-pulse clock EXT MAIN: Prot. ext. enabled MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled
036 033 037 018 037 070 065 001 060 060 003 028 038 046
MAIN: Protect. not ready
004 060
8-16

(continued)
MAIN: Test mode
037 071
MAIN: Blocked/faulty MAIN: Meas. circ. I faulty MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset MAIN: Manual trip signal MAIN: Gen. trip signal MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 MAIN: Gen. trip signal 3 MAIN: Gen. trip signal 4 MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 MAIN: Gen. trip command 2 MAIN: Gen. trip command 3 MAIN: Gen. trip command 4 MAIN: General starting
004 065 036 155 021 013 040 139 034 017 036 251 036 005 036 023 036 108 036 109 036 071 036 022 036 113 036 114 036 000
Fig: 3-5, 3-7,3-8, 3-9,3-10, 3-11,3-12, 3-14,3-62 Fig. 3-54 Fig: 3-53, 3-145, 3-149 Fig: 3-54, 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig: 3-57, 3-141 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig: 3-57, 3-58,3-123 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-57 Fig: 3-41, 3-42,3-43, 3-44,3-45, 3-46,3-47, 3-48,3-49, 3-55, 3-56, 3-71 Fig: 3-51, 3-101,3-102, 3-103,3-112, 3-113,3-114 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-63 Fig: 3-63, 3-140 Fig: 3-63, 3-140 Fig: 3-63, 3-140 Fig: 3-63, 3-140
MAIN: Dynam. param. active
040 090
Parameter subset selection
PSS: Control via user EXT PSS: Activate PS 1 EXT PSS: Activate PS 2 EXT PSS: Activate PS 3 EXT PSS: Activate PS 4 EXT PSS: Control via user PSS: Ext.sel.param.subset PSS: PS 1 activated ext. PSS: PS 2 activated ext. PSS: PS 3 activated ext. PSS: PS 4 activated ext. PSS: Actual param. subset PSS: PS 1 active PSS: PS 2 active PSS: PS 3 active PSS: PS 4 active
036 101 065 002 065 003 065 004 065 005 036 102 003 061 036 094 036 095 036 096 036 097 003 062 036 090 036 091 036 092 036 093
8-17

(continued)
Self-Monitoring
SFMON: Faulty DSP SFMON: Invalid SW vers. DSP SFMON: Warning (LED) SFMON: Warning (relay) SFMON: Warm restart exec. SFMON: Cold restart exec. SFMON: Cold restart SFMON: Cold rest./SW update SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty SFMON: Hardware clock fail. SFMON: Battery failure SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded SFMON: +15V supply faulty SFMON: +24V supply faulty SFMON: -15V supply faulty SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 SFMON: Wrong module slot 2 SFMON: Wrong module slot 3 SFMON: Wrong module slot 4 SFMON: Wrong module slot 5 SFMON: Wrong module slot 6 SFMON: Wrong module slot 7 SFMON: Wrong module slot 8 SFMON: Wrong module slot 9 SFMON: Wrong module slot 10 SFMON: Wrong module slot 11 SFMON: Wrong module slot 12 SFMON: Wrong module slot 13 SFMON: Wrong module slot 14 SFMON: Wrong module slot 15 SFMON: Wrong module slot 16 SFMON: Wrong module slot 17 SFMON: Wrong module slot 18 SFMON: Wrong module slot 19 SFMON: Wrong module slot 20 SFMON: Wrong module slot 21 SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 SFMON: Defect.module slot 2 SFMON: Defect.module slot 3 SFMON: Defect.module slot 4 SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 SFMON: Defect.module slot 6 SFMON: Defect.module slot 7 SFMON: Defect.module slot 8 SFMON: Defect.module slot 9 SFMON: Defect.module slot10 SFMON: Defect.module slot11 SFMON: Defect.module slot12 SFMON: Defect.module slot13 SFMON: Defect.module slot14 SFMON: Defect.module slot15 SFMON: Defect.module slot16
093 127 093 128 036 070 036 100 041 202 041 201 093 024 093 025 090 019 041 200 093 040 090 010 096 121 093 081 093 082 093 080 096 100 096 101 096 102 096 103 096 104 096 105 096 106 096 107 096 108 096 109 096 110 096 111 096 112 096 113 096 114 096 115 096 116 096 117 096 118 096 119 096 120 097 000 097 001 097 002 097 003 097 004 097 005 097 006 097 007 097 008 097 009 097 010 097 011 097 012 097 013 097 014 097 015
Fig. 3-64 Fig. 3-64
8-18

(continued)
SFMON: Defect.module slot17 SFMON: Defect.module slot18 SFMON: Defect.module slot19 SFMON: Defect.module slot20 SFMON: Defect.module slot21 SFMON: Module A DPR faulty SFMON: Module A RAM faulty SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty SFMON: Error K 1201 SFMON: Error K 1202 SFMON: Error K 1601 SFMON: Error K 1602 SFMON: Error K 1603 SFMON: Error K 1604 SFMON: Error K 1605 SFMON: Error K 1606 SFMON: Error K 1607 SFMON: Error K 1608 SFMON: Error K 1801 SFMON: Error K 1802 SFMON: Error K 1803 SFMON: Error K 1804 SFMON: Error K 1805 SFMON: Error K 1806 SFMON: Error K 2001 SFMON: Error K 2002 SFMON: Error K 2003 SFMON: Error K 2004 SFMON: Error K 2005 SFMON: Error K 2006 SFMON: Error K 2007 SFMON: Error K 2008 SFMON: Undef. operat. code SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. SFMON: Undefined interrupt SFMON: Exception oper.syst. SFMON: Protection failure SFMON: Checksum error param SFMON: Clock sync. error SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM SFMON: Overflow MT_RC SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. SFMON: Inval. SW vers.comm. SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y SFMON: Time-out module Y SFMON: M.c.b. trip V SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, b SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, c SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, d
097 016 097 017 097 018 097 019 097 020 093 070 093 071 093 110 093 111 097 118 097 119 097 150 097 151 097 152 097 153 097 154 097 155 097 156 097 157 097 166 097 167 097 168 097 169 097 170 097 171 097 182 097 183 097 184 097 185 097 186 097 187 097 188 097 189 093 010 093 011 093 012 093 013 090 021 090 003 093 041 093 026 090 012 093 015 093 075 093 113 093 112 098 000 091 018 091 026 091 027 091 028 091 029
Fig. 3-66
Fig: 3-53, 3-145,3-149 Fig: 3-146, 3-148
8-19

(continued)
SFMON: Invalid charact. V/f SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC SFMON: PT100 open circuit SFMON: Overload 20 mA input SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. SFMON: Setting error f<> SFMON: Output 30 SFMON: Output 30 (t) SFMON: Output 31 SFMON: Output 31 (t) SFMON: Output 32 SFMON: Output 32 (t) SFMON: Iref, a inval. range SFMON: Iref, b inval. range SFMON: Iref, c inval. range SFMON: Iref, d inval. rang SFMON: Matching fail. end a SFMON: Matching fail. end b SFMON: Matching fail. end c SFMON: Matching fail. end d SFMON: Ratio mtch.fact.inv. SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv. SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_1 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_2 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_3 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_1 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_2 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_3 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_2 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_3 SFMON: Rat.mtch.f.inv.REF_1 SFMON: Rat.mtch.f.inv.REF_2 SFMON: Rat.mtch.f.inv.REF_3 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_1 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_2 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_3 SFMON: CTA error THRM1 SFMON: CTA error THRM2 SFMON: Setting error THRM1 SFMON: Setting error THRM2 SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync Overload Recording OL_RC: Record. in progress OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow
091 011 093 114 093 115 093 116 098 024 098 025 098 026 098 028 098 053 098 054 098 055 098 056 098 057 098 058 091 007 091 008 091 009 091 016 091 000 091 001 091 002 091 017 091 004 091 006 091 105 091 115 091 125 091 101 091 111 091 121 091 102 091 112 091 122 091 103 091 113 091 123 091 104 091 114 091 124 098 036 098 037 098 038 098 039 093 120
Fig. 3-94
Fig. 3-94
Fig. 3-94
Fig. 3-122 Fig. 3-123
035 003
035 007
Fig: 3-2, 3-67,3-68, 3-69, 3-70 Fig. 3-70
8-20

(continued)
Fault Recording
FT_RC: Trigger EXT FT_RC: Trigger FT_RC: Id> triggered FT_RC: IR> triggered FT_RC: Record. in progress
036 089 037 076 035 018 035 019 035 000
Fig. 3-76 Fig. 3-76 Fig. 3-76 Fig. 3-76 Fig: 3-2, 3-25, 3-34, 3-70, 3-72, 3-73, 3-74, 3-75,3-76, 3-77,3-78 Fig: 3-25, 3-34,3-76 Fig. 3-77 Fig. 3-70 Fig: 3-79, 3-88 Fig. 3-55 Fig: 3-88, 3-89, 3-90, 3-91 Fig. 3-88 Fig. 3-88 Fig. 3-88 Fig. 3-88 Fig: 3-88, 3-89,3-101, 3-102,3-112, 3-113,3-141 Fig. 3-89 Fig. 3-89 Fig: 3-88, 3-91,3-141 Fig. 3-91 Fig. 3-91 Fig. 3-90 Fig. 3-90 Fig. 3-90 Fig: 3-72, 3-88,3-89 Fig. 3-88 Fig. 3-88 Fig. 3-88 Fig: 3-93, 3-97
FT_RC: System disturb. runn FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow FT_RC: Faulty time tag Differential Protection DIFF: Enabled DIFF: Starting DIFF: Meas.system 1 trigg. DIFF: Meas.system 2 trigg. DIFF: Meas.system 3 trigg. DIFF: Id>> triggered DIFF: Id>>> triggered DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg.
035 004 035 001 035 002
041 210 041 106 041 124
041 125 041 126 041 221 041 222 041 118
DIFF: Harm.block 2 trigg. DIFF: Harm.block 3 trigg. DIFF: Overflux.bl.1 trigg. DIFF: Overflux.bl.2 trigg. DIFF: Overflux.bl.3 trigg. DIFF: Sat.discr. 1 trigg. DIFF: Sat.discr. 2 trigg. DIFF: Sat.discr. 3 trigg. DIFF: Trip signal DIFF: Trip signal 1 DIFF: Trip signal 2 DIFF: Trip signal 3 Ground differential protection REF_1: Enabled
(Br: Restricted earth fault protection)
041 119 041 120 041 121 041 122 041 123 041 115 041 116 041 117 041 075 041 002 041 003 041 004
041 132 041 133 041 134 041 005 041 016 041 067
REF_2: Enabled REF_3: Enabled REF_1: Trip signal REF_2: Trip signal REF_3: Trip signal
Fig: 3-55, 3-72,3-97 Fig: 3-55, 3-72 Fig. 3-55
8-21

(continued)
DTOC1: Block. tI> EXT DTOC1: Block. tI>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tI>>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIneg> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIneg>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIneg>>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIN> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIN>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIN>>> EXT DTOC1: Enabled DTOC1: General starting DTOC1: tGS elapsed DTOC1: Starting A DTOC1: Starting B DTOC1: Starting C DTOC1: Starting N DTOC1: Starting I> DTOC1: Starting I>> DTOC1: Starting I>>> DTOC1: Trip signal tI> DTOC1: Trip signal tI>> DTOC1: Trip signal tI>>> DTOC1: Starting Ineg DTOC1: Starting Ineg> DTOC1: Starting Ineg>> DTOC1: Starting Ineg>>> DTOC1: tIneg> elapsed DTOC1: tIneg>> elapsed DTOC1: tIneg>>> elapsed DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg> DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>> DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>>> DTOC1: Starting IN> DTOC1: Starting IN>> DTOC1: Starting IN>>> DTOC1: tIN> elapsed DTOC1: tIN>> elapsed DTOC1: tIN>>> elapsed DTOC1: Trip signal tIN> DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>> DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>> DTOC2: Block. tI> EXT DTOC2: Block. tI>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tI>>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIneg> EXT
035 120 035 121 035 122 036 141 036 142 036 143 035 123 035 124 035 125 035 102
Fig. 3-101 Fig. 3-101 Fig. 3-101 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig: 3-100, 3-101, 3-102,3-103 Fig: 3-55, 3-72, 3-104, 3-105 Fig. 3-104 Fig: 3-101, 3-103 Fig: 3-101, 3-103 Fig: 3-101, 3-103 Fig: 3-103, 3-104 Fig: 3-101, 3-104 Fig: 3-101, 3-104 Fig: 3-101, 3-104 Fig. 3-101 Fig. 3-101 Fig. 3-101 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-103
035 128
035 129 035 104 035 105 035 106 035 107 035 108 035 109 035 110 035 114 035 115 035 116 036 144 036 145 036 146 036 147 036 148 036 149 036 150 036 151 036 152 036 153 035 111 035 112 035 113 035 117 035 118 035 119 035 126 035 130 035 131 035 150 035 151 035 229 036 161
8-22

(continued)
DTOC2: Block. tIneg>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIneg>>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIN> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIN>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIN>>> EXT DTOC2: Enabled DTOC2: General starting DTOC2: tGS elapsed DTOC2: Starting A DTOC2: Starting B DTOC2: Starting C DTOC2: Starting N DTOC2: Starting I> DTOC2: Starting I>> DTOC2: Starting I>>> DTOC2: Trip signal tI> DTOC2: Trip signal tI>> DTOC2: Trip signal tI>>> DTOC2: Starting Ineg DTOC2: Starting Ineg> DTOC2: Starting Ineg>> DTOC2: Starting Ineg>>> DTOC2: tIneg> elapsed DTOC2: tIneg>> elapsed DTOC2: tIneg>>> elapsed DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg> DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>> DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>>> DTOC2: Starting IN> DTOC2: Starting IN>> DTOC2: Starting IN>>> DTOC2: tIN> elapsed DTOC2: tIN>> elapsed DTOC2: tIN>>> elapsed DTOC2: Trip signal tIN> DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>> DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>>> DTOC3: Block. tI> EXT DTOC3: Block. tI>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tI>>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIneg> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIneg>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIneg>>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIN> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIN>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIN>>> EXT DTOC3: Enabled DTOC3: General starting DTOC3: tGS elapsed DTOC3: Starting A DTOC3: Starting B
036 162 036 163 035 230 035 231 035 232 035 132 035 234 035 245 035 134 035 135 035 141 035 146 035 138 035 139 035 149 035 144 035 145 035 158 036 164 036 165 036 166 036 167 036 168 036 169 036 170 036 171 036 172 036 173 035 152 035 153 035 154 035 159 035 225 035 226 035 233 035 246 035 247 035 237 035 238 035 239 036 181 036 182 036 183 035 240 035 241 035 242 035 136 035 244 035 250 035 180 035 185
Fig: 3-55, 3-72
Fig: 3-55, 3-72
8-23

(continued)
DTOC3: Starting C DTOC3: Starting N DTOC3: Starting I> DTOC3: Starting I>> DTOC3: Starting I>>> DTOC3: Trip signal tI> DTOC3: Trip signal tI>> DTOC3: Trip signal tI>>> DTOC3: Starting Ineg DTOC3: Starting Ineg> DTOC3: Starting Ineg>> DTOC3: Starting Ineg>>> DTOC3: tIneg> elapsed DTOC3: tIneg>> elapsed DTOC3: tIneg>>> elapsed DTOC3: Trip signal tIneg> DTOC3: Trip signal tIneg>> DTOC3: Trip signal tIneg>>> DTOC3: Starting IN> DTOC3: Starting IN>> DTOC3: Starting IN>>> DTOC3: tIN> elapsed DTOC3: tIN>> elapsed DTOC3: tIN>>> elapsed DTOC3: Trip signal tIN> DTOC3: Trip signal tIN>> DTOC3: Trip signal tIN>>> Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection IDMT1: Block. tIref,P> EXT IDMT1: Block.tIref,neg> EXT IDMT1: Block. tIref,N> EXT IDMT1: Enabled IDMT1: General starting IDMT1: tGS elapsed IDMT1: Starting Iref,P> IDMT1: Starting Iref,A> IDMT1: Starting Iref,B> IDMT1: Starting Iref,C> IDMT1: tIref,P> elapsed IDMT1: Hold time P running IDMT1: Memory P clear IDMT1: Starting Iref,neg> IDMT1: tIref,neg> elapsed IDMT1: Trip sig. tIref,neg>
035 186 035 187 035 188 035 189 035 190 035 205 035 206 035 208 036 184 036 185 036 186 036 187 036 188 036 189 036 190 036 191 036 192 036 193 035 202 035 203 035 204 035 209 035 235 035 236 035 243 035 251 035 252
038 114 038 178 038 124 038 125
Fig. 3-112 Fig: 3-113, 3-114 Fig. 3-114 Fig: 3-107, 3-112,3-113, 3-114 Fig: 3-55, 3-72,3-116, 3-117 Fig. 3-116 Fig: 3-112, 3-115,3-116 Fig: 3-112, 3-114 Fig: 3-112, 3-114 Fig: 3-112, 3-114 Fig: 3-112, 3-115 Fig: 3-112, 3-115 Fig. 3-112 Fig: 3-113, 3-116 Fig. 3-113 Fig. 3-113
038 115
038 116 038 110 038 117 038 118 038 119 038 111 038 112 038 113 038 173 038 174 038 177
8-24

(continued)
IDMT1: Hold time neg runn. IDMT1: Memory 'neg' clear IDMT1: Starting Iref,N> IDMT1: tIref,N> elapsed IDMT1: Trip signal tIref,N> IDMT1: Hold time N running IDMT1: Memory N clear IDMT2: Block. tIref,P> EXT IDMT2: Block.tIref,neg> EXT IDMT2: Block. tIref,N> EXT IDMT2: Enabled IDMT2: General starting IDMT2: tGS elapsed IDMT2: Starting Iref,P> IDMT2: Starting Iref,A> IDMT2: Starting Iref,B> IDMT2: Starting Iref,C> IDMT2: tIref,P> elapsed IDMT2: Hold time P running IDMT2: Memory P clear IDMT2: Starting Iref,neg> IDMT2: tIref,neg> elapsed IDMT2: Trip sig. tIref,neg> IDMT2: Hold time neg runn. IDMT2: Memory 'neg' clear IDMT2: Starting Iref,N> IDMT2: tIref,N> elapsed IDMT2: Trip signal tIref,N> IDMT2: Hold time N running IDMT2: Memory N clear IDMT3: Block. tIref,P> EXT IDMT3: Block.tIref,neg> EXT IDMT3: Block. tIref,N> EXT IDMT3: Enabled IDMT3: General starting IDMT3: tGS elapsed IDMT3: Starting Iref,P> IDMT3: Starting Iref,A> IDMT3: Starting Iref,B> IDMT3: Starting Iref,C> IDMT3: tIref,P> elapsed IDMT3: Hold time P running IDMT3: Memory P clear IDMT3: Starting Iref,neg> IDMT3: tIref,neg> elapsed IDMT3: Trip sig. tIref,neg> IDMT3: Hold time neg runn. IDMT3: Memory 'neg' clear IDMT3: Starting Iref,N> IDMT3: tIref,N> elapsed
038 175 038 176 038 120 038 121 038 126 038 122 038 123 038 134 038 188 038 144 038 145 038 135 038 136 038 130 038 137 038 138 038 139 038 131 038 132 038 133 038 183 038 184 038 187 038 185 038 186 038 140 038 141 038 146 038 142 038 143 038 154 038 198 038 164 038 165 038 155 038 156 038 150 038 157 038 158 038 159 038 151 038 152 038 153 038 193 038 194 038 197 038 195 038 196 038 160 038 161
Fig. 3-113 Fig. 3-113 Fig: 3-114, 3-116 Fig. 3-114 Fig. 3-114 Fig. 3-114 Fig. 3-114
Fig: 3-55, 3-72
Fig: 3-55, 3-72
8-25

(continued)
IDMT3: Trip signal tIref,N> IDMT3: Hold time N running IDMT3: Memory N clear Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Block. replica EXT THRM1: CTA error EXT THRM1: Reset replica EXT THRM1: Enabled THRM1: Not ready THRM1: Reset replica THRM1: Buffer empty THRM1: CTA error THRM1: Starting k*Iref> THRM1: Within pre-trip time THRM1: Warning THRM1: Trip signal THRM1: Setting error,block. THRM2: Block. replica EXT THRM2: CTA error EXT THRM2: Reset replica EXT THRM2: Enabled THRM2: Not ready THRM2: Reset replica THRM2: Buffer empty THRM2: CTA error THRM2: Starting k*Iref> THRM2: Within pre-trip time THRM2: Warning THRM2: Trip signal THRM2: Setting error,block. Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Blocking tV> EXT V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT V<>: Blocking tV< EXT V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT V<>: Enabled V<>: Ready V<>: Not ready V<>: Starting V> V<>: Starting V>> V<>: tV> elapsed V<>: tV>> elapsed V<>: Starting V< V<>: Starting V<< V<>: tV< elapsed V<>: tV< elapsed & Vmin> V<>: tV< elaps. transient V<>: Fault V< 8-26
038 166 038 162 038 163
039 150 039 152 039 122 039 129
Fig: 3-120, 3-123 Fig. 3-122 Fig. 3-124 Fig: 3-119, 3-120, 3-123,3-124 Fig. 3-120 Fig: 3-123, 3-124 Fig. 3-122 Fig: 3-69, 3-123 Fig. 3-123 Fig. 3-123 Fig. 3-123 Fig: 3-120, 3-123
039 154 039 125 039 128 039 127 039 151 039 153 039 124 039 123 039 126 039 170 039 172 039 182 039 189 039 174 039 185 039 188 039 187 039 171 039 173 039 184 039 183 039 186
041 068 041 069 041 070 041 071 040 066 042 003 042 004 041 030 041 096 041 034 041 035 041 037 041 099 041 041 041 026 042 023 041 110
Fig. 3-126 Fig. 3-126 Fig. 3-127 Fig. 3-127 Fig. 3-125 Fig: 3-125, 3-126,3-127 Fig. 3-125 Fig. 3-126 Fig. 3-126 Fig. 3-126 Fig. 3-126 Fig. 3-127 Fig. 3-127 Fig. 3-127 Fig. 3-127 Fig. 3-127 Fig. 3-127

(continued)
V<>: tV<< elapsed V<>: tV<< elapsed & Vmin> V<>: tV<< elapsed trans. V<>: Fault V<< V<>: tV</<< elaps. trans. Over-/Underfrequency Protection f<>: Blocking f1 EXT f<>: Blocking f2 EXT f<>: Blocking f3 EXT f<>: Blocking f4 EXT f<>: Enabled f<>: Ready f<>: Not ready f<>: Blocked by V< f<>: Starting f1 f<>: Starting f2 f<>: Starting f3 f<>: Starting f4 f<>: Starting f1/df1 f<>: Starting f2/df2 f<>: Starting f3/df3 f<>: Starting f4/df4 f<>: Delta f1 triggered f<>: Delta f2 triggered f<>: Delta f3 triggered f<>: Delta f4 triggered f<>: Delta t1 elapsed f<>: Delta t2 elapsed f<>: Delta t3 elapsed f<>: Delta t4 elapsed f<>: Trip signal f1 f<>: Trip signal f2 f<>: Trip signal f3 f<>: Trip signal f4 Overfluxing protection V/f: V/f: V/f: V/f: V/f: Block. tV/f> EXT Block. replica EXT Block. tV/f>> EXT Reset replica EXT Enabled
041 042 041 066 042 025 041 112 042 007
042 103 042 104 042 105 042 106 042 100 042 101 042 140 042 102 042 107 042 115 042 123 042 131 042 108 042 116 042 124 042 132 042 109 042 117 042 125 042 133 042 110 042 118 042 126 042 134 042 111 042 119 042 127 042 135
Fig. 3-128 Fig: 3-128, 3-131 Fig. 3-128 Fig: 3-129, 3-131 Fig. 3-131
Fig. 3-131
Fig. 3-131
Fig. 3-131
Fig. 3-131
035 196 035 197 035 199 035 182 041 229
Fig. 3-134 Fig. 3-138 Fig. 3-135 Fig. 3-139 Fig: 3-132, 3-134,3-135 3-138,3-139 Fig: 3-138, 3-139 Fig. 3-134 Fig. 3-134 Fig: 3-137, 3-138 Fig: 3-137, 3-138 Fig. 3-135 Fig. 3-135 Fig. 3-138
V/f: Reset replica V/f: Starting V/f> V/f: tV/f> elapsed V/f: Starting V/f(t) V/f: Trip signal tV/f(t) V/f: Starting V/f>> V/f: tV/f>> elapsed V/f: Buffer empty
035 184 041 230 041 231 041 232 041 233 041 234 041 235 041 236
8-27

(continued)
CTS: Blocking EXT CTS: Reset latching EXT CTS: Enabled CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: CTS: Reset latching Operated (updating) Operated (latched) Idiff>(CTS)active Alarm end a (updat.) Alarm end b (updat.) Alarm end c (updat.) Alarm end d (updat.) Alarm end a (latch.) Alarm end b (latch.) Alarm end c (latch.) Alarm end d (latch.) Alarm end a
036 160 036 158 036 080 036 159 036 099 036 202 036 203 036 081 036 082 036 083 036 084 036 204 036 206 036 208 036 210 036 205 036 207 036 209 036 211
Fig. 3-141 Fig. 3-145 Fig: 3-140, 3-141 Fig. 3-145 Fig. 3-145 Fig: 3-88, 3-145 Fig. 3-146
Fig. 3-146
CTS: Alarm end b CTS: Alarm end c CTS: Alarm end d Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCM_1: Blocking EXT MCM_1: Enabled MCM_1: Meas. circ. I faulty MCM_1: Starting MCM_2: Blocking EXT MCM_2: Enabled MCM_2: Meas. circ. I faulty MCM_2: Starting MCM_3: Blocking EXT MCM_3: Enabled MCM_3: Meas. circ. I faulty MCM_3: Starting MCM_4: Blocking EXT MCM_4: Enabled MCM_4: Meas. circ. I faulty MCM_4: Starting Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Enabled LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed LIMIT: Starting T> 8-28
Fig: 3-97, 3-146
036 213 036 194 036 198 036 212 036 215 036 195 036 199 036 214 036 217 036 196 036 200 036 216 036 219 036 197 036 201 036 218
Fig. 3-148 Fig: 3-147, 3-148 Fig: 3-53, 3-148,3-149 Fig. 3-148
Fig: 3-53, 3-149
Fig: 3-53, 3-149
Fig: 3-53,3-149
040 074 040 180 040 181 040 182 040 183 040 184 040 185 040 186 040 187 040 170
Fig: 3-150, 3-151 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-150 Fig. 3-151

(continued)
LIMIT: Starting T>> LIMIT: tT> elapsed LIMIT: tT>> elapsed LIMIT: Starting T< LIMIT: Starting T<< LIMIT: tT< elapsed LIMIT: tT<< elapsed Limit Value Monitoring 1 to 3 LIM_1: Enabled LIM_1: tI> elapsed LIM_1: tI>> elapsed LIM_1: tI< elapsed LIM_1: tI<< elapsed LIM_2: Enabled LIM_2: tI> elapsed LIM_2: tI>> elapsed LIM_2: tI< elapsed LIM_2: tI<< elapsed LIM_3: Enabled LIM_3: tI> elapsed LIM_3: tI>> elapsed LIM_3: tI< elapsed LIM_3: tI<< elapsed LOGIC: Input 1 EXT LOGIC: Input 2 EXT LOGIC: Input 3 EXT LOGIC: Input 4 EXT LOGIC: Input 5 EXT LOGIC: Input 6 EXT LOGIC: Input 7 EXT LOGIC: Input 8 EXT LOGIC: Input 9 EXT LOGIC: Input 10 EXT LOGIC: Input 11 EXT LOGIC: Input 12 EXT LOGIC: Input 13 EXT LOGIC: Input 14 EXT LOGIC: Input 15 EXT LOGIC: Input 16 EXT LOGIC: Input 17 EXT LOGIC: Input 18 EXT LOGIC: Input 19 EXT LOGIC: Input 20 EXT LOGIC: Input 21 EXT LOGIC: Input 22 EXT LOGIC: Input 23 EXT LOGIC: Input 24 EXT LOGIC: Input 25 EXT LOGIC: Input 26 EXT LOGIC: Input 27 EXT
040 171 040 172 040 173 040 174 040 175 040 176 040 177
Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-151 Fig. 3-153 Fig. 3-153 Fig. 3-153 Fig. 3-153 Fig. 3-153
040 123 040 122 037 201 037 202 037 203 040 125 040 124 038 201 038 202 038 203 040 127 040 126 039 201 039 202 039 203
Logic
034 000 034 001 034 002 034 003 034 004 034 005 034 006 034 007 034 008 034 009 034 010 034 011 034 012 034 013 034 014 034 015 034 086 034 087 034 088 034 089 034 090 034 091 034 092 034 093 034 094 034 095 034 096
Fig. 3-155
8-29

(continued)
LOGIC: Input 28 EXT LOGIC: Input 29 EXT LOGIC: Input 30 EXT LOGIC: Input 31 EXT LOGIC: Input 32 EXT LOGIC: Input 33 EXT LOGIC: Input 34 EXT LOGIC: Input 35 EXT LOGIC: Input 36 EXT LOGIC: Input 37 EXT LOGIC: Input 38 EXT LOGIC: Input 39 EXT LOGIC: Input 40 EXT LOGIC: Set 1 EXT LOGIC: Set 2 EXT LOGIC: Set 3 EXT LOGIC: Set 4 EXT LOGIC: Set 5 EXT LOGIC: Set 6 EXT LOGIC: Set 7 EXT LOGIC: Set 8 EXT LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT LOGIC: Reset 4 EXT LOGIC: Reset 5 EXT LOGIC: Reset 6 EXT LOGIC: Reset 7 EXT LOGIC: Reset 8 EXT LOGIC: 1 has been set LOGIC: 2 has been set LOGIC: 3 has been set LOGIC: 4 has been set LOGIC: 5 has been set LOGIC: 6 has been set LOGIC: 7 has been set LOGIC: 8 has been set LOGIC: 1 set externally LOGIC: 2 set externally LOGIC: 3 set externally LOGIC: 4 set externally LOGIC: 5 set externally LOGIC: 6 set externally LOGIC: 7 set externally LOGIC: 8 set externally LOGIC: Enabled LOGIC: Output 1 LOGIC: Output 1 (t) LOGIC: Output 2 LOGIC: Output 2 (t)
034 097 034 098 034 099 034 100 034 101 034 102 034 103 034 104 034 105 034 106 034 107 034 108 034 109 034 051 034 052 034 053 034 054 034 055 034 056 034 057 034 058 034 059 034 060 034 061 034 062 034 063 034 064 034 065 034 066 034 067 034 068 034 069 034 070 034 071 034 072 034 073 034 074 034 075 034 076 034 077 034 078 034 079 034 080 034 081 034 082 034 046 042 032 042 033 042 034 042 035
Fig. 3-155 Fig. 3-154
Fig. 3-154
Fig. 3-154
Fig. 3-155 Fig: 3-154, 3-155
Fig. 3-155 Fig. 3-155 Fig: 3-155, 3-161 Fig: 3-155, 3-161
8-30

(continued)
LOGIC: Output 3 LOGIC: Output 3 (t) LOGIC: Output 4 LOGIC: Output 4 (t) LOGIC: Output 5 LOGIC: Output 5 (t) LOGIC: Output 6 LOGIC: Output 6 (t) LOGIC: Output 7 LOGIC: Output 7 (t) LOGIC: Output 8 LOGIC: Output 8 (t) LOGIC: Output 9 LOGIC: Output 9 (t) LOGIC: Output 10 LOGIC: Output 10 (t) LOGIC: Output 11 LOGIC: Output 11 (t) LOGIC: Output 12 LOGIC: Output 12 (t) LOGIC: Output 13 LOGIC: Output 13 (t) LOGIC: Output 14 LOGIC: Output 14 (t) LOGIC: Output 15 LOGIC: Output 15 (t) LOGIC: Output 16 LOGIC: Output 16 (t) LOGIC: Output 17 LOGIC: Output 17 (t) LOGIC: Output 18 LOGIC: Output 18 (t) LOGIC: Output 19 LOGIC: Output 19 (t) LOGIC: Output 20 LOGIC: Output 20 (t) LOGIC: Output 21 LOGIC: Output 21 (t) LOGIC: Output 22 LOGIC: Output 22 (t) LOGIC: Output 23 LOGIC: Output 23 (t) LOGIC: Output 24 LOGIC: Output 24 (t) LOGIC: Output 25 LOGIC: Output 25 (t) LOGIC: Output 26 LOGIC: Output 26 (t) LOGIC: Output 27 LOGIC: Output 27 (t) LOGIC: Output 28 LOGIC: Output 28 (t)
042 036 042 037 042 038 042 039 042 040 042 041 042 042 042 043 042 044 042 045 042 046 042 047 042 048 042 049 042 050 042 051 042 052 042 053 042 054 042 055 042 056 042 057 042 058 042 059 042 060 042 061 042 062 042 063 042 064 042 065 042 066 042 067 042 068 042 069 042 070 042 071 042 072 042 073 042 074 042 075 042 076 042 077 042 078 042 079 042 080 042 081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042 085 042 086 042 087
8-31

(continued)
LOGIC: Output 29 LOGIC: Output 29 (t) LOGIC: Output 30 LOGIC: Output 30 (t) LOGIC: Output 31 LOGIC: Output 31 (t) LOGIC: Output 32 LOGIC: Output 32 (t)
042 088 042 089 042 090 042 091 042 092 042 093 042 094 042 095
8-32

(continued)
8.1.2 Local control panel
Control and Testing

003 010
LOC: Param. change enabl. Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel. COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test Signal selection for testing purposes. COMM1: Test spont.sig.start Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting". COMM1: Test spont.sig. end Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
003 180
Fig. 3-13 Fig. 3-13 Fig. 3-13
003 184
003 186
COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test Signal selection for testing purposes. COMM2: Test spont.sig.start Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting". COMM2: Test spont.sig. end Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
103 180
Fig. 3-15 Fig. 3-15 Fig. 3-15
103 184
103 186
GSSE: Reset statistics
105 171
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below. 105 160 GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
105 161 GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to 32).
GSSE: Tx message counter Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset counters.
105 162
105 163 GSSE: Rx message counter Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset counters. 105 164 GSSE: No. bin.state chang. Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset counters. 105 165 GSSE: Tx last sequence State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent with each GSSE. 105 166 GSSE: Tx last message State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each GSSE.
8-33

(continued)
105 167 GSSE: No. reject. messages Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible message content. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s . 105 170 GSSE: IED view selection Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is to be displayed.
GSSE: IED receiv. messages Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.
105 172
105 173 GSSE: IED Rx last sequence State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received with each GSSE. 105 174 GSSE: IED Rx last message State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with each GSSE. 105 175 GSSE: IED missed messages Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED missed changes Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
105 176
105 177 GSSE: IED time-outs Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
8-34

(continued)
Binary outputs
OUTP: Reset latch. USER Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel. OUTP: Relay assign. f.test Selection of an output relay to be tested.
021 009
Fig. 3-25 Fig. 3-26
003 042
003 043 Fig. 3-26 OUTP: Relay test The relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time (OU T P: Ho ld t i m e f o r tes t).
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'PasswordProtected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). The test can only be carried out when protection is disabled. OUTP: Hold-time for test Setting the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered during functional testing. Measured Data Output MEASO: Reset output USER Resetting the measured data output function. MAIN: General reset
003 044
Fig. 3-26
037 116
Fig. 3-29
Main function
003 002
Fig: 3-2, 3-3,3-4, 3-25,3-29, -34,3-41, 3-56,3-58, 3-60, 3-65, 3-67,3-68, 3-69,3-70, 3-71,3-72, 3-73,3-74, 3-75,3-76, 3-77,3-78, 3-105, 3-117,3-145
Reset of the following memories: All counters LED indicators Operating data memory All event memories Event counters Fault data Recorded fault values This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'PasswordProtected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). MAIN: Reset indicat. USER Reset of the following displays: LED indicators Fault data
021 010
Fig: 3-29, 3-60
8-35

(continued)
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel. MAIN: Reset c. cl./trip c. The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset. MAIN: Reset IP,max,stored
021 005
Fig. 3-57
003 007
003 033
Fig: 3-40, 3-41
The values for the delayed stored maximum phase current, ends a to d, are reset. 003 040 Fig. 3-57 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command is included in the configuration of trip commands.
003 039 MAIN: Warm restart A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power supply is turned on. 000 085 MAIN: Cold restart A cold restart is carried out. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. Values that a device utilizes after a cold restart has occurred are designated "default settings". They are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart. 100 001 Fig. 3-65 OP_RC: Reset recording The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Operating data recording
Monitoring Signal Recording
MT_RC: Reset recording Reset of the monitoring signal memory. OL_RC: Reset recording Reset of the overload memory.
003 008
Fig. 3-66
Overload Recording
100 003
Fig: 3-4, 3-67,3-68, 3-69,3-70
8-36

(continued)
Fault Recording
003 041 Fig. 3-76 FT_RC: Trigger USER Fault recording and fault value recording are enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
FT_RC: Reset recording Reset of the following memories: LED indicators Fault memory Fault counter Fault data Recorded fault values
003 006
Fig: 3-2, 3-3,3-76, 3-77,3-78
039 120 Fig. 3-124 Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Reset replica USER 039 180 THRM2: Reset replica USER Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
Over-/Underfrequency Protection
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER Resetting the measured event values f<> : m a x. fre qu . for f> and f < > : m in . f r e qu . for f< .
003 080
Page: 3-201
Overfluxing protection Current Transformer Supervision Logic
V/f: Reset replica USER CTS: Reset latch. USER LOGIC: Trigger 1 LOGIC: Trigger 2 LOGIC: Trigger 3 LOGIC: Trigger 4 LOGIC: Trigger 5 LOGIC: Trigger 6 LOGIC: Trigger 7 LOGIC: Trigger 8 Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point of a 100 ms pulse.
035 183
Fig. 3-139 Fig. 3-145
036 157
034 038 034 039 034 040 034 041 034 042 034 043 034 044 034 045
Fig. 3-155
Fig. 3-155
8.1.3 Operating data recording
Operating Data Recording

003 024
OP_RC: Operat. data record. Point of entry into the operating data log. MT_RC: Mon. signal record. Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
Fig. 3-65
003 001
Fig. 3-66
8-37

(continued)
8.2 8.2.1 Main function
Events Event Counters

004 000
MAIN: No. general start. Number of general starting signals. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1 Number of general trip commands 1. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 2 Number of general trip commands 2. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 3 Number of general trip commands 3. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 4 Number of general trip commands 4.
Fig. 3-56 Fig. 3-58 Fig. 3-58 Fig. 3-58 Fig. 3-58
004 006
009 050
009 056
009 057
Operating data recording
OP_RC: No. oper. data sig. Number of signals stored in the operating data memory. MT_RC: No. monit. signals Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory. OL_RC: No. overload Number of overload events. FT_RC: No. of faults Number of faults. FT_RC: No. system disturb. Number of system disturbances.
100 002
Fig. 3-65
004 019
Fig. 3-66
Overload Recording
004 101
Fig. 3-69
Fault Recording
004 020
Fig. 3-3
004 010
Fig. 3-3
DTOC1: No. general start. DTOC2: No. general start. DTOC3: No. general start. Number of general starting signals. IDMT1: No. general start. IDMT2: No. general start. IDMT3: No. general start. Number of general starting signals.
009 150 009 160 009 170
Fig. 3-105
009 151 009 161 009 171
Fig. 3-117
8-38

(continued)
8.2.2 Overload Data Acquisition
Measured Event Data

004 102
OL_DA: Overload duration Duration of the overload event.
Fig. 3-67
004 155 Fig. 3-68 OL_DA: Status THRM1 replica 004 185 OL_DA: Status THRM2 replica Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function, THRM1 or THRM2. 004 159 Fig. 3-68 OL_DA: Load current THRM1 004 189 OL_DA: Load current THRM2 Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function, THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, to calculate the tripping time. 004 156 Fig. 3-68 OL_DA: Object temp. THRM1 004 186 OL_DA: Object temp. THRM2 Display of the temperature of the protected object. 004 157 Fig. 3-68 OL_DA: Coolant temp.THRM1 004 187 OL_DA: Coolant temp.THRM2 Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object. Depending on the setting at T HRM 1 : Se lec t C T A or THR M2 : Se lec t C TA for coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed: Setting Default temp. value : Display of the set temperature value. Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via the 20 mA input. 004 158 Fig. 3-68 OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1 004 188 OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM2 Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function will reach the trip threshold. 004 191 Fig. 3-68 OL_DA: Offset THRM1 replica 004 192 OL_DA: Offset THRM2 replica Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case. Fault Data Acquisition FT_DA: Fault duration Display of the fault duration. FT_DA: Running time Display of the running time. FT_DA: Fault determ. with This display indicates when the fault data were stored.
008 010
Fig. 3-71 Fig. 3-71 Fig. 3-72
004 021
004 198
004 199 Fig. 3-72 FT_DA: Run time to meas. This display indicates the difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time. P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
8-39

(continued)
025 086 Fig. 3-73 FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,a p.u. 026 086 Fig. 3-73 FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,b p.u. 027 086 Fig. 3-73 FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,c p.u. 028 086 Fig. 3-73 FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,d p.u. Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom. 025 087 Fig. 3-73 FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,a p.u. 026 087 Fig. 3-73 FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,b p.u. 027 087 Fig. 3-73 FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,c p.u. 028 087 Fig. 3-73 FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,d p.u Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x at the data acquisition time, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.
FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,a p.u. FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,b p.u. FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,c p.u.
025 088 026 088 027 088
Fig. 3-73 Fig. 3-73 Fig. 3-73
Display of the current value as a quantity referred to Inom measured by the P63x at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers and at the time at which acquisition of fault data takes place. FT_DA: Diff. current 1 FT_DA: Diff. current 2 FT_DA: Diff. current 3 Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref.
005 082 006 082 007 082
Fig. 3-74 Fig. 3-74 Fig. 3-74
005 084 Fig. 3-74 FT_DA: Diff.current 1(2*f0) 006 084 Fig. 3-74 FT_DA: Diff.current 2(2*f0) 007 084 Fig. 3-74 FT_DA: Diff.current 3(2*f0) Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref.
FT_DA: Diff.current 1(5*f0) FT_DA: Diff.current 2(5*f0) FT_DA: Diff.current 3(5*f0) Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Restrain. current 1 FT_DA: Restrain. current 2 FT_DA: Restrain. current 3 Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref.
005 085 006 085 007 085
Fig. 3-74 Fig. 3-74 Fig. 3-74
005 083 006 083 007 083
Fig. 3-74 Fig. 3-74 Fig. 3-74
025 082 Fig. 3-75 FT_DA: Diff. current REF_1 026 082 Fig. 3-75 FT_DA: Diff. current REF_2 027 082 Fig. 3-75 FT_DA: Diff. current REF_3 Display of the differential current, determined by the ground differential protection function (REF_1, REF_2 or REF_3, respectively), referred to Iref. 025 083 Fig. 3-75 FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_1 026 083 Fig. 3-75 FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_2 027 083 Fig. 3-75 FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_3 Display of the restraining current, determined by the ground differential protection function (REF_1, REF_2 or REF_3, respectively), referred to Iref.
8-40

(continued)
Over-/Underfrequency Protection
f<>: Max. frequ. for f> Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition. f<>: Min. frequ. for f< Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
005 002
005 001
8-41

(continued)
8.2.3 Overload Recording
Event Recording
033 020 033 021 033 022 033 023 033 024 033 025 033 026 033 027
OL_RC: Overload recording 1 OL_RC: Overload recording 2 OL_RC: Overload recording 3 OL_RC: Overload recording 4 OL_RC: Overload recording 5 OL_RC: Overload recording 6 OL_RC: Overload recording 7 OL_RC: Overload recording 8 Point of entry into the overload log. FT_RC: Fault recording 1 FT_RC: Fault recording 2 FT_RC: Fault recording 3 FT_RC: Fault recording 4 FT_RC: Fault recording 5 FT_RC: Fault recording 6 FT_RC: Fault recording 7 FT_RC: Fault recording 8 Point of entry into the fault log.
Fault Recording
003 000 033 001 033 002 033 003 033 004 033 005 033 006 033 007
8-42
9 Commissioning
9 9.1
Commissioning Safety Instructions
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this manual, may work on or operate this device.
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required. In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is required for proper operation of the unit. The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm2 is required.
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected, always disconnect the device from the supply.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation. In units with pin terminal connection, the threaded terminal block for connection to the current transformers is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
9-1
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage for the device is shut off.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when connecting the prescribed connecting cable be careful not to touch the socket contacts.
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical Data')
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
9-2
9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2 Preparation
Commissioning Tests
After the P63x has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the commissioning procedure can begin. Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again: Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location? Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of the device? Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase sequences correct? After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated. The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied. Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are carried out (see Chapter 3, Self-Monitoring). The LED indicators for Operation (H1) and Blocked/Faulty (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s, the P63x is ready for operation. This is recognized when the text 'P63x' is shown in the first line on the LCD screen. Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Chapter 6, Enabling Parameter Changes), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.
9-3
9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting the P63x and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from the integrated local control panel. Par/DvID/ folder: DVICE: Device password 1 DVICE: Device password 2 Par/Conf/ folder: PC: Name of manufacturer PC: Bay address PC: Device address PC: Baud rate PC: Parity bit COMM1: Function group COMM1 COMM1: General enable USER COMM1: Name of manufacturer COMM1: Line idle state COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Communicat. protocol COMM1: Octet comm. address COMM1: Octet address ASDU COMM2: Function group COMM2 COMM2: General enable USER COMM2: Name of manufacturer COMM2: Line idle state COMM2: Baud rate COMM2: Parity bit COMM2: Octet comm. address COMM2: Octet address ASDU Par/Func/Glob/ folder: PC: Command blocking PC: Sig./meas.val.block. COMM1: Command blocking C O M M 1 : Sig./meas.block.USER COMM2: Command blocking C O M M 2 : Sig./meas.block.USER Further instructions on these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8. Note: The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
9-4
9 Commissioning
(continued)
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out once again before blocking is cancelled: Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal connection diagram? Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs? Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection diagram? Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays? Have all settings been made correctly? Now blocking can be cleared as follows (Par/Func/Glob/ folder): M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d 'Yes (on)' Testing By using the signals and displays generated by the P63x, it is possible to determine whether the P63x is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu tree. If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing, the trip commands can be blocked at M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R ('Par/Func/Glob' folder) or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for a set time through M AIN : M a n . tr i p c m d . U SER (Oper/CtrlTest folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command from the integrated local control panel is passwordprotected (see Chapter 6, "Password-Protected Control Operations"). Note: The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip commands). If the P63x is connected to a control station, the user is advised to activate the test mode via M A I N : T e s t m o d e USER ("Par/Func/Glob/" folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified accordingly (cause of transmission: test mode).
9-5
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the binary signal inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal ("Oper/Cycl/Phys" folder), it is possible to determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the P63x. The values displayed have the following meanings: 'Low': Not energized. 'High': Energized. 'Without function': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input. This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
Checking the output relays
It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time setting at O U T P: H o l d - ti m e fo r te s t in Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). First select the output relay to be tested (O U T P: R e l a y a s s i g n . f. te s t, Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). The output relay to be tested can only be selected if the device has been set to 'off-line' at M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder). Test triggering then occurs via O U T P : R e l a y t e s t (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). It is password-protected (see Chapter 6, Password-Protected Control Operations). Four parameter subsets are stored in the P63x, one of which is activated. Before checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t (Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder).
Checking the protection function
9-6
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking differential protection
For single-side feed, the fault current characteristic crosses the first knee of the tripping characteristic of the P63x so that the basic threshold value is always checked. The current I to which the P63x responds for single-side feed is calculated as follows:
I= Idiff > Inom,z k am,z
z: Idiff>: Inom,z: kam,z:
transformer end a, b, c or d Set operate value nominal current of the P63x for transformer end a, b, c or d amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b, c or d
For single-side one-phase or two-phase feed, a vector group-matching factor in accordance with the set vector group ID needs to be taken into account in addition to the amplitude-matching factor. The vector group-matching factors are given in the tables below (page after next) and the threshold current is calculated as follows:
I Idiff > Inom,z k am,z k s,y,z
z: Idiff>: Inom,z: kam,z: k s,y ,z :
transformer end a, b, c or d Set operate value nominal current of the P63x for transformer end a, b, c or d amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b, c or d vector group-matching factor (see tables below)
9-7
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P63x are displayed as measured operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the P63x to the system current transformers and the setting of the vector group ID are correct.. The tables below (next page) give the factors ks which serve to calculate the differential current for single-side feed. The display of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user.
Id,y = k am,z k s,y,z Itest,x
x: z: y: Id,y : kam,z: k s,y ,z : Itest,x:
phase A, B or C transformer end a, b, c or d measuring system 1, 2 or 3 differential current as displayed amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b, c or d vector group-matching factor (see tables below) test current phase A, B or C
In evaluating the test results, one should be aware that the P63x will trip as follows, if a value of Idiff>> or Idiff>>> is exceeded. Idiff>> exceeded: Idiff>>> exceeded: Trip regardless of the inrush and overfluxing restraint Trip regardless of the restraining current and regardless of all other restraints.
9-8
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, zero sequence-filtered Transformer end Vector group ID DIFF: Diff Current 1 DIFF: Diff Current 2 DIFF: Diff Current 3 a 0=12 0.67 0.67 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 1 2 3 4 b, c or d 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00
Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, zero sequence-filtered Transformer end Vector group ID DIFF: Diff Current 1 DIFF: Diff Current 2 DIFF: Diff Current 3 a 0=12 0.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1 2 3 4 b, c or d 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15
Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, not zero sequence-filtered Transformer end Vector group ID DIFF: Diff Current 1 DIFF: Diff Current 2 DIFF: Diff Current 3 a 0=12 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 b, c or d 4 6 8 10
0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00
Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, not zero sequence-filtered Transformer end Vector group ID DIFF: Diff Current 1 DIFF: Diff Current 2 DIFF: Diff Current 3 a 0=12 0.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 b, c or d 4 6 8 10
1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00
9-9
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The connection of the phase currents can be checked using the phase angles provided as measured operating data by the P63x. If the phase currents are connected correctly and there is an ideal balanced load on the transformer, the phase angles between the phase currents of any one transformer end are displayed as follows: Phase sequence A-B-C Phase sequence A-C-B
AB,z = BC,z = CA,z = 120
AB,z = BC, z = CA, z = 120
This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the phase sequence.
9-10
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The phase angle between the phase currents of two transformer ends for a particular phase is a function of the vector group of the transformer. This phase angle should be displayed as follows: Vector group 0 = 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
x ,A z = 180 x ,A z = 150 x ,A z = 120 x,A z = 90 x,A z = 60 x,A z = 30 x,A z = 0 x,A z = 30 x,A z = 60 x,A z = 90 x ,A z = 120 x ,A z = 150
This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the phase sequence. Changing the setting for the connection scheme of an involved series transformer, on the other hand, will change the measured operating data value by 180.
9-11
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking ground differential protection
The current I to which the P63x responds for single-side feed, neutral-point side, is calculated as follows:
I Idiff > Inom k am,z
z: Idiff>: Inom: kam,z:
transformer end a, b, c or d set operate value nominal current of the P63x amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b, c or d
There will be no trip for single-side, single-pole, phase-side feed. The differential and restraining currents formed by the P63x are displayed. The display of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user. Completion of commissioning
Before the P63x is released for operation, the user should make sure that the following steps have been taken: All memories have been reset. (Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d i n g , both in Oper/CtrlTest/ folder.) Blocking of output relays has been cancelled. (O U T P : O u t p . r e l . b l o c k U S E R , Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting No.) Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled. (M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R , Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting No.) The device is on-line. (M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d , Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting Yes (on).) After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling Operation (H1) should be on.
9-12
10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P63x to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging instructions in the section entitled Unpacking and Packing in Chapter 5 when returning equipment to the manufacturer. Problem: Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel. Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points. Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P63x is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Before checking further, disconnect the P63x from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is not fused. If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger that the damage will spread. Required fuses: VA,nom = 24 V DC: VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: Type M3.5 Type M2
10-1
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P63x issues an Alarm signal on LED H3. Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see the section entitled Monitoring Signal Memory Readout in Chapter 6). The table below lists possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting has been entered at SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the P63x response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and 'Blocked/faulty'. Self-Monitoring SFMON: Warning (LED) Warning configured for LED H3. SFMON: Warning (relay) Warning configured for an output relay. Key: -: Yes: Updating:
1)
036 070
036 100
No reaction and/or no output relay triggered. The corresponding output relay is triggered. The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring signal is still present. The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been configured at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . f a u l t . The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been configured at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
: :
2)
093 024 SFMON: Cold restart A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Cold rest./SW update A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
093 025
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure Supplementary warning that this device is blocked. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
090 019
10-2
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty Multiple signal: output relay defective. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1) SFMON: Hardware clock fail. The hardware clock has failed. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Battery failure Battery voltage too low. Replace battery. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
041 200
093 040
090 010
096 121
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
093 081 SFMON: +15V supply faulty The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
093 082 SFMON: +24V supply faulty The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: -15V supply faulty The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
093 080
10-3
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 SFMON: Wrong module slot 2 SFMON: Wrong module slot 3 SFMON: Wrong module slot 4 SFMON: Wrong module slot 5 SFMON: Wrong module slot 6 SFMON: Wrong module slot 7 SFMON: Wrong module slot 8 SFMON: Wrong module slot 9 SFMON: Wrong module slot 10 SFMON: Wrong module slot 11 SFMON: Wrong module slot 12 SFMON: Wrong module slot 13 SFMON: Wrong module slot 14 SFMON: Wrong module slot 15 SFMON: Wrong module slot 16 SFMON: Wrong module slot 17 SFMON: Wrong module slot 18 SFMON: Wrong module slot 19 SFMON: Wrong module slot 20 SFMON: Wrong module slot 21 Module in wrong slot.
096 100 096 101 096 102 096 103 096 104 096 105 096 106 096 107 096 108 096 109 096 110 096 111 096 112 096 113 096 114 096 115 096 116 096 117 096 118 096 119 096 120
10-4
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 SFMON: Defect.module slot 2 SFMON: Defect.module slot 3 SFMON: Defect.module slot 4 SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 SFMON: Defect.module slot 6 SFMON: Defect.module slot 7 SFMON: Defect.module slot 8 SFMON: Defect.module slot 9 SFMON: Defect.module slot10 SFMON: Defect.module slot11 SFMON: Defect.module slot12 SFMON: Defect.module slot13 SFMON: Defect.module slot14 SFMON: Defect.module slot15 SFMON: Defect.module slot16 SFMON: Defect.module slot17 SFMON: Defect.module slot18 SFMON: Defect.module slot19 SFMON: Defect.module slot20 SFMON: Defect.module slot21 Defective module in slot x. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1) SFMON: Module A DPR faulty Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected during device startup. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Module A RAM faulty RAM fault on communication module A. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
097 000 097 001 097 002 097 003 097 004 097 005 097 006 097 007 097 008 097 009 097 010 097 011 097 012 097 013 097 014 097 015 097 016 097 017 097 018 097 019 097 020
093 070
093 071
093 110 SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty Fault in the program or data memory of the analog module. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610 093 111
10-5
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Error K 701 SFMON: Error K 702 SFMON: Error K 703 SFMON: Error K 704 SFMON: Error K 705 SFMON: Error K 706 SFMON: Error K 707 SFMON: Error K 708 SFMON: Error K 801 SFMON: Error K 802 SFMON: Error K 901 SFMON: Error K 902 SFMON: Error K 903 SFMON: Error K 904 SFMON: Error K 905 SFMON: Error K 906 SFMON: Error K 907 SFMON: Error K 908 SFMON: Error K 1001 SFMON: Error K 1002 SFMON: Error K 1003 SFMON: Error K 1004 SFMON: Error K 1005 SFMON: Error K 1006 SFMON: Error K 1007 SFMON: Error K 1008 SFMON: Error K 1201 SFMON: Error K 1202 SFMON: Error K 1601 SFMON: Error K 1602 SFMON: Error K 1603 SFMON: Error K 1604 SFMON: Error K 1605 SFMON: Error K 1606 SFMON: Error K 1607 SFMON: Error K 1608 SFMON: Error K 1801 SFMON: Error K 1802 SFMON: Error K 1803 SFMON: Error K 1804 SFMON: Error K 1805 SFMON: Error K 1806 SFMON: Error K 2001 SFMON: Error K 2002 SFMON: Error K 2003 SFMON: Error K 2004 SFMON: Error K 2005 SFMON: Error K 2006 SFMON: Error K 2007 SFMON: Error K 2008
097 078 097 079 097 080 097 081 097 082 097 083 097 084 097 085 097 086 097 087 097 094 097 095 097 096 097 097 097 098 097 099 097 100 097 101 097 102 097 103 097 104 097 105 097 106 097 107 097 108 097 109 097 118 097 119 097 150 097 151 097 152 097 153 097 154 097 155 097 156 097 157 097 166 097 167 097 168 097 169 097 170 097 171 097 182 097 183 097 184 097 185 097 186 097 187 097 188 097 189
10-6
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Output relay K xxx defective. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1) SFMON: Undef. operat. code Undefined operation code.
093 010
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. Invalid arithmetic operation.
093 011
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Undefined interrupt Undefined interrupt.
093 012
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Exception oper.syst. Interrupt of the operating system.
093 013
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Protection failure Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected an error.
090 021
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Checksum error param A checksum error involving the settings in the memory (NOVRAM) has been detected.
090 003
093 041 SFMON: Clock sync. error In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than 10 ms.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
10-7
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
093 026 SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Overflow MT_RC Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. Software overloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Inval. SW vers.comm. Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: M.c.b. trip V The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
098 000 093 075 093 015 090 012
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of Voltage and Frequency protection functions. 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) -/-
10-8
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
091 018 SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the current-measuring circuits. (See functions MCMON and CTS, measuringcircuit monitoring multiple signal.)
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/091 026 SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a 091 027 SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, b 091 028 SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, c 091 029 SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, d The measuring-circuit monitoring function, associated with the respective end, has detected a fault in the current-measuring circuits. (See functions MCMON and CTS, monitoring of measuring circuits.)
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y Incorrect or invalid software for analog module has been downloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Faulty DSP The DSP Coprocessor has detected an error.
093 127 093 113
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Invalid SW vers. DSP Incorrect or invalid software has been downloaded for the DSP coprocessor.
093 128
093 114 SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 093 115 SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of analog I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/093 116 SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
10-9
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
098 024 SFMON: PT100 open circuit The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance thermometer.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Overload 20 mA input The 20 mA input of analog module Y is overloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/098 026 SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input. 098 025
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/098 028 SFMON: Setting error f<> The over-/ underfrequency protection function has been set to 'overfrequency' (by way of the settings for operate threshold and nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t operating mode.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/091 007 SFMON: Iref, a inval. range 091 008 SFMON: Iref, b inval. range 091 009 SFMON: Iref, c inval. range 091 016 SFMON: Iref, d inval. rang The reference current determined by the P63x for differential protection is not within the permissible range.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Protection is blocked. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Matching fail. end a SFMON: Matching fail. end b SFMON: Matching fail. end c SFMON: Matching fail. end d The calculated amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is above the permissible range. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Protection is blocked. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
091 000 091 001 091 002 091 017
10-10
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
091 006 SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv. The second highest amplitude matching factor for differential protection is smaller than permitted.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Protection is blocked. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_1 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_2 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_3 The reference current determined by the P63x for ground differential protection is not within the permissible range. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Protection is blocked. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_1 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_2 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_3 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_2 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_3 The calculated amplitude matching factor of the ground differential protection function is above the permissible range. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Protection is blocked. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
091 104 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_1 091 114 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_2 091 124 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_3 The lowest amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is lower than permitted. 091 101 091 111 091 121 091 102 091 112 091 122 091 105 091 115 091 125
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Protection is blocked. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
10-11
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: CTA error THRM1 SFMON: CTA error THRM2 Faulty coolant temperature acquisition. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/SFMON: Setting error THRM1 SFMON: Setting error THRM2 The maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value. This setting is not valid. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of thermal overload protection 'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
098 036 098 037
098 038 098 039
093 120 SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync The M AIN : M i n - p u l s e c l o c k EXT function has been configured to a binary input of analog I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Clock synchronization failure. 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2) 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/098 053 SFMON: Output 30 098 054 SFMON: Output 30 (t) 098 055 SFMON: Output 31 098 056 SFMON: Output 31 (t) 098 057 SFMON: Output 32 098 058 SFMON: Output 32 (t) These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g . The warning signals are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
10-12
11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this manual, may work on or operate this device. The P63x is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary. Maintenance procedures in the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the recommended temperature range (+55C or 131F), the useful life of these components is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. When the operating temperatures are approx. +45C inside the devices, the required maintenance interval can be increased by about 1 year. The P63x is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only a few A during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval cited above. Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
11-1
11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules: Electrolytic capacitor: on power supply module V. Lithium battery: on power supply module V. Note: Only Schneider Electric-approved components may be used (see Chapter 13).
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1
Component drawing for power supply module V.
11-2
11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and the battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Note:
The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
11-3
11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing
The P63x is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to 12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years 4 years at the maximum. The P63x incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis. Nonetheless, there are a number of sub-functions that cannot be checked by the selfmonitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases. In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits
The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-monitoring function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the devices general functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is still necessary to test from the device terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly. The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (i.e. 0.5 Inom) and a "large" measured value (i.e. 4 Inom) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range. The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous measurements. The dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since only the stability of a few passive components is checked. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range. Additional analog testing is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely numerical and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type testing. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.
11-4
11 Maintenance
(continued)
Binary opto inputs
The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read out (Oper/Cycl/Phys folder). This check should be performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring. With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even twophase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control function (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder).
Binary outputs
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial Interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
11-5
11-6
12 Storage
12 Storage Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of -25C to +70C (-13F to +158F) must be maintained during storage (see chapter entitled 'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that neither condensation nor ice formation will result. If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P63x for approximately 10 minutes. If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required and discharges rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be previously read out and stored separately.
12-1
12-2
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts The P63x is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. User-specific labeling for non-standard configurations of the LEDs can be printed on the blank label strips packed with the device. The label strips should then be affixed to the local control panel on the unit at the appropriate location. The label strips can be filled in using an overhead projector pen with water-resistant ink ('Stabilo' type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Cable bushings Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V Electrolytic capacitor 100 F, 385 V DC Only the following brands of capacitor are permitted: Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101 Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101 Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5-250V Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: M2-250V Connecting parts & fasteners (to assemble flush-mounted cases to form a mounting rack) Empty subrack 40 T Cover frame 40 T Cover frame 84 T Operating program for Windows
Order No. 88512-4-0337414-301
88512-4-9650539-302
88512-4-9650535-302 88512-4-9650545-302 88512-4-9650723-301 On request (MiCOM S1)
13-1
13-2
14 Order Information
14
Order Information
14.1 Order Information for P631 in 40TE case

MiCOM P631
Name PCS Cell No. Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Basic device: Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 40TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Processor extension and Current transformer: With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8) 8) 2) 2) 12)
Order number 1234 5 6 7 N 9 3 4 0 8 9 10 11 12, 13 AA -305 -4xx -403 -404 -610 14 0 15 A -46x 16 A 17 A 18 A -8xx
P631- N N P631-
N N N N 0 0 0
-9x x -95 x
3 4 8 9 3 4 6 7 8 9 Without order extension no. -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
Power supply and additional outputs:
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V) >146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector For connection to glass fiber, ST connector Protocol IEC61850 For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) Language: English (German) German (English) French (English) Polish (English) Spanish (English)
4) 4) 7) 4) 4)
1 2 4 -94 6 7
Without order extension no. -800 -801 Not yet available - on request Not yet available - on request Not yet available - on request Not yet available - on request -802 -803 -804 -805
Px40 English (English)

4) 4) 4)
Russian (English)
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined! 4) Second included language in brackets 7) Hardware option, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application 12) Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) requires DSP-Coprocessor
14-1
(continued)

MiCOM P632
Name PCS Cell No. Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Basic device: Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Processor extension and Current transformer: With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) Voltage transformer: Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) Additional binary I/O options: Without With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) Power supply and additional outputs: VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Further add. options: Without With analog module With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8) 8) 2) 2) 12)
P632- N N P632-
N N N N 1
-9x x -95 x
3 4 8 9 1 0 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 4 Without order extension no. -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector For connection to glass fiber, ST connector Protocol IEC61850 For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
Language: English (German) German (English) French (English) Polish (English) Spanish (English)
4) 4) 7) 4) 4)
1 2 4 -94 6 7

4) 4) 4)
Russian (English)
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined! 4) Second included language in brackets 7) Hardware option, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters 8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application 12) Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) requires DSP-Coprocessor
14-2
(continued)
14.3 Order Information for P633 in 40TE or 84TE case

MiCOM P633
Name PCS Cell No. Three Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Three Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Basic device: Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Processor extension and Current transformer: With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T31...T34) Voltage transformer: Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) Additional binary I/O options: Without With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) Power supply and additional outputs: VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Further add. options: Without With analog module With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) With analog and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8) 8) 2) 2) 2) 12)
Order number 1234 5 6 7 N 9 3 7 8 9 8 9 10 11 12, 13 AA -305 0 0 -4xx -404 -405 -406 -610 14 0 15 A -46x 16 A 17 A 18 A -8xx
P633- N N P633-
N N N N 1
-9x x -95 x
3 4 8 9 9 1 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 4 6 Without order extension no. -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector For connection to glass fiber, ST connector Protocol IEC61850 For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) -94 6 1 2 4
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) Language: English (German) German (English) French (English) Polish (English) Spanish (English)
4) 4) 7) 4) 4)

4) 4) 4)
Russian (English)
14-3
(continued)

MiCOM P634
Name PCS Cell No. Four Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Four Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Basic device: Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Processor extension and Current transformer: With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T31...T34 / T41...43) Voltage transformer: Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) Additional binary I/O options: Without With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) Power supply and additional outputs: VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Further add. options: Without With analog module With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) With analog and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8) 8) 2) 2) 2) 12)
P634- N N P634-
N N N N 1
-9x x -95 x
3 4 8 9 9 1 0 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 4 6 Without order extension no. -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector For connection to glass fiber, ST connector Protocol IEC61850 For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
Language: English (German) German (English) French (English) Polish (English) Spanish (English)
4) 4) 7) 4) 4)
1 2 4 -94 6 7

4) 4) 4)
Russian (English)
14-4
(continued)
Information about Ordering Options Language version In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension number (-805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option supporting Cyrillic characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference menu texts (English) will be available for display. However, other Western European languages containing extra characters will not be fully supported. Consequently, selecting the "Russian / English" ordering option means that it will not be possible to download Western European data models into the device. Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also "Technical Data" chapter) are provided for applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
14-5
14-6
Appendix
A Glossary B Signal List C Terminal Connection Diagrams D Overview of Changes
AN-1
Appendix
(continued)
A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B 2.1 B 2.1.1 B 2.1.2 B 2.1.3 B 2.1.4 B 2.1.5 B3 B 3.1 B 3.1.1 B 3.1.1.1 B 3.1.1.2 B 3.1.1.3 B 3.1.2 B 3.1.3 B 3.1.3.1 B 3.1.3.2 B 3.1.3.3 B 3.1.3.3.1 B 3.1.3.3.2 B 3.1.3.3.3 B 3.1.3.3.4 B 3.1.3.3.5 B 3.1.3.3.6 B 3.1.3.3.7 B 3.1.3.3.8 B 3.1.3.4 B 3.1.3.4.1 B 3.1.3.4.2 B 3.1.3.4.3 B 3.1.3.5 B 3.1.3.6
Glossary Function Groups Modules Symbols Examples of Signal Names Symbols used List of Signals Internal Signal Names Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard) Interoperability Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) Application Layer Basic Application Functions Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 Interoperability Physical Layer Electrical Interface Optical Interface Transmission Rate Link Layer Application Layer Transmission Mode for Application Data Common Address of ASDU Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction System Functions in Monitor Direction Status Indications in Monitor Direction Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction Measured values in Monitor Direction Generic Functions in Monitor Direction Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction System Functions in Control Direction General Commands in Control Direction Generic Functions in Control Direction Basic Application Functions Miscellaneous
A-1 A-1 A-3 A-4 A-11 A-12 B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-11 B-14 B-14 B-14 B-14 B-14 B-14 B-15 B-15 B-15 B-15 B-15 B-15 B-16 B-17 B-18 B-19 B-20 B-20 B-22 B-23 B-23 B-23 B-24 B-25 B-25
AN-2
Appendix
(continued)
C C1 C 1.1 C 1.2 C2 C 2-1 C 2.2 C3 C 3.1 C 3.2 C 3.3 C4 C 4.1 C 4.2 C5 D
Terminal Connection Diagrams Location diagram for P631 in 40TE case 40 T case, pin-terminal connection 40 T case, ring-terminal connection Location diagram for P632 in 40TE case 40 T case, pin-terminal connection 84 T case, ring-terminal connection Location diagram for P633 in 40TE or 84TE case 40 T case, pin-terminal connection 84 T case, pin-terminal connection 84 T case, ring-terminal connection Location diagram for P634 in 84TE case 84 T case, pin-terminal connection 84 T case, ring-terminal connection Ethernet Module P63x - Overview of Changes
C-1 C-1 C-1 C-4 C-7 C-7 C-13 C-19 C-19 C-24 C-30 C-36 C-36 C-42 C-48 D-1
AN-3
AN-4
Appendix A - Glossary
A1
Function Groups
P631 P632 P633 P634
COMM1: Communication interface 1 COMM2: Communication interface 2 (as of P63x version 602) CTS: Current transformer supervision (as of P63x version -606) DIFF: Differential Protection DTOC1: Definite-time overcurrent protection 1 DTOC2 Definite-time overcurrent protection 2 DTOC3: Definite-time overcurrent protection 3 DVICE: Device f<>: Over-/Underfrequency Protection FT_DA: Fault Data Acquisition FT_RC: Fault Recording GOOSE: Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (as of P63x version 610) GSSE: IEC Generic Substation Status Events (as of P63x version 610) IDMT1: Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1 IDMT2: Inverse-time overcurrent protection 2 IDMT3: Inverse-time overcurrent protection 3 IEC: IEC 61850 Communication (as of P63x version 610) INP: Binary input IRIGB: IRIG-B interface LED: LED indicators LIM_1: Limit value monitoring 1 LIM_2: Limit value monitoring 2 LIM_3: Limit value monitoring 3 LIMIT: Limit Value Monitoring LOC: Local control panel LOGIC: Logic MAIN: Main function MCM_1: Measuring-circuit monitoring MCM_1 (as of P63x version -602) MCM_2: Measuring-circuit monitoring MCM_2 (as of P63x version -602) MCM_3: Measuring-circuit monitoring MCM_3 (as of P63x version -602) MCM_4: Measuring-circuit monitoring MCM_4 (as of P63x version -602) MEASI: Measured Data Input MEASO: Measured Data Output MT_RC: Monitoring Signal Recording OL_DA: Overload Data Acquisition OL_RC: Overload Recording
A-1
(continued)
P631 P632 P633 P634 OP_RC: OUTP: PC: PSS: REF_1: REF_2: REF_3: SFMON: THRM1: THRM2: UCA2: V/f: V<>: Operating data recording Binary outputs PC link Parameter subset selection Ground differential protection (Br: Restricted earth fault
protection) 1 protection) 2 protection) 3
Ground differential protection (Br: Restricted earth fault Ground differential protection (Br: Restricted earth fault
Self-Monitoring Thermal Overload Protection 1 Thermal Overload Protection 2 Utility Communication Architecture 2.0 (P63x versions 604/-605/-606 only) Overfluxing Protection (as of P63x version -602) Time-Voltage Protection
A-2
(continued)
A2
A: B: L: P: T: V: X: Y:
Modules
Communication module Digital bus module MMI module Processor module Transformer module Power supply module Binary I/O module Analog I/O module
A-3
(continued)
A3
Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12: modified 1991 Analog information processing according to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981; To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols have been used, taken from several DIN documents. As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side. Symbol Description To obtain more space for representing a group of related elements, contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose common contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction. Note: This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with two or more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a control block and an output block. There exists at least one logical link between elements whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow direction. Components of a symbol A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or more qualifiers.
A-4
(continued)
Symbol
Description Control block A control block contains an input function common to several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger elements, for example.
Output block An output block contains an output function common to several symbols.
MAIN: Inom Device [ 010 003 ] D5Z08X5B
Settable control block The 6 digits in square brackets represent the address under which the function shown in the text is implemented. Settable control block with function blocks The digits in the function block show the settings that are possible for this function. The text below the symbol assigns the corresponding unit or meaning to each setting.
MAIN: Inom Device [ 010 003 ] 1.0 5.0 1.0: 1.0 A 5.0: 5.0 A D5Z08X6B
A-5
(continued)
Symbol
Description Static input Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
Dynamic input Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.
Negation of an output The value up to the border line is negated at the output.
Negation of an input The input value is negated before the border line.
Dynamic input with negation Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective.
AND element The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1. OR element The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is 1. Threshold element The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number. (m out of n) element The output variable will be 1 only if just one input variable is 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number if the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly.
A-6
(continued)
Symbol
Description Delay element The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds or strobe ticks). Monostable flip-flop The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, regardless of the duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable). Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable flip-flop is retriggerable. The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any other duration. Analog-digital converter An analog input signal is converted to a binary signal.
Subtractor The output variable is the difference between the two input variables. A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input. Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input signal drops below the threshold again. Memory, general Storage of a binary or analog signal.
A-7
(continued)
Symbol
Description Non-stable flip-flop When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is generated at the output. The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts with the input variable transition (synchronized start). If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop). Amplifier The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1. Band pass filter The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input signals. All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are attenuated. Counter At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are counted and stored in the function block. At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0. Electromechanical drive in general, here a relay, for example.
Signal level converter with electrical isolation between input and output. L+ = pos. voltage input L- = neg. voltage input U1 = device identifier
A-8
(continued)
Symbol
Description Input transformer with phase and item identifiers (according to DIN EN 60445) Phase identifiers for current inputs: for A: A1 and A2 for B: B1 and B2 for C: C1 and C2 for N: N1 and N2 Phase identifiers for voltage inputs via transformer 1: for A: 1U for B: 1V for C: 1W for N: 1N via transformer 2: for A: 2U for B: 2V Item identifiers for current transformers: for A: T1 for B: T2 for C: T3 for N: T4 for voltage transformer 1: for A: T5 for B: T6 for C: T7 for N: T8 for VG-N transformer: T90 for voltage transformer 2: for A: T15 Change-over contact with item identifier
Special symbol Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (closed-circuit operation).
A-9
(continued)
Symbol
Description PC interface with pin connections
Multiplier The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two input variables.
Divider The output variable is the result of the division of the two input variables.
Comparator The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are equal to the function in the function block. Formula block The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block
A-10
(continued)
A4
Examples of Signal Names
All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of Chapter 3 as follows: Signal Name FT_RC: Fault recording n
305 100
Description Internal signal names are not coded by a data model address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. The small figure underneath the signal name represents a code that is irrelevant to the user. The internal signal names used and their origins are listed in Appendix B. Signal names coded by a data model address are represented by their address (shown in square brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8. A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its signal name, address, and the setting preceded by the setting arrow.
DIST: VNG>> triggered [ 036 015 ] MAIN: General reset [ 003 002 ] 1: execute
A-11
(continued)
A5
Symbol t V V I I Z
Z
Symbols used
Meaning Time duration Voltage, potential difference Complex voltage Electrical current Complex current Complex impedance Modulus of complex impedance Frequency Temperature in C Sum, result Unit of electrical resistance Angle Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a defined current and a defined voltage. Time constant Temperature difference in K
f T
A-12
Appendix B - List of Signals
B 1 Internal Signal Names Internal signal names are not coded by an external address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. COMM1: Selected protocol CTS: Blocked CTS: End y faulty (y: a,b,c,d) CTS:Reset DIFF: Id,1 DIFF: Id,2 DIFF: Id,3 DIFF: IR,1 DIFF: IR,2 DIFF: IR,3 DIFF: I(2*f0),1 DIFF: I(2*f0),2 DIFF: I(2*f0),3 DIFF: I(5*f0),1 DIFF: I(5*f0),2 DIFF: I(5*f0),3 DIFF: Sound match f<>: No. periods reached FT_DA: Save measured values Ineg/Ipos>,y (y: a,b,c,d) Ineg/Ipos>>,y (y: a,b,c,d) Ipos>,y (y: a,b,c,d) LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) MAIN: Reset LED MAIN: Protection active MAIN: Time tag MEASO: Enable MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp. REF_1: Id,N,a REF_1: IR,N,a THRM1: Block. by CTA error THRM1: I THRM1: With CTA V/f: Enable meas. Fig. 3-6 Fig. 3-141 Fig. 3-143 Fig. 3-145 Fig. 3-87 Fig. 3-87 Fig. 3-87 Fig. 3-87 Fig. 3-87 Fig. 3-87 Fig. 3-89 Fig. 3-89 Fig. 3-89 Fig. 3-91 Fig. 3-91 Fig. 3-91 Fig. 3-80 Fig. 3-129 Fig. 3-72 Fig. 3-142 Fig. 3-142 Fig. 3-142 Fig: 3-156, 3-157, 3-158, 3-159, 3-160 Fig: 3-156, 3-157, 3-158, 3-159, 3-160 Fig. 3-60 Fig. 3-50 Fig. 3-59 Fig. 3-28 Fig. 3-29 Fig. 3-97 Fig. 3-97 Fig. 3-122 Fig. 3-123 Fig. 3-122 Fig. 3-133
B-1

(continued)
B2
Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol interface for substation control systems. B 2.1 Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems.Certain parameters such as the number of bytes (octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different manufacturers, then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters. The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked. 1 Note: The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured values. Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) x Multipoint-party line configuration Multipoint-star configuration
B 2.1.1 x x
Point-to-point configuration Multiple point-to-point configuration
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.

B-2

(continued)
B 2.1.2
Physical Layer 1 (Network-Specific Parameters)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction) 2 Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Standardized 100 bit/s 200 bit/s 300 bit/s x x 600 bit/s 1,200 bit/s Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s x x x 2,400 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 9,600 bit/s 2,400 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 9,600 bit/s 19,200 bit/s 38,400 bit/s 56,000 bit/s 64,000 bit/s Balanced interface X.24/X.27
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 3 Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Standardized 100 bit/s 200 bit/s 300 bit/s x x 600 bit/s 1,200 bit/s Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Recommended with > 1,200 bit/s x x x 2,400 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 9,600 bit/s 2,400 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 9,600 bit/s 19,200 bit/s 38,400 bit/s 56,000 bit/s 64,000 bit/s Balanced interface X.24/X.27
1 2
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical. B-3

(continued)
B 2.1.3
Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)1
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion standard. Link Transmission Procedure x Balanced transmission Address Field of the Link x Not present (balanced transmission only) x Unbalanced transmission x One octet x Two octets 2 Frame Length 240 Maximum length L (number of octets) x Structured x Unstructured
1 2
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. Balanced only.

B-4

(continued)
B 2.1.4
Application Layer1
Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion standard. Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter) x One octet Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter) x One octet x Two octets x Three octets Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter) x One octet x Two octets (with originator address) x Structured x Unstructured x Two octets
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. B-5

(continued)
Selection of Standard ASDUs Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) x x x x <1> <2> <3> <4> = = = = = x x <5> <6> = = Step position information Step position information with time tag M_ST_NA_1 M_ST_TA_1 Single-point information Single-point information with time tag Double-point information Double-point information with time tag M_SP_NA_1 M_SP_TA_1 M_DP_NA_1 M_DP_TA_1
x x x x
<7> <8> <9> <10>
= = = =
Bit string of 32 bit Bit string of 32 bit with time tag Measured value, normalized value Measured value, normalized value with time tag
M_BO_NA_1 M_BO_TA_1 M_ME_NA_1 M_ME_TA_1
x x
<11> <12>
= =
Measured value, scaled value Measured value, scaled value with time tag
M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_TB_1
<13>
Measured value, short floating point value
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
Measured value, short floating point value with time tag
M_ME_TC_1
x x
<15> <16>
= =
Integrated totals Integrated totals with time tag
M_IT_NA_1 M_IT_TA_1
B-6

(continued)
<17>
Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
<18>
Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag
ME_EP_TB_1
<19>
Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TC_1
<20>
Packed single-point information with status change detection
M_PS_NA_1
<21>
Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor
M_ME_ND_1
B-7

(continued)
Process Information in Monitor Direction 1 (Station-Specific Parameter) x x x <45> <46> <47> <48> = = = = Single command Double command Regulating step command Set point command, normalized value C_SC_NA_1 C_DC_NA_1 C_IT_NA_1 C_RC_NA_1
<49> <50>
= =
Set point command, scaled value Set point command, short floating point value
C_SE_NB_1 C_SE_NC_1
<51>
Bit string of 32 bit
C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) x <70> = End of initialization ME_EI_NA_1
Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.

B-8

(continued)
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) x x x x x <100> <101> <102> <103> <104> <105> <106> = = = = = = = Interrogation command Counter interrogation command Read command Clock synchronization command 1 Test command Reset process command Delay acquisition command 2 C_IC_NA_1 C_CI_NA_1 C_RD_NA_1 C_CS_NA_1 C_TS_NB_1 C_RP_NC_1 C_CD_NA_1
1 2
The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station. See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. B-9

(continued)
Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) x <110> = Parameter of measured value, normalized value P_ME_NA_1
<111>
Parameter of measured value, scaled value
P_ME_NB_1
<112>
Parameter of measured value, short floating point value
P_ME_NC_1
<113>
Parameter activation
P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter) <120> <121> <122> = = = File ready Section ready Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_FR_NA_1 F_SR_NA_1 F_SC_NA_1
<123> <124> <125> <126>
= = = =
Last section, last segment Ack file, ack section Segment Directory
F_LS_NA_1 F_AF_NA_1 F_SG_NA_1 F_DR_TA_1
B-10

(continued)
B 2.1.5
Basic Application Functions
Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter) x Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter) x x x x x x x Global Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 x x x x x x Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Addresses per group have to be defined. x x x x Group 13 Group 14 Group 15 Group 16
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter) x Clock synchronization
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. B-11

(continued)
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter) x Direct command transmission Select and execute command
Direct set point command transmission
Select and execute set point command
C_SE ACTTERM used x No additional definition Short pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Long pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Persistent output Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter) Counter request x General request counter
Counter freeze without reset
Request counter group 1
Counter freeze with reset
Counter reset
Addresses per group have to be specified
B-12

(continued)
Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter) x Threshold value Smoothing value Low limit for transmission of measured value High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter) Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter) File transfer in monitor direction File transfer in control direction F_FR_NA_1 F_FR_NA_1
B-13

(continued)
B3
Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103
This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the P63x. B 3.1 B 3.1.1 Interoperability Physical Layer
B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface x x EIA RS 485 No. of loads 32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of them can be operated on one line. For detailed information see EIA RS 485, Section 3. B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface x x x Glass fiber Plastic fiber F-SMA connector BFOC/2.5 connector B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate x x 9,600 bit/s 19,200 bit/s
B-14

(continued)
B 3.1.2
Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer. B 3.1.3 Application Layer
B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion standard. B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU x One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address) More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction INF x x x x x <0> <0> <2> <3> <4> <5> Description End of general interrogation Time synchronization Reset FCB Reset CU Start / restart Power on
B-15

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction Schneider Electric Designations Address Description
INF <16> <17> x x x x <18> <19> <20> <21> <22> x x x x x x x x <23> <24> <25> <26> <27> <28> <29> <30>
Description Auto-recloser active Teleprotection active Protection active LED reset Blocking of monitor direction Test mode Local parameter setting Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Characteristic 3 Characteristic 4 Auxiliary input 1 Auxiliary input 2 Auxiliary input 3 Auxiliary input 4
003 030 021 010 037 075 037 071
MAIN: Protection enabled MAIN: Reset indicat. USER COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. MAIN: Test mode
036 090 036 091 036 092 036 093 034 000 034 001 034 002 034 003
PSS: PS 1 active PSS: PS 2 active PSS: PS 3 active PSS: PS 4 active LOGIC: Input 1 EXT LOGIC: Input 2 EXT LOGIC: Input 3 EXT LOGIC: Input 4 EXT
B-16

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction Schneider Electric Designations Address Description
INF <32> <33> <35> x <36>1 <37> x <38> <39> x x <46> <47>
Description Measured value supervision I Measured value supervision V Phase sequence supervision Trip circuit supervision I>> back-up operation VT fuse failure Teleprotection disturbed Group warning Group alarm
041 200
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty
004 061
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT
036 100 004 065
SFMON: Warning (relay) MAIN: Blocked/Faulty
The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals. B-17

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Schneider Electric Designations Address Description
INF <48> <49> <50> <51> <52>
Description Ground fault L1 Ground fault L2 Ground fault L3 Earth fault forward, i.e. line Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
B-18

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Schneider Electric Designations Address Device Description
INF <64> <65> <66> <67> x <68> <69> <70> <71> <72> <73> <74> <75> <76>
Description Start /pick-up L1 Start /pick-up L2 Start /pick-up L3 Start /pick-up N General trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip I>> (back-up operation) Fault location X in ohms Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Teleprotection signal transmitted Teleprotection signal received Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6
036 071
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1
<77> <78> <79> <80> <81> <82> <83>
B-19

(continued)
INF x <84> <85> x x x <86> <87> <88> <89> <90> <91> <92> <93>
Description General starting Breaker failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system E Trip I> Trip I>> Trip IN> Trip IN>>
Schneider Electric Designations Address Device Description 036 000 MAIN: General starting
041 002 041 003 041 004
DIFF: Trip signal 1 DIFF: Trip signal 2 DIFF: Trip signal 3
B-20

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction Schneider Electric Designations Address Description
INF <128> <129> <130>
Description CB on by AR CB on by long-time AR AR blocked
B 3.1.3.3.7 Measured values in Monitor Direction Schneider Electric Designations Address Description
INF <144> <145> <146> <147> <148>
Description Measured value I Measured values I, V Measured values I, V, P, Q Measured values IN, VEN Measured values IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f
B-21

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction INF <240> <241> <243> <244> <245> <249> <250> <251> Description Read headings of all defined groups Read values or attributes of all entries of one group Read directory of a single entry Read value or attribute of a single entry General interrogation of generic data Write entry with confirmation Write entry with execution Write entry abort
B-22

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction INF x x <0> <0> Description Initiation of general interrogation Time synchronization
B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction Schneider Electric Designations Address Description
INF <16> <17> x x x x x x <18> <19> <23>1 <24>2 <25>3 <26>4
Description Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off LED reset Activate characteristic 1 Activate characteristic 2 Activate characteristic 3 Activate characteristic 4
003 030 021 010 003 060 003 060 003 060 003 060
MAIN: Protection enabled MAIN: Reset indicat. USER PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
1 2
Switches Switches 3 Switches 4 Switches
PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS:
Param.subs.sel.USER Param.subs.sel.USER Param.subs.sel.USER Param.subs.sel.USER
to 'Parameter set 1' to 'Parameter set 2' to 'Parameter set 3' to 'Parameter set 4' B-23

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction INF <240> <241> <243> <244> <245> <248> <249> <250> <251> Description Read headings of all defined groups Read values or attributes of all entries of one group Read directory of a single entry Read value or attribute of a single entry General interrogation of generic data Write entry Write entry with confirmation Write entry with execution Write entry abort
B-24

(continued)
B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions x x x Test mode Blocking of monitor direction Disturbance data Generic services x Private data
B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is only one choice for each measured value. Measured value Max. MVAL = nom. value multiplied by 1.2 Current A Current B Current C Voltage A-G Voltage B-G Voltage C-G Enabled power P Reactive power Q Frequency f Voltage A-B or 2.4
B-25
B-26
Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams
C 1 Location diagram for P631 C 1.1 40TE case, pin-terminal connection
C-1
Terminal connection diagram for P631 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagram P631.403, part 1 of 3
C-1

(continued)
C-2
C-2

(continued)
C-3
Terminal connection diagram for P631 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagram P631.403, part 3 of 3 The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown in Figure C-48
C-3

(continued)
C 1.2 40TE case, ring-terminal connection
C-4
Terminal connection diagram for P631 in 40TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram P631.404, part 1 of 3
C-4

(continued)
C-5
Terminal connection diagram for P631 in 40TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram P631.404, part 2 of 3
C-5

(continued)
C-6
Terminal connection diagram for P631 in 40TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram P631.404, part 3 of 3 The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown in Figure C-48
C-6

(continued)
C-7
C-7

(continued)
C-8
C-8

(continued)
C-9
C-9

(continued)
C-10 Terminal connection diagram for P632 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagram P632.403, part 4 of 6
C-10

(continued)
C-11

(continued)
C-12 Terminal connection diagram for P632 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagram P632.403, part 6 of 6 The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown in Figure C-48
C-12

(continued)
C-13 Terminal connection diagram for P632 in 84TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram P632.404, part 1 of 6
C-13

(continued)
C-14

(continued)
C-15

(continued)
C-16

(continued)
C-17

(continued)
C-18 Terminal connection diagram for P632 in 84TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram P632.404, part 6 of 6 The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown in Figure C-48
C-18

(continued)
C-19

(continued)
C-20

(continued)
C-21

(continued)
C-22

(continued)
C-23

(continued)
C 3.2 84TE case, pin-terminal connection
C-24

(continued)
C-25

(continued)
C-26

(continued)
C-27

(continued)
C-28

(continued)
C-29

(continued)
C-30

(continued)
C-31

(continued)
C-32

(continued)
C-33

(continued)
C-34

(continued)
C-35

(continued)
C-36

(continued)
C-37

(continued)
C-38

(continued)
C-39

(continued)
C-40

(continued)
C-41

(continued)
C-42

(continued)
C-43

(continued)
C-44

(continued)
C-45

(continued)
C-46

(continued)
C-47

(continued)
C 5 Ethernet Module
LOCATION ITEM DESIGN. CONNECTOR MEANING
+ -X7
ITEM REFER.
STATU S
REFER.
Comm. fiber interface Ethernet (100 Base - FX)
RX
ST
X/Y
-U17
+ -X8
ITEM REFER.
STATUS
REFER.
TX
ST
X/Y
-U18
+ -X13
ITEM REFER.
STATUS
REFER.
RX TX
SC
X/Y
-U26
+ -X12
ITEM REFER.
STATUS
REFER.
Comm. interface Ethernet (10 Base T / 100 Base TX)
X // Y
RJ45
-U25
LOCATION ITEM DESIGN. CONNECTOR MEANING Comm. interface Channel 2
+ -X10
ITEM REFER.
STATUS
REFER.
X // Y 1 2 3 4 5 + D1[T] RS 485 + D2[R] -U20
: Alternative module (see order inform.)
Px3x_Ethernet _02B_EN
C-48 Location diagram for the Ethernet module, applicable to: 40TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagrams: P631.403, P632.403, P633.404 40TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram: P631.404 84TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagrams: P633.405, P634.403 84TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagrams: P632.404, P633.406, P634.404
C-48
Appendix D - Overview of Changes
Overview of Changes P63x Version

P631-301-401601 P632-301-401601 P633-301-401/402601 Release: 15.01.01 P631-301-401601-701 P632-301-401601-701 P633-301-401/402601-701 Release: 03.04.01
Changes Initial product release
Hardware Diagram Software Device
No changes No changes Cyrillic characters supported Analog (I/O) module Y supported Communication interfaces supported with protocols selectable by switch-over Bug fixing for clock synchronization by IRIG-B signal This version has no release!
COMM1 IRIG-B
P634-301-401601-702 Release: 17.05.01 P631-301-401601-703 P632-301-401601-703 P633-301-401/402601-703 P634-301-401601-703 Release: 02.08.01
No changes No changes
Improved calibration algorithm No changes No changes
P631-301-401601-704 P632-301-401601-704 P633-301-401/402601-704 P634-301-401601-704 Release: 17.12.01
Device types with ring-terminal connection supported.
D- 1

(continued)
Version
P631-302-401/402 602 P632-302-401/402 602 P633-302-401/402/403 602 P634-302-401/402 602 Release: 25.01.02
Changes Hardware Designs with ring-terminal connection have been added. New option with accelerated output module featuring 4 thyristors. Diagram Connection diagrams for device types fitted with ring-terminal connection have been added. New option with accelerated output module is taken into account. Selection of spontaneous signals and setting of a 'Time-out' have been added. The interface communication protocol 'COURIER' has been added. Selection and testing of spontaneous signals have been added to the interface communication protocols according to IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101 and ILS-C. The new 'logical' communication interface 2 has been added. Display of the temperature as a per-unit value has been added. Separate setting for the secondary nominal current value of the system transformers for measurement of phase currents and residual currents. Assignment of the 'logical' communication interfaces COMM1 and COMM2 to the communication channels of module A. Grouping of the signals issued by measuring circuit monitoring (MCMON) to form a multiple signal. The signals D I F F : I d > > t r i g g e r e d and D IF F : I d > > > t r i g g e r e d have been added. Modified texts for some of the settings. Per-unit measured values have been added. The signal T H R M x : N o t r e a d y has been added. The measuring circuit monitoring functions are now available.
Software DVICE
COMM1
COMM2 MEASI MAIN
DIFF THRM1 to THRM2 MCM_1 to MCM_4 V/f
The overfluxing protection function is now available. The number of binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T increased from 16 to 40. No changes No changes Bug fixing: The device was blocked following a start-up if either one of the protections V<> or f<> were enabled, due to erroneous hardware selfidentification.
LOGIC
P631-302-401/402-602-705 Hardware P632-302-401/402-602-705 P633-302-401/402/403-602-705 Diagram P634-302-401/402-602-705 Release: 19.04.2002
Software DVICE
D-2
Version
P631-302-401/402-602-706 Hardware P632-302-401/402-602-706 P633-302-401/402/403-602-706 Diagram P634-302-401/402-602-706 Release: 06.06.2002
Changes No changes No changes Bug fixing: Two pixels in the Cyrillic characters were displayed incorrectly. This bug affected only the language variant -805. No changes No changes Bug fixing: A device ID for the entry of an order extension number was missing. Amplitude matching factor restrictions are relaxed. Zero sequence current filtering for odd vector group IDs is improved. Setting ranges of the tripping characteristic and of the unrestrained differential element are extended. The hysteresis of the tripping characteristic can now be disabled. Definite-time trip delay is available. REF_1 REF_2 REF_3 Amplitude matching factor restrictions are relaxed. Two new operating modes are available. One provides a high impedance measuring principle. The setting range of the unrestrained differential element is extended. New tripping signals are provided for the application of the low impedance operating mode with autotransformers. IDMT1 IDMT2 IDMT3 f<> Accuracy of tripping time is improved. Particularly the characteristic 'IEC extremely inverse' is now within the claimed tolerance range. Measurements of minimum frequency during an underfrequency situation and maximum frequency during an overfrequency situation have been added. Setting range of operate value V/f>> is extended.
Software LOC
P631-302-401/402-603 P632-302-401/402-603 P633-302-401/402/403-603 P634-302-401/402-603 Release: 27.11.2002
Hardware Diagram Software DVICE DIFF
V/f
D- 3

(continued)
Version
Changes
P634-303-403/404-604 Release: 09.10.2003
This version is project-specific and only available on request! There is no software version 604 available for the devices P631, P632, P633! The Ethernet communication module is available. The updated connection diagrams now include the interfaces for the Ethernet communication module: P434.403 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P434.404 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection) Software UCA2 Initial implementation of the UCA2 communication protocol. The new hardware variants now offer, per ordering option, additional operating thresholds for the binary signal inputs: >18 V (standard variant) (no order ext. No.) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) (Order ext. No. 461) >155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V) (Order ext. No. 462) Installation of the standard variant is generally recommended if the application does not specifically require such binary signal inputs with higher operate thresholds. The Ethernet communication module interface is now also available for the P631, P632 and P633. Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the interfaces for the Ethernet communication module: P631 -403 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P631 -404 (for 40TE case, ring-terminal connection) P632 -403 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P632 -404 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection) P633 -403 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633 -404 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633 -404 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection) Software UCA2 Implementation of the UCA2 communication protocol in the P631, P632 and P633. Extension to all 4 devices of the expanded spontaneous signaling range initially implemented in the P634-604. In addition, GOOSE messages and fault transmission are now supported. DIFF The saturation discriminator was further improved.
Hardware Diagram
P631-303-403/404-605 P632-303-403/404-605 P633-303-404/405/406-605 P634-303-403/404-605 Release: 30.04.2004
Hardware
D-4
Version
Changes
P631-304-403/404-606 P632-304-403/404-606 P633-304-404/405/406-606 P634-304-403/404-606 Release: 09.05.2005
Hardware
The new hardware variants now offer, per ordering option, additional operating thresholds for the binary signal inputs: >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) (Order ext. No. -463) >146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) (Order ext. No. -464) Installation of the standard variant is still generally recommended if the application does not specifically require such binary signal inputs with higher operating thresholds. An optional processor board with a DSP coprocessor is now available. This coprocessor provides a better overall performance of the supplementary functions of the device. It is the hardware requirement for the use of the new current transformer supervision function (CTS).
Diagram Software COMM1
No changes Note: Software version -606 is compatible with all previous hardware releases. Support of the 7-byte time tag length has been corrected (003 198 C O M M 1 : T i m e t a g l e n g t h = 7 byte). Transmission of negative cyclic measured values has been corrected. Acknowledgment of the general scan command has been corrected. Signals in the general scan are now transmitted correctly without a time tag. Command rejections issued internally by the protection device (between the processor module and communication module) are no longer signaled by the communication interface. Commands are now transmitted correctly, even when the ASDU address length is 2 bytes (003 193 C O M M 1 : A d d r e s s l e n g t h A S D U = 2 Byte). Bug fixing in the COURIER protocol: Upon activation of COURIER protocol a warm restart of the device was initiated.
Bug fixing in the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol:
SFMON
Addendum: As of version 605 the 'memory function' for the warning signal memory may be set. After the associated timer stage has elapsed, a renewed occurrence of a warning is processed the same way as if it where a first occurrence. The recording duration for binary tracks is now limited to 1 minute in order to prevent recording of endless events.
FT_RC
D- 5

(continued)
Version
Changes
MAIN
Priority control of clock synchronization is now settable. Positive- and negative-sequence currents from all ends are now continuously calculated and displayed as measured operating data (primary and per-unit values). The functionality for the current summation was extended. Besides summation of current values from 2 ends it is now also possible to sum current values from 3 ends and to subtract current values from 2 ends.
SFMON
In the course of platform harmonization the configuration table of the user defined alarm condition has been supplemented by the instantaneous outputs 30...32 and the timed outputs 30...32 (t) of the programmable LOGIC:
098 053 098 054 098 055 098 056 098 057 098 058 SFMON: SFMON: SFMON: SFMON: SFMON: SFMON: Output Output Output Output Output Output 30 ~ 042 092 L O G I C : 3 0 ( t ) ~ 042 092 L O G I C : 31 ~ 042 092 L O G I C : 3 1 ( t ) ~ 042 092 L O G I C : 32 ~ 042 092 L O G I C : 3 2 ( t ) ~ 042 092 L O G I C : Output 30 Output 30 (t) Output 31 Output 31 (t) Output 32 Output 32 (t)
These signals can be used to create an alarm signal under complex application conditions. This signaling has no influence on the device's operation (i.e. no warm restart or blocking). OL_RC, FT_RC Overload and fault recording now have a joint and complete list of possible entries (merged list of all previous signals). In practice it became apparent that limitations with regard to possible entries in both recording memories would bring no advantages but make analyzing more difficult, as both recording memories could be open at the same time (e.g. a thermal overload situation could lead to a loss of insulation which would cause a fault). The minimum setting value for the characteristic gradients m1 and m2 have been modified to 0.10 (previously 0.15). The starting condition for the saturation discriminator was modified so that the DIFF protection testing may now be carried out again with conventional test sets (which do not provide correct transient signals). Along with the new CTS function, an additional threshold, I d i f f > ( C T S ) , is provided in order to de-sensitize differential protection in case there is a fault in the CT's secondary circuit. For more information about this feature please refer to CTS description. Bug fixing: In some cases the overreaching inrush stabilization function did not operate properly. In addition the signal from the inrush stabilization was sometimes immediately reset when a differential protection trip was issued. REF_1 REF_2 REF_3 If the new current transformer supervision (CTS) function is used, the ground fault differential protection function associated with the faulted end was blocked when a CT fault was detected. For more information about this feature please refer to CTS description.
DIFF
D-6
Version
Changes
CTS
First implementation of a current transformer secondary wiring supervision which operates fast enough to prevent differential protection from tripping under load in case of a CT failure. This function can only be used if the new processor board with DSP coprocessor is fitted! The existing measuring-circuit monitoring functions, based on the phase currents per end, have been enhanced and can now be used to detect so as to be able to use the function to detect a broken conductors (broken conductor protection') on the primary CTs' primary sides.
MCM_1 MCM_2 MCM_3 MCM_4
D- 7

(continued)
Version
Changes
P631-305-403/404-610 P632-305-403/404-610 P633-305-404/405/406-610 P634-305-403/404-610 Release: June 2006
Hardware
No changes at this time. During the P63x 610's release proceedings, a new option with the order extension number -937 for the Ethernet module was released and therefore the hardware version changes from -304 to -305.
Diagram Software IEC GOOSE GSSE UCA2 MAIN
No changes Note: Software version -610 is fully compatible with all previous hardware versions.
Implementation of the new communication protocol per IEC 61850.
This firmware does not support the UCA2 communication protocol. The new phase reversal function is intended to protect machines in a pumped- storage power stations that are operated either as motors or generators, depending on the demand. In such applications it is common practice to swap two phases in order to facilitate the pumping operation. Thanks to this phase reversal function, the P63x can maintain correct operation of all protection functions even when the phase reversal switch is inside the protected zone. Selection of the vector groups may now be set individually in 4 parameter subsets. Bug fixing: The trip signals issued by the 3 measuring systems (D I F F : T r i p s i g n a l n , with n = 1, 2, or 3) were previously issued instantly, regardless of the set time-delays. (Note: D IFF : T r i p s i g n a l was issued correctly, including the timedelay.)
DIFF
IDMTn
Improved accuracy, particularly for the 'IEC extremely inverse' characteristic.
D-8
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric 11/2010
www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P63x/EN M/Ca4 Version: -610
2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric 01/2011
www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P63x/EN M/Bm6 Version: -610 -611 -620 -621, Volume 1
2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

p63x en M bm6 610-611-620-621 Vol 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

p63x en M bm6 610-611-620-621 Vol 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634

Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN M/Bm6

-305/6/7/8 -305/6/7/8 -305/6/7/8 -305/6/7/8

-403/4/5/6/7/8 -403/4/5/6/7/8 -404/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12 -403/4/5/6/7/8

-610/11/20/21 -610/11/20/21 -610/11/20/21 -610/11/20/21

Modifications After Going to Press

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

(Function Group OUTP) (Function Group MEASO)

(Function Group LED) (Function Group MAIN)

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

1 Application and Scope

Application and Scope

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Measured Value Functions

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

OP_RC OL_DA OL_RC FT_DA FT_RC

Further functions Further functions

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Recording and Data Acquisition

Iph IY,c Iph Iph

always available optional or specific

Transformer Differential Protection P63x

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Inputs and outputs

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Control and display

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Overview of all function groups

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Technical Data Conformity

General device data

or Leads (X9 and X10):

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Mechanical robustness 1(**)

Mechanical robustness 2(**)

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ca4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

2.5 Measuring inputs

Inputs and Outputs

Binary signal inputs

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Direct current input

Resistance thermometer inputs

BCD Measured Data Output

Direct Current Output

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

2.6 Local control panel